Systems Security: A Discussion Of The Physical Aspects Descriptive Essay College Application Essay Help

Security is a fundamental management responsibility of data protection concerned with determining the access control of genuine entities and also with the protection of computer systems from internal or external threats (Margariti et al, 2007).

Today, more than ever before, organizations are increasingly investing more resources in information security with the aim to reduce the risks and impacts of system susceptibilities and risks to a level that could be considered as acceptable (Walters, 2007).

This paper purposes to describe some of the basic steps that could be taken for the physical security of computers used by physicians and other practitioners in an urgent care center to remotely access patient data and their email system through a virtual private network.

According to Etzioni (2011), the first layer of security organizations need to take into consideration is the physical security of the computer systems.

This type of security needs to consider not only the individuals who have direct physical access to the computers, but also if they are allowed to have access to the machines and how these systems could be set to limit illegitimate tampering. As such, the steps taken to ensure physical security of computer systems must have the capacity to decrease the possibility of success for any kind of illegitimate access or attacks (Walters, 2007).

One of the ways through which physical security of computer systems could be enhanced is to restrict access to areas where the computers are kept to those in possession of appropriate identification badge and/or any other form of authorization (Albuquerque, Krumm


World Bank and IMF Essay college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

IMF and World Bank effects on Developed and Developing Countries



Introduction Often times, the world has suffered terrible financial crises. The most severe being the 2007-2008 global financial crisis. Every time, a financial crisis has struck, economic policy makers meet in a conference like they did in 1944 in Bretton Woods conference (Hellener, 2010, p. 1).

However, the crisis has been recurrent regardless of the many policies that have been formulated. The failure of the policies in implementation has more often been blamed on policy mistakes made by developing world where the crisis emerges from (Hellener, 2010, p. 10).

Out of this, the solution in 1980s was perceived could originate from loaning the developing countries. International Monetary Fund (IMF) and World Bank were given the role of protecting global market from sovereign defaults and promote the adjustment programs in developing countries (Hellener, 2010, p. 9). This paper will seek to evaluate the effects of IMF and World Bank in the developing countries.

IMF and World Bank effects on Developed and Developing Countries Both IMF and World Bank definitions of developed and developing counties are based on either high or low capital incomes which in turn depict the degree of interaction into the global financial system. Their definitions have created an aspect of losers and winners (Esty, 2002, p. 2) where the developed countries are the winners, and the developing countries are the losers.

The developing world has been placed in a losing position; most often than not, they are in need of support as they do not meet the set standards of the definition. It has always been an unfair judgment as the benefits of global trade may not be fairly distributed because not in all countries people are able to access free trade and fair economic growth (Esty, 2002, p. 3).

Therefore, the developing countries are the ones who have been utilizing the policy set in Bretton Woods conference of borrowing, and thereby, giving IMF and World Bank a great chance of influence as policy enforcers.

The influence of IMF and World Bank has greatly “contributed to the strengthening of the macroeconomic framework of member countries, reducing the public sector deficits and public debt accumulation, improving monetary control and reducing the distortions and dislocation of resources brought about by high rates of inflation” (Buira, 2003, p. 1).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This has set the developing countries at a vulnerable position where they are the ones always borrowing money from the developed countries in order to pull up their economies. The capital flow ceases to be from the developed to the developing as the developing repays the loan. Most countries, for instance, have tried to use the “theory of the second best” but have been greatly opposed by IMF.

The theory works when a country in a crisis through government intervention improves its welfare by the introduction of another country that is performing better economically (Buira, 2003, p. 1). This move was criticized by IMF even after Asia blaming the crisis on the speculative global financial flows (Hellener, 2010, p. 10). With such a kind of interference, Asia was not in a position to fill up the economic gap that was there hence the reason for its continued deterioration in the economy.

The idea of “market mechanism” developed in both IMF and World Bank operations have posed a very bad inequality problem for the countries that participate in the global financial markets. This is because, for a country to be considered as developed or developing there are factors like locality, population, and available resources that need to be considered.

For example, it will be unfair to judge a country that does not participate in international trade for lack of resources to a country that has oil, gold and other minerals, which facilitate the same. There is, therefore, a global inequality as 20% of the world population takes 80% of the global resources while the rest is shared the remaining 20% of the world population. No wonder the gap between the 80% of the population that lacks even the basic amenities gets (Danaher, 2001, p. 25).

However, time has revealed the hidden tricks played on developing countries. For example, in 2007-2008 during global financial crisis, China by market capitalization remained the only one that had the three largest banks.

This exposed the U.S., having been one of the countries considered to be developed dependent on foreign support from China and elsewhere (Hellener, 2010, p. 11). This makes it illegitimate to consider US and Britain as having more economic power than China.

There is a call to policy makers and financial analysts to question the stability of the developed countries without the support of the developing countries. The cited example proved that financial flow is from the under developed to the developed world which leaves the developing world with more needs than the developed world yet they contribute a lot to the global economy.

We will write a custom Essay on World Bank and IMF specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The policies of IMF and World Bank to rely on market solutions and international trade have been challenged with time. A country’s economic power cannot be categorized by what the market produces as the market only achieves certain goals.

This has caused its fault in evaluating the market failures that cause limited resource circulation in the developing countries (Buira, 2003, p. 3). For example, in a continent like Africa with a stable local economy had not suffered a financial crisis before the global trade came in. Everything was traded locally and there was no lack.

One did not need to have money as the mode of trade was barter trade. Global trade has brought everything to tumble as the currency stability cannot be predicted. The U.S. dollar being the standard global currency keeps on fluctuating in value hence affecting the countries whose currencies are weaker than the dollar.

This causes a great inequality where the market favors those with money as they make more money from the people who do not have. To sum up, the poor get poorer and the rich get richer, finally making it difficult for the gap to be bridged (Danaher, 2001, p. 32).

World Bank and the IMF are the most powerful enforcers of growth and a system of measurement that hides the social and environmental cost of market-led growth. Any eminent change from them will flow down to every other person and foster economic progress (Danaher, 2001, p. 32).

To regain their position to the public that has lost trust in them as economic leaders, they will be needed to start by correcting the mistakes they have done in setting unrealistic policies, which at the end get challenged every time there is a crisis. They also need to get back to the public where they, together with the public, will look for solutions that will operate at all times without subjecting any given country to any more financial risk.

Conclusion From the discussion, it is evident that IMF and World Bank have contributed greatly to the widening of the gap between the developed and the developing counties. This comes about from their definition of the two, creating a superiority factor whereby, and countries with highest global finance interaction are being considered as developed.

The consideration has created financial inequality where the developed countries, which have the least population, enjoy the biggest share of the global economy while the rest remains to share the remainder. The results of this are that the rich countries continue becoming richer, and the poor countries get poorer.

Not sure if you can write a paper on World Bank and IMF by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More However, this has been challenged as it was analyzed in 2007-2008 that the developed countries actually depend on the developing counties. There is, therefore, a need for the World Bank and IMF to revise their policies and get back to re-establishing the developing countries’ economy. They should device a way where the resources in the developing countries will remain with them to help them further in development.

References Buira, A 2003, Challenges to the World Bank and IMF: developing country perspective, Wimbledon Publishing Company, London.

Danaher, K 2001, 10 Reasons to Abolish The IMF and World Bank, Seven Stories Press, Washington, D. C.

Esty, D 2002, ‘The World Trade Organization’s legitimacy crisis’, World Trade Review, vol. 1, no. 1, pp. 7–22.

Hellener, E 2010, ‘A Bretton Woods Moment? The 2007-2008 crisis and the future of global finance’, International Affairs, vol. 86, no. 3, pp. 619–636.


Five Worlds of Plato’s Cave Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Plato investigates human consciousness in terms of the social cooperation. The way of the personal improvement and education can be confusing and painful. Plato’s parable The Allegory of the Cave describes a community people who do not acquainted with the external world. Their life goes around the worlds inside the Cave which are symbolized by the shadows on the wall of the Cave and puppets in fire – the offset light these shadows.

People in the Cave do not interact with the worlds outside the Cave, reflected in water, the things themselves, including the stars and the moon in the night sky and the sun. Reflecting about the reasons of accepting or declining the information, Plato consists that a closed mind is inborn, although, there is still a chance to open it. Plato considers the ascent to truth confusing and painful, as the people in the Cave have to rebuild their mind and usual comprehension of the things.

Plato discusses about the way of getting the information, thinking about the reason why people behave like they are prisoners of the Cave. If they are prisoners, they must be released. They will get the freedom to contemplate the whole world and to imagine freely. But the point is that they were not forced to stay in darkness. Now they see only offset shadows, games of fire on the wall in front of the Cave where the puppet-handlers are inseparable part of their life.

The people in the Cave are unable to see something else, their heads are motionless and their legs and necks are fixed. This fire is the pure Knowledge, but people are able to see only its shadows. They chose this way which is more safe and easy. It is better to see only the shadows, not the flame that can burn. The outside world can be dangerous, as the sun in eclipse is dangerous to the eyes. There may be a number of terrible things which can destroy the usual way of life.

The terror of the ascent is obvious: the world can be changed and it is impossible to predict the results of such transformation. If people in the Cave were free, they would start to imagine. Every social phenomenon they would explain from a position of superstitions. Educated in the spirit of ignorance, they would take a lot of things for granted. They would look at the world through the prism, the barrier that stands in their minds.

Imagination plays a big part in our perception of the world. Plato considers this position in a negative way. People would like to stay in darkness, instead of suffer from “bright light”. Communicating with each other and interacting with the outside worlds, people in the Cave would name the objects, would open the new facilities and different elements. This is the way of the ascent; however, people in the Cave will be in a danger.

Nevertheless, the ascent from the shadows to the sun involves not only terror. The beauty of the outside world is worth to be confused at the beginning. The real knowledge is the most valuable thing that can help people in the Cave to improve their life, to forget all fears and prejudices. This knowledge can be achieved only in a way of interaction with the things outside, including stars, moon and sun.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore, it is necessary to claim that people in the Cave, as well as everyone in this world, should not be afraid of the ascent from one world of things to another. All those worlds can be a part of one common world of consciousness which will be a source of the real knowledge.

Obviously, no one wants to consider oneself as a prisoner of a close mind. However, often, we cannot understand that world is bigger than some “cave” and, although the ascent from one world to another can be complicated, the final result is worth to be achieved. I have experienced such situation with one of my friends. He came to our city from another part of the country and, at the beginning, he did not want to meet people and to communicate with someone.

He lived in his own separated world, studying at home and trying to spend all his time away from people. Only members of his family could talk with him. I wonder how he could see the outside world. For someone who does not talk with people, the local community may seem dangerous, as people may judge the new member. However, it reality it is not true. My local community is welcoming and friendly.

But how the guy who does not talk with someone can understand this? Although his “cave” allowed him to study, get knowledge about sciences, he could play sports and different games with the members of family, but surely it is not enough for a modern citizen. As his neighbor, I wanted to meet him and to make the acquaintance with a new person. However, honestly, I had a number of doubts about this guy, as such solitary way of life seems strange, especially in case of the young man.

I was invited to his home and we found that both of us can give so many things to each other. I understood that he is well-educated, friendly and funny person who needs someone to help him to involve in the social life. Although sometimes it seems confusing and dangerous to change the habitual way of live, the consequences of such transformation can be absolutely profitable.

Only one who does not scare to move and ascend will get the positive results. However, most of the time, people need someone who can help them to comprehend the necessity of cooperating with other worlds, communities, people and different things.

As the people in Plato’s Cave are narrow-minded, they chose the life of prisoners by themselves. This bright allusion is always actual characteristic of society. And even today, in the age of the outstanding technical facilities, people still can be afraid to ascend, as they scared of the possible danger and difficulties. People, who were not forced to live in darkness, choose this way for its demonstrative simplicity.

We will write a custom Essay on Five Worlds of Plato’s Cave specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The real knowledge can be found only in case of cooperation of all worlds. However, due to the peculiarities of human consciousness, people may start comprehending the new things from the position of superstitions and barriers in their minds. Thereby, people need someone who can teach them and show the real meaning of the things, to give them a change to improve their live and to get the knowledge.


Reducing Energy Usage Essay essay help online free

Table of Contents Reducing energy usage

Energy source, Reduction and efficiency

Hindrances to Policy enforcement


Reducing energy usage Figure1. Energy consumption in three days.

Figure 2. Different energy use in three days.

Day Gas Petroleum Coal 1 60 40 0 2 70 30 10 3 90 10 0 Figure 3. Purpose of the energy in three days.

Energy Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Gas Lighting


True hadiths and the fabricated ones Essay essay help online: essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

The Science of Hadith


Works Cited

Introduction Muslims derive the laws that govern them from many sources. The Qur’an is the most important source of law for the Muslims, followed by the Hadith. Hadith is the compilation of the words and deeds of Prophet Muhammad and his companions.

The companions were the students of Prophet Muhammad. These compilations have been passing down many generations up to the present. Many scholars have tried to expound on the hadith throughout history. Their writings have also been included in the hadith.

However, some hadiths are not authentic because their writers either altered their original meanings or falsified some facts. This discussion therefore looks into the efforts of scholars in trying to distinguish between the true hadiths from the fabricated ones in order to prevent the Muslims from being misled.

The Science of Hadith The hadith is divided into two parts. The first part includes the words and deeds of Prophet Muhammad and his companions (matn) while the other part contains the chain of transmitters of the information from Prophet Muhammad through many generations (isnad).

Muslims look at the chain of transmitters in determining what text are authentic. Each hadith has the text, the chain of reporters and the first sentence of the text (taraf). The hadith is classified by Muslims into four sections.

The first consists of the statements of the Prophet Muhammad, the second includes his deeds, the third includes the deeds of the Prophet Muhammad’s companions, and the fourth contains Allah’s inspired words through Prophet Muhammad, which are not written in the Qur’an (Kamali 7).

The science of the hadith involves the quest of hadith scholars to assess the narrations contained in the hadith in order to separate the true accounts from the ones that have been fabricated. The science of hadith enhances the understanding of the Qur’an by the Muslims.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There is a raging controversy on whether the hadith should continue being used as a source of religious instruction. Opponents of the hadith cite reasons like its inaccuracy and irrelevance in the modern setting.

Authentication of the hadith was necessary as some hadiths contain misleading facts due to inaccuracy of the text, forgetfulness of some facts by the reporters and deceitfulness and fabrication of other texts. Since the days of Prophet Muhammad, authenticity of the hadith was a matter of great concern.

For instance, Prophet Muhammad told the companions not to write down his teachings because he did not want people to confuse his words with those of Allah. Later the Prophet asked the companions to write down his teachings but emphasized on truthfulness and accuracy in their recordings (Hasan 23).

When assessing the authenticity of the narrations of the hadith, the scholars examine various aspects. They examine the reference to a certain authority, the number of reporters involved in the narration, the memory strength and reliability of reporters, whether the links of isnad are interrupted or not, and the nature of the content and the isnad (Khan 40).

Four categories of hadith can be derived when examining them according to the reference to a certain authority. The hadith that is a revelation from God is classified as divine or Qudsi while that which is a narration from Prophet Muhammad is termed as elevated or Marfu. A hadith that is a companion’s narration only is classified as stopped (or Mauquf) while that which is from a successor is referred to as severed or Maqtu. The successors were the students of the companions (Khan 43).

When assessing the authenticity of the hadith according to the links of isnad, several categories are obtained. The first category is the Supported or Musnad, which refers to a hadith narrated by someone on the basis of the knowledge he gained from his teacher at a suitable learning time, and the chain of reporters proceed to a well known companion and finally to Prophet Muhammad.

Another category is Continuous or Muttasil, which describes a hadith with an uninterrupted chain of reporters going back only to a companion or a successor. The hurried or Mursal hadith is one in which there is no link between the successor and the Prophet. The successor directly quotes the Prophet without the link of a companion.

We will write a custom Essay on True hadiths and the fabricated ones specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More A broken hadith or Munqati is one with a missing link before the successor. In a perplexing hadith or Muadal, the reporter does not include two or more successive reporters in the isnad. Another category is Muallaq or hanging hadith in which the reporter omits the whole chain of reporters and directly quotes the Prophet. He does not quote anyone else in the chain of reporters (Hasan 32).

Another approach that the scholars use in determining the authenticity of the hadith is through examining the number of reporters at each stage of the isnad. From this assessment, the scholars have come up with five categories. The scholars classify a hadith as consecutive or Mutawatir if a very large number of people were involved in its reporting.

The scholars assume that a large number of people is not capable of coming up with as consistent fabrication, and therefore that hadith is declared authentic. A hadith that is narrated by fewer reporters than the Mutawir is referred to as an isolated hadith or Ahad. Isolated hadiths can fall in three classes.

The first one is Mash’hur or famous hadith, which is narrated by more than two reporters. A rare or strong hadith (Aziz) is narrated by only two reporters at any stage of the chain of reporters. A hadith that is narrated by only one reporter at any stage of the isnad is referred to as a strange hadith or Gharib. The fewer the reporters of a hadith, the less authentic it becomes (Hasan 37).

In assessing the authenticity of the hadith according to the nature of the isnad and the text, two categories are derived. A denounced hadith or Munkar is used to refer to a hadith whose narrator is weak and the narration contradicts another hadith, which is considered authentic. An interpolated hadith or Mudraj is a narration that is an addition to the hadith being narrated (A’zami 49).

The scholars also gauge the authenticity of a hadith based on the memory strength and reliability of the reporters. This procedure is used as the final test of whether a hadith should be declared authentic or not. From this assessment, four categories of hadiths are obtained.

A hadith is termed to be sound or Sahih if its narrator upholds his religion, has a reputation of reporting true narrations, fully understands what he is reporting without changing anything, and reports the exact words of the hadith. Moreover, the isnad of a sound hadith should be continuous, and the reporters at each stage of the chain should have a good reputation and strong memory. The text should also not have any inconsistencies or mistakes.

Another category is a good hadith or Hasan. This is one whose reporters are clear and the source is known. A weak or Da’if hadith is one that does not meet the requirements of Hasan or good hadith. The reasons for the weakness of a hadith could be due to discontinuity or if one of the reporters has a negative reputation of either fabrication of ideas, differing with authentic sources or lacking clarity in his reporting. Another category is the Maudu or fabricated hadith.

Not sure if you can write a paper on True hadiths and the fabricated ones by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More A hadith is termed as fabricated if the text is inconsistent with the known Prophet’s words or some of the reporters have a reputation of lying. A fabricated hadith will also have inconsistencies in the dates that certain well-known events took place. Such fabricated hadiths can mislead the Muslims and therefore should be identified and abandoned (Azizullah 37).

Conclusion The science of hadith is concerned with examining the hadith and determining which ones are authentic and which are fabricated. The hadiths were passed down from Prophet Muhammad, to the companions, then the successors and other reporters through many generations and therefore, there is a possibility of distortion of the message.

Therefore, scholars have used several methodologies to find out which hadiths are truly authentic and to discard the fabricated ones. Authentication of the hadiths is important because it prevents the Muslims from being misled by forged hadiths that give falsehoods and contradict the truth.

Works Cited A’ẓami, Muḥammad, Muṣṭafa. Studies In Hadith Methodology And Literature. USA: American Trust Publications, 1977. Print

Azizullah, Muhammad. Glimpses of the Hadith. UK: Crescent Publications, 1973. Print

Hasan, Suhaib. An introduction to the science of Hadith. Riyadh: Darussalam, 1996. Print

Kamali, Mohammad, Hashim. A Textbook of Ḥadith Studies: Authenticity, Compilation, Classification, And Criticism Of Ḥadith. Great Britain: Islamic Foundation, 2009. Print

Khan, Israr, Ahmad. Authentication of Hadith: Redefining the Criteria. London: International Institute of Islamic Thought, 2011. Print


A Culture of Change Essay essay help: essay help

“Describe the key elements that organizations use to make change a part of their culture”.

As a means of achieving cultural change, an entity ought to familiarize itself with the diverse aspects. First, the process of change must begin with influential employees in the organization who will convince colleagues that change is significant. As such, employees ought to understand why change must occur from the cognitive viewpoint.

These employees ought to facilitate the management in the distribution of company resources to areas that could profit the organization. Since change requires significant proportions of company resources, management should ensure convenience of resources before the change process proceeds. According to Jellison (2006), there should be appropriate allocation of funds for definite purposes with the intent of enhancing the change process.

In addition, there must be proper planning of details of the change process; thus, avoiding confusions at the later stages of implementation. Indeed, employees must be sufficiently motivated for them to acknowledge that they are constituents of the process and enable the realization of positive results. A Reward and Recognition plan for employees should be included in the plan of the change process.

They must get protection from institutional politics, which might slow the process (Jellison, 2006). There should be an evaluation of the creativity abilities amidst all employees so that the most creative employees can become leaders of task forces in the change process. Further, training of the desired cultures through hiring of professional personnel for example a Culture Manager is paramount.

“Identify one company that does this well, provide a justification for your answer”.

According to Ashley (2012), Chrysler Corp is a domestic automaker company, which was subject to criticism because of poor management. However, the company has experienced organizational changes over the years and is ranked the third largest in USA.

Justification According to Ashley (2012), Chrysler Corp is a superior illustration of an entity that has productively implemented a culture of change. The implementation of the change process occurred through planned network, which included modifications in the make of Chrysler cars and restructuring of company operations. Chrysler Corp changed from conventional management style to a more advanced style.

According to Ashley (2012), the newly established style designed five ‘smaller’ companies within the larger Chrysler Corp company in order to achieve immediate and efficient results. In addition, there was an adoption of new operations in the company like hiring Robert Eaton as company chair. There was a ban on many computer systems and a sole combined data base system was established.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Further, there was an introduction of an updated technological centre in the company. Indeed, the forceful and elaborate down sizing in the company yielded immediate results. For instance, Chrysler Corp had its expenditure reduced significantly as evident in cutting down unnecessary costs. Additionally proper address of competition from other automobile companies was evident. Consequently, Chrysler Corp divide in the market augmented since customers sent affirmative feedback.

According to Ashley (2012), there was a deliberate effort by new management to advance the superiority of products fabricated when the change process commenced. Additionally employees of the company were sufficiently motivated; thus, becoming part of the change process. A leadership that could implement the changes at Chrysler Corp with success justifies why the company qualifies as an example of an organization that exudes a culture of change.

References Ashley, S. (2012). Keys to Chrysler’s comeback. Web.

Jellison, J. (2006). Managing the dynamics of change: the fastest path to creating an engaged And productive work force. Illinois. ILL: McGraw Hill Publisher.


Cross Culture Management Case Study cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Cross Cultural Management Policy

Communication Strategy



Introduction Culture refers to the system of “shared attitudes, values, goals and practices that characterizes an institution, organization or a group”. Culture varies from region to region, since people tend to hold different beliefs, values and attitudes across the globe. Thus, cross cultural management refers to the process through which people learn about “variations of culture, practices, and preferences of an organization’s stakeholders”.

The increase in globalization and advancement in technology in the last two decades have created growth opportunities for multinational corporations. As competition increase in domestic markets, multinational firms normally join overseas markets in order to increase their sales and market shares. Firms that operate in foreign markets (countries), usually serve customers with diverse cultural backgrounds.

Additionally, multinational firms usually employ individuals with diverse cultural backgrounds. Managing employees from diverse cultures is a challenge since people tend to think, feel and act differently in different cultures.

Besides, effective communication is normally difficult to achieve in an organization with a multicultural workforce. Thus, cross-cultural management attempts to facilitate the creation of an organizational culture that every employee can identify with. The concept of cross cultural management will be discussed in this paper by analyzing the Home Furniture case study.

Cross Cultural Management Policy Home furniture is a multinational corporation operating in Europe, Asia, India and America. The company has adopted a polycentric approach to recruit its employees. A polycentric approach involves recruiting nationals of a foreign country to manage most of the operations of a subsidiary of a multinational corporation. Under this approach, the subsidiary tends to be autonomous and develops its own policies.

At Home Furniture, nationals of foreign countries normally hold midlevel management positions. An expatriate usually heads a subsidiary of the firm in the early years. The polycentric approach is beneficial to Home Furniture since it facilitates implementation of the firm’s sales and marketing policies. Since Home Furniture’s subsidiaries develop their own marketing policies, the company finds it important to recruit locals who have adequate market knowledge.

However, the use of a polycentric approach has also created problems for the company. In particular, there are cultural conflicts between the subsidiaries and the headquarters. For instance, the headquarters and the US subsidiary have different views on teamwork. Solving such cultural conflicts call for the formulation of policies that promote harmony between the subsidiaries and the headquarters.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Additionally, cultural conflicts can not be solved through a single policy. Thus, a multi-dimensional approach should be adopted to enhance harmony in a multinational corporation. The new CEO of Home Furniture can consider the following policies as she operates and recruit staff in different countries.

Given the autonomous nature of Home furniture’s subsidiaries, the new CEO should consistently follow the polycentric approach in hiring staff. Staff selection is fundamental when forming a multicultural workforce. The human resources department must focus on selecting the right individuals to hold key positions with the company.

Thus, it will be important to identify the desired characteristics of the workforce. For example, the firm can focus on hiring managers who can tolerate cultural differences. The identified characteristics should be used to screen all potential employees during the selection process.

Performance evaluation should, generally, be guided by the company’s overall human resource strategy. However, the actual performance evaluation process should be based on local procedures. The managers and the local staff should agree on acceptable targets and the procedure for evaluating performance. Empirical studies reveal that comparability and costs are the main determinants of remuneration and benefits in multinational corporations.

The salaries paid to the employees should be comparable, both within the firm and in the industry. Additionally, the salaries should not strain the company’s revenues. A remuneration and benefits policy that reflects the expectations of the local employees is likely to be accepted. In contrary, a remuneration policy that is based on the expectations of the headquarters is likely to be rejected since it might contravene the local labor laws, and the expectations of labor unions.

In order to promote harmony between the headquarters and the subsidiaries, the new CEO should adopt an open culture policy. An open culture policy encourages employees to accept and appreciate their cultural differences. Formulating an open culture policy requires learning about the cultures of employees in various subsidiaries. This will help the CEO and the management to identify the cultural practices that are valued by local employees.

Consequently, it will be possible to adapt the organization’s strategy to the local culture. For instance, staff and unions in the US subsidiary believed in negotiating organizational matters instead of a top-down approach to decision making. In such situations, the CEO should recognize the importance of negotiations to US employees in order to avoid conflicts.

We will write a custom Case Study on Cross Culture Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More An effective communication system within the organization is fundamental for the implementation of an open culture policy. The norms of communication should be established in advance to guide interaction among employees. According to Hofstede’s culture dimensions, individualism determines the extent to which employees can interact and share information about their cultures. Countries with high individualism scores are associated with little cohesion and interpersonal connection.

Countries with a low individualism scores, on the other hand, are associated with strong group cohesion, respect for others and loyalty to the team. In order to promote cohesion among employees in countries with high individualism scores, the New CEO should encourage the management to acknowledge accomplishments of local staff. Additionally, “debate and expression of personal opinions” should be encouraged in order to promote understanding among the employees.

Since perfect harmony can not be achieved in a multicultural organization such as Home Furniture, the new CEO should adopt a conflict resolution policy to help in solving any conflicts that might arise between the local staff and the headquarters. The conflict resolution policy should address the following issues. First, there should be consensus on how various conflicts should be handled. Second, it must identify the parties to be involved in the resolution process.

For instance, in China and Tunisia non-governmental organizations are actively involved in employees’ issues such work conditions and remuneration. In such countries, employees are likely to accept a conflict resolution team that includes members of organizations that fight for their rights. Third, the local employees and the management at the headquarters should agree on the communication channel to be used when resolving a conflict. The selected communication method should reflect the employees’ cultural make-up.

Empirical studies revel that cross-cultural competency can be enhanced through effective employee training and development. Such training programs help in creating organizational cultures that take into account the cultural make-up of the local staff and the perspectives or expectations of the headquarters. A widely accepted organizational culture facilitates consistent implementation of strategy across all subsidiaries.

Thus, an effective policy should be put in place to guide cross-cultural training programs at Home Furniture. The cross-cultural training policy should address the following issues. First, the policy should encourage the managers to value the cross-cultural training programs.

The top managers at the headquarters should understand that training foreign employees on the parent country’s (Finland) business culture is an important strategy. Thus, accountability and ownership should be promoted in order to effectively implement the training strategy. Second, cross-cultural training should be a team effort that involves all stakeholders.

Outside experts, employees’ leaders, managers from subsidiaries and managers from the headquarters should be involved in developing the training model. Team effort will not only improve the quality of the training, but will also improve its acceptance. Third, cross-cultural training should be bilateral.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Cross Culture Management by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This means that the employees in overseas subsidiaries should be trained on the business culture of the parent country. The employees from the parent country, on the other hand, should be trained on the business culture in foreign countries where the subsidiaries are located.

Fourth, cross-cultural training should be incorporated in the process of employee orientation. New recruits at the headquarters should be trained on the business cultures in overseas subsidiaries. New employees in the subsidiaries should also learn about the business culture in Finland where Home Furniture’s headquarters is located.

Finally, cross-cultural training programs should be reinforced with mentoring initiatives in order to ensure success. Mangers from both Finland (headquarters) and the foreign countries where the subsidiaries are located should be involved in the mentoring program. Mentoring programs promote high performance through commitment to the organization’s expectations and culture. Thus, it will encourage teamwork and tolerance to cultural differences among employees.

Communication Strategy Cross cultural communication is concerned with how individuals from different cultures communicate among themselves and in other cultures. From a business perspective, cross culture communication “refers to interpersonal communication and interaction across different cultures”. Cross culture communication attempts to overcome cultural differences that prevent interaction in a multicultural workforce.

Competency in cross cultural communication can be achieved through training, culture immersion and learning new languages. As a multinational corporation, Home Furniture should have an effective communication strategy to enhance interaction among the employees and to facilitate implementation of its business strategies. In developing a communication strategy for Home Furniture, the new CEO can consider the following guidelines.

To begin with, developing a communication strategy starts with the formulation of the organization’s communication objectives. In this case, the objectives describe what the organization intends to achieve through its communication strategy. For instance, Home Furniture’s communication objectives could be to achieve cultural tolerance or to improve performance. The communication strategy should be driven by the needs of the organization rather than the employees’ need to communicate with each other.

This means that the communication activities at Home Furniture should be a means of achieving strategic goals and objectives. This calls for aligning the communication objectives with those of the organization. Such alignments form the basis for justifying the need for a communication strategy and facilitate the success of the business.

Once the communication objectives are set, the audience must be identified. In this context, the audience refers to the employees that the new CEO and other managers need to communicate with in order to achieve the objectives of Home Furniture. Identifying the correct audience helps in answering the question, ‘who should be consulted with what decisions’? Integration and cooperation in a multicultural workforce requires effective reporting relationships.

Such relationships facilitate contribution of every employee towards achievement of the organization’s goals. In order to establish reporting relationships, decision rights should be identified and explained to every employee. Decision rights specify the authorities entrusted with the task of making decisions. The decision rights and reporting relationships should reflect the cultures of the local employees.

According to Hofstede’s power/distance culture dimension, some cultures tolerate inequality while others do not. A country with a high power/ distance score is likely to have citizens who tolerate uneven distribution of power. However, citizens in countries with low power/distance scores prefer equal distribution of power.

Thus, in countries with high power/distance scores, decisions can be unilaterally made by the management since consultations are not valued. In this case, the management will be the audience. In countries with low power/distance scores, the management must consult as many employees as possible before making a decision. In this case, the audience may include the management and junior employees.

The communication strategy should help the CEO to identify the messages to send to various managers and other employees. Strategic targeting, as well as, consistency should be emphasized when creating and conveying messages within the organization.

The message should be comprehensive, informative and sent to the right individuals within the organization. Hofstede developed the uncertainty avoidance index (UAI) to measure the level of anxiety under uncertain situations in different cultures. In the context of a multicultural organization like Home Furniture, uncertainty can arise if messages are not clear to the recipients.

According to Hofstede, a high UAI score means that members of the society will try as much as possible to avoid ambiguous situations. Law, order and a collective truth tend to prevail in countries with high UAI scores. A low UAI score implies that citizens appreciate differences, and are less concerned with ambiguity. Thus, in countries with high UAI scores, messages should be planned, prepared and communicated regularly.

Additionally, the messages should be communicated to the employees in time in order to avoid anxiety. The messages should be concise and clearly specify the expectations of the management. Societies with high UAI scores tend to prefer formal business conduct and policies. Thus, all messages should be based on existing policies. Additionally, a formal structure will be necessary to convey messages in a country with high UAI scores.

Societies with low UAI scores tend to prefer informal business attitudes. Risks and change are also accepted in such societies. Thus, creating and sending messages within the organization should not be based on strict rules and structures. Given the differences in uncertainty avoidance levels, the process of creating and sharing messages should be aligned to the business cultures of the subsidiaries.

Appropriate tools and activities for communicating the organization’s messages should be identified. Home Furniture’s new CEO should identify the communication channels and activities that are suitable to convey important messages to the targeted audiences.

The selection of appropriate communication channels is determined by the message to be conveyed and the targeted audience. For instance, audiences from societies with a high UAI score tend to prefer formal communication channels. Audiences from societies with low UAI score, on the other hand, tend to be comfortable with informal communication channels.

Understanding and embracing cross cultural differences require elimination of cultural barriers that hinder effective communication. Thus, there should be flexibility when choosing a communication channel or the communication activities to be used to convey important messages. The importance of flexibility is based on the premise that long term commitments to traditions vary across cultures.

According to Hofstede, a high long term orientation (LTO) score means that people have long term commitments to their traditions. In such situations, focusing on the traditional communication channel will be beneficial to Home Furniture.

However, societies with low LTO scores do not value traditions. In such situations, Home Furniture can easily change the communication channels in order to meet its strategic objectives. The CEO and the managers of Home Furniture should be open-minded and able to adapt their communication channels to prevailing cultures.

Adequate resources must be allocated for the implementation of the communication strategy. Additionally, the communication strategy should be implemented within the set timelines. The idea is to avoid overspending in implementing the communication strategy.

Finally, the communication strategy should be evaluated and amended accordingly over time. Communication audits should be performed in order to measure the effectiveness of the strategy. Communication audits can be performed through surveys or interviews that involve internal, as well as, external audiences of the firm.

An independent or external party can be contracted to perform the audit in order to avoid biases in the evaluation process. The evaluation results should be discussed by the relevant stakeholders and used to improve the communication strategy.

Conclusion Cross culture management attempts to enhance understanding and appreciation of cultural differences in organizations. Managing a multicultural workforce is usually a challenge to multinational corporations such as Home Furniture. The disagreements between the management of Home Furniture and its employees in subsidiaries across the globe are attributed to cultural conflicts.

Consequently, the New CEO at Home Furniture must develop policies that will help in reducing cultural conflicts. Appropriate employment policies will help the New CEO to select employees who tolerate cultural differences. An effective cross cultural training policy will help in creating awareness about cultures of various stakeholders at Home Furniture.

Additional, the training programs will encourage culture tolerance. The new CEO should also adopt an open culture policy in order to promote integration and cooperation among employees. Promoting harmony and achievement of the organization’s objectives requires implementation of an effective communication strategy. In order to achieve success, the objectives of the communication strategy should be aligned to those of the organization.

References Holden, N., 2002. Cross-Cultural Management. New York: McGraw-Hill.

Johann, R., 2008. Cross-Cultural Management. New York: John Wiley and Sons.

Majur, K., 2010. Positive Organizational Culture as a New trend in Cross-Cultural Management. Journal of Positive Management 1(2), pp.65-74.

McCalman, J., 2009. Lateral Hierarchy: The Case of Cross-Cultural Management Teams. European Management Journal 14(5), pp.509-517.

Shimoni, B., 2011. The Representation of Culture in Interactions and Cross Culture Management. Journal of International Management 17(1), pp.30-41.

Thomas, D., 2008. Cross-Cultural Management. New York: Cengage Learning.

Tjosvold, D., 2003. Cross-Cultural Management. New York: Ashgate Publishing.

Usanier, J., 2011. Lenguage as a Resource to Access Cross-Cultural Equivalence in Quantitative Management Research. Journal of World Business 46(3), pp.314-319.


The Messiah and Messianic Prophesy in Jewish and Christian Thought Term Paper college application essay help: college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Comparison of Messianic Prophesies Between Christians and Jews



Introduction In Hebrews, the word messiah refers to ‘anointed one’ or someone sent on divine mission with reference Jewish perspective. Particularly, biblical presentation of Messiah revolves around someone ‘holy and righteous’, sent to redeem human nature from sin.

In this regard, Christians believe on the Old Testament prophesy about the birth of ‘a Messiah’, who turned out as Jesus Christ. More precisely, the Old Testament prophesy about Messiah is fulfilled in the new testament when Jesus is born, who subsequently started His Messianic mission.

According to the teachings of the New Testament, Jesus fits the Old Testament. On the other hand, Jewish believe on Jesus seems different from Christians since, Jewish religion does not accord Jesus as Messiah.

As it has been revealed, Jews perceive Jesus as lacking the capacity to meet the descriptions of ‘Messiah’ as the Hebrews Bible describes it. On this basis, this paper will focus on the main reasons why the Jewish perception of Messiah differs from that of Christians, despite the two religions having common divine scripture book.

Comparison of Messianic Prophesies Between Christians and Jews According to Isaiah (9: 6, NIV), “A child will be born and his name would be wonderful counselor…” With reference to Christians’ perception of this verse, the child being prophesized by Isaiah was Jesus Christ.

On the other hand, Jews interpret this verse to refer to King Hezekiah, the great reformer who eradicated idolatry in Judah. Further, the phrase ‘wonder of a counselor, Mighty God’ is considered by Jews as referring to God, who did miraculous things during King Hezekiah’s reign including his victory over the Assyrians who had attacked Judah.

Perhaps, according to the Jews, Isaiah’s prophesy referred to the extraordinary events that God would accomplish during Hezekiah’s reign. According to McDowell (1997, p. 147), ‘The Old Testament… contains several hundred references to the Messiah……in which they were all fulfilled in Christ and they establish a solid confirmation of his credentials as the Messiah.”

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This argument proclaims on the confirmation of Jesus Christ as the long waited Messiah as prophesized by prophet Isaiah. It is also important to note that, the prophesized Messiah in the book of Isaiah is described as having a kingdom, where he will be able to judge all the people.

In the words of Paine (1995, p. 206) “I have examined all the passages in the New Testament quoted from the Old, … and I find no such thing as a prophecy of any such person described as Jesus Christ as the Messiah..”

In this regard, Chazan (2004) considers Hezekiah as the ultimate individual to fit in this category of ‘Messiah’, since he was a wonderful religious leader and also had a kingdom.

On the other hand, the perception of Christians considering Jesus as the ultimate promised Messiah seems baseless, since Jesus had no kingdom. Precisely, God used King Hezekiah to show His mightiness while Jesus came on earth to reconcile human kind with God.

According to Laooard (2004), the prophesy of Messiah as revealed in the book of Daniel does not conform to the Christian view of Jesus as the anticipated Messiah.

According to Paine (1995),the book of Daniel talks of a king coming to restore Jerusalem within a period of seven weeks or 483 years, which seems too early for the birth of Jesus Christ.

In this regard, the equation relating the calculation of this period prophesized by Daniel on the coming of a Messiah disregards Jesus as the expected Messiah on the basis of His time of birth.

We will write a custom Term Paper on The Messiah and Messianic Prophesy in Jewish and Christian Thought specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More On the other hand, the Jewish perception of Hezekiah as the ultimate Messiah seems coherent with these prophesies of Daniel, since his time of reign in the kingdom of Judah falls within the 483 years talked about by Daniel. On this basis, the birth prophesies of Messiah with regard to the Christians’ interpretation of the bible seems unreliable and baseless.

However, Christians believe that, the words spoken by Jesus in John (12:32, NIV) echo Isaiah’s prophesy about the role of the Messiah to unite the whole world. Notably, prophet Isaiah had prophesied on the role of the anticipated Messiah of gathering together all nations from the four corners of the earth.

According to Chazan (2004), Jesus acknowledged his mission of bringing peace and unity to the earth, and that all the people should worship God alone who had sent Him. Similarly, the book of Romans (15: 12, NIV) reveals the quotes of Isaiah’s prophesies about the worship of Christ by the Gentiles (Robinson, 2008).

This is a true implication that, Jesus is the ultimate Messiah awaited to reconcile the whole world and facilitate unity across the world. The New Testament further explains how the prophesy came to pass with the death of Jesus seeing that Jesus body was the temple which after destruction rose on the third day.

Unlike Christians, Jews base their identity and expectations on Tanakh, Talmud and Rabbinic writings. One of the most common believes in these writings is that, all of them talk about two messiahs, where one is being referred to as Messiah ben Joseph or son of Joseph while the other is called Messiah ben David or son of David.

As revealed by Netfirms (2000), Messiah ben Joseph will help Israel to defeat its nations and the people will kill him later. On the other hand, messiah ben David on the other hand will overthrow enemies of Israel and also raise Messiah Joseph from the dead.

Christians on the other hand believe in one Messiah and He will come to the world twice. Based on the Bible and Tanakh teachings, they believe that the Messiah Joseph has already appeared and paid for the sins of the world through His death in Calvary.

His penalty was to be crucified on the cross in order to save all those people who would believe in Him. On the other hand, he will return as a ruling king, overthrow His enemies and establish a righteous kingdom on earth.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Messiah and Messianic Prophesy in Jewish and Christian Thought by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In Isaiah 53 for example, Christians depict a picture of a Messiah who would die on the cross in order to save the nation of Israel while Jews believe that Isaiah was prophesying about the sufferings of the Jews at the hand of Gentile nations.

The difference in interpretations is explained in terms of diverse prophesies is that the prophesies are applicable to both the Messiah and the Israel nation (Robinson, 2008).

Though Christians relate the words of Mathew (1:22-23, NIV), to the prophesies of Isaiah about a young woman conceiving and subsequently giving birth to the ‘Messiah’, there still exists controversy in these two readings.

Despite that Jesus was born by Virgin Mary, Isaiah’s prophesies talked of a young woman, but did not specify on the virginity condition. Particularly, the word virgin was not in the Tanakh, the real Hebrew text, and hence Christians should not use the verse to support their claim on the possibility of Jesus being the Messiah (Chazan, 2004).

Nevertheless, Christians and Jews still agree on the accomplishment of Messianic age at the end of history. In this case, Christians consider Jesus’ ministry as being due to be accomplished when He comes the second time. On the other hand, Rabbinic prophesy regards Jesus as an imposter and that, the real Messiah will arrive in the future.

Conclusion Generally, it is evident that Jews and Christians believe in the promise of a messiah. However, some conflict on the particular individual regarded as the Messiah seems to exist in the Christianity and Jewish perception of the Messiah.

While Christians claim that Jesus is the fulfillment of an ancient prophesy, the writings in the New Testament make them believe fully on Jesus Christ as the fore-told Messiah. On the other hand, Jews believe that, King Hezekiah was the ultimate Messiah, as his time of reign conforms to the prophesies of Daniel on an heir of David to restore Jerusalem.

It is evident that, Jews rely on the Tanakh to bolster their argument despite the fact that it contains less than two prophesies written by Moses. In this case, Christians use the fulfillment of the Messianic prophesies as a central pillar in their argument regarding the accuracy and truth of the Bible.

However, many scholars seem not to believe that Jesus is not the real Messiah, whilst the Christians seem to advocates twisted the scripture, to facilitate the perception of Jesus as the Messiah. Basically, Jesus did not fulfill the messianic prophesies seeing that the Messiah was supposed to rebuild the Israel nation and make it a world superpower.

References Chazan, R. (2004). Fashioning Jewish identity in medieval western Christendom. London: Cambridge University Press.

Laooard, J. (2004). The Fabulous Prophesies of the Messiah. [Available online]. Retrieved from:

McDowell, J. (1997). Evidence That Demands a Verdict. San Bernardino, Calif.: Here’s Life Publishers.

Netfirms. (2000). Jesus is the Rod out ofJesse?…Fulfilled or Unfulfilled? Journal of International Religious Matters, 37(2): 46 – 89.

Paine, T. (1995). “Examination of the Prophecies.” In William, M. (ed.). The Life and Works of Thomas Paine. New Rochelle, N.Y.: Thomas Paine National Historical Association.

Robinson, T. (2008). The Scroll of the Gospel of David. Orlando: Xulon Press.


Book Review on God’s Chinese Son: The Taiping Heavenly Kingdom of Hong Xiuquan by Jonathan Spence Essay college essay help near me

Oppression from the world rulers is one of the paradoxes or enigmas that run into the contemporary times; moreover, the impact of oppressive rulers exists up today. In his book, God’s Chinese Son: the Taiping Heavenly Kingdom of Hong Xiuquan, Jonathan Spence focuses on the conflict between citizens uprising and the ruling class.

Spence describes political and religious misunderstandings that continuously prevail in the society. Spencer’s view on corruption, impunity, and oppression of poor subjects and women in the society compels him to write the aforementioned book.

Contemporarily, the novel applies to all audiences especially historians, common citizens, and world rulers especially dictators and/or oppressive rulers.

During his school days, Hong Xiuquan successfully passes his exams but he is unable to pass the national scholarly examinations, failing three times. Unfortunately, his failure is a product of his inability to give out bribes to the examination council officials.

The officials belong to the Qing dynasty, which is the oppressive ruling class in China. Although not successful, he detests his life teaching young children in his neighborhood. However, he turns to Christianity after reading a religious book, Christian, which brands the Manchu leaders as evil spirits out to destroy him and his people.

On the other hand, the Chinese ruling class is full of cruel leaders, pirates, and oppression to the minority class. All the poor hopeless people turn to Xiuquan as a way to escape from the oppressive society.

Since historical times, patriarchy exists with oppression of women who remain subservient to their male counterparts. On the contrary, men do not return the favor accorded by women; they continue to discriminate women treating them as unequal partners.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The society especially traditional society treats women as lesser beings in the world, which denies them the ability to rule or hold some official positions. Spence’s main aim is to fight or expose feminism that exists during the Qing dynasty through religion.

Christianity is one of the earliest religions that promote equal treatment of all men whether men or women. Therefore, when Xiuquan establishes a religious uprising in the South, which treats all men as equal, he wins support of most common citizens especially women.

Likewise, in the contemporary world, women are unable to access or hold some official duties due to the deep-rooted chauvinism. Amazingly, the fear of competition from women makes men jealous, which leads to oppression especially from the male political leaders.

Corruption, piracy, subjugation, and inequality are problems that run from ancient times into the contemporary world. The political class loathes competition from their subjects or other individuals; therefore, all people who raise their voices against government or criticize the mode of ruling end up facing intimidation in life.

For instance, when Xiuquan becomes popular attracting supporters all over China, the ruling dynasty turns against him. The Manchu leaders kill most of his supporters contributing to the disintegration of the Taiping movement.

In addition, he is the target of the Qing dynasty rulers who want to wipe him out. Due to fear of punishment from the Manchu leaders, his followers decide to retract from the environment. Although the government is unable to curb corruption and inequality in the society, it does not keenly solve the problem about Taiping movement but rather resorts to killing the supporters of the movement.

Currently, there is worldwide resistance against corruption and dictatorship particularly the recent uprising in the Arab world. Unfortunately, the dictators shamelessly shoot and kill the protestors to silence them; however, the protestors end up achieving their freedom.

We will write a custom Essay on Book Review on God’s Chinese Son: The Taiping Heavenly Kingdom of Hong Xiuquan by Jonathan Spence specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Due to inequality in the historical China, the society subjugates the minority groups. People from the minority groups are unable to achieve high levels of education and turns out to rebel against the majority group; the ruling class.

The corrupt leaders require bribe for anybody to pass his/her examinations; unfortunately, most poor people belong to the minority groups and are unable to afford the bribes.

Therefore, when Hong brainwashes his fellow failures to rise against the government, they willingly support him. Contemporarily, education is not a key to good life because most scholars are unable to get employment even after attaining the highest level of education.

Corruption prevails in the entire society whether in the public or private sector and only rich people who are able to afford the bribes end up achieving their worldly desires.

Spence highlights the origin of inequality that still prevails in the society particularly in the education sector. Therefore, inequality and oppression can only be solved when the community or society gangs up against the vice as portrayed by Hong.

Religious conflicts started in ancient times where each religion strived to out do the other. Unluckily, the urge to promote and spread different religious beliefs degenerates into civil wars, as it is the case with Hong’s religion.

Similarly, some unethical traditional beliefs like female circumcision prevail due ancient religious practices. For instance, when Hong decides to promote Christianity as a religious practice, he disowns the local Buddhist practices branding it as idol worship.

He openly preaches Christianity while condemning the Buddhist practice; he burns all the religious books and idols in his community using swords (Spence 1996, p.67).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Book Review on God’s Chinese Son: The Taiping Heavenly Kingdom of Hong Xiuquan by Jonathan Spence by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More However, some people refuse to follow his teachings and opt to keep their religion, which compels Hong to move to South where he has many converts. Contemporarily, religious conflicts are prominent especially between Muslim and Christianity and in most cases; bloodshed is the conspicuous result of such conflicts.

Spence achieves his aim to condemn and highlight religious conflicts between different communities.

Besides supporting Chinese history especially their origin from the West, Spence eloquently describes the bearing characteristics of ruling class in China during the nineteenth century.

Personally, it assists me to understand religious and cultural beliefs and conflicts in China as compared to other societies or countries. Although Spence is not a Chinese, he is able to use the existing documentaries to describe and write a book about the ancient China.

He draws a clear picture of the Taiping movement and the Qing dynasty, which are historical events that occurred many years ago. Spence’s ability to highlight the negative effects of conflicts or civil wars compels the reader to promote peace in the society.

Due to the impact of war, there is a decline in both the economical and social superiority of China especially the Southern community. The habitants of the China end up struggling to survive to earn a living in the oppressive society.

However, the author does not fully explore the role played by Xiuquan during the decline of Taiping kingdom. He only mentions about the combination of both internal and external forces that led to the failure of the movement.

Additionally, he does not explicitly discuss the people who were envious and against Hong’s popularity, which contributed to his fall and defeat by the ruling class. Besides the criticism, Spence’s work is a success proving his expertise in literary works.

He enables the reader to learn about the major historical recordings in the East Asian community exposing to the world religious and historical changes in China. Additionally, the source he uses in writing his book is in Chinese language and therefore requires translation in other languages.

Preferably, he extracts information from other secondary sources despite the documentaries and historical artifacts. He therefore, gives a good encouragement to learn and speak different languages.

In summary, Spence’s book, Chinese Son: the Taiping Heavenly Kingdom of Hong Xiuquan, condemns corruption and inequality in the society. Besides, focusing on the traditional changes in the ancient China, he enlightens the world about its major historical events/changes.

He explicitly draws the picture of religious and political differences in the society. Expertly, Spence uses different sources like documentaries to write his book.

Moreover, Spence’s book draws some similarities from the contemporary world especially the political and religious upheavals that constrain the world economy increasing poverty levels in society.

According to my opinion, religious differences should not lead to bloodshed in the society; on the contrary, religious diversity should promote unity, which is not the case in the historical events of China.

Finally, both political and religious leaders should combine efforts to eliminate corruption, conflicts, oppression, and inequality in the society. Therefore, Spence’s book is applicable to all audiences including students and political leaders.

Reference Spence, Jonathan. 1996. God’s Chinese Son: The Taiping Heavenly Kingdom of Hong Xiuquan. New York: W.W. Norton


Mobile Money Transfer Research Paper online essay help

The concept of mobile money transfer originated from Vodafone Company of the UK. The idea was to create a platform where small borrowers in microfinance sector could easily receive and send money through Vodafone authorized airtime dealers.

Consequently, microfinance institutions (MFIs) would provide loans at competitive rates as the cost of handling cash would reduce considerably. Vodafone subscribers were to use their SIM card to access mobile banking services. The service would give users easy tracking of their financial affairs.

However, when the company launched the service in the year 2007, the focused changed as customers adopted mobile banking for other reasons. The service provided a platform in which subscribers could send and receive money across the country using Vodafone network.

Mobile money transfer acted as a branchless bank. Subscribers could perform basic transactions using their mobile phones without visiting their branches. At the same time, the service was available to both bank account holders and non-account holders. The service grew considerably due to its affordability and in most cases, not involving banks in transactions.

Mobile banking subscribers could deposit and withdraw money from any agent countrywide. However, Vodafone is a mobile service provider and not a bank (not a deposit-receiving institution). When banks realized that mobile banking was capturing their markets particularly majority who never had bank accounts, they challenged activities of the company. Meanwhile, smart banks decided to partner with Vodafone in order to offer robust banking services using mobile money transfer platform.

Mobile money transfer service has grown to offer users chances of depositing and withdrawing cash, transferring money across the country to both subscribers and non-subscribers, paying utility bills, purchasing airtime, and even receiving dividend payouts.

The service is still growing as other sectors adopt it to facilitate their transactions. Consequently, other countries have adopted the innovation and creativity in Vodafone’s mobile money transfer services to provide same services.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Innovation and creativity processes of mobile banking led to its success. Mobile banking aimed at creating value. Vodafone used the existing technology of short message service (SMS) to create new services. The service was available on any mobile phone handset.

The Vodafone team managed to keep mobile banking service simple to its users. Thus, innovation services do not rely on complex processes in order to deliver value. This is the basic step to innovation and success.

The processes also focused on delivering value. This is the most difficult step to innovation because of getting new users to test the platform and gather feedback for improvement. Vodafone used its existing subscribers and authorized distributors to test its mobile banking platform. Distributors recruited and registered users, and encouraged them to make cash deposits, transfers and withdrawals.

Therefore, Vodafone distributors and resellers of airtime soon recruited enough subscribers both for the study and full-fledge mobile banking services. Vodafone also engaged its distributors on training sessions to ensure that Mobile money transfer platform was effective.

Vodafone soon recruited mobile banking agents. However, the problem was convincing the tellers to issue cash based on a text message report. Mobile banking also did not require massive investments to start.

Since points of sale (POS) are expensive, Vodafone provided its agents with a basic, low-cost mobile handset with a customized SIM card consisting of mobile banking menu. The company also began to issue new mobile banking enabled SIM cards to its customers free of charge. This processes captured value. Soon mobile banking became a form of viral marketing and drove the growth of the company and its services.

Vodafone had to defend its value in mobile banking. Vodafone had to play the role of a bank and MNO company. This was a challenging task since no software was available to work on a banking platform and MNO basis in serving users without bank accounts, credit cards, or debit cards. The company did not engage in recruiting banks’ customers, but rather its mobile phone users.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Mobile Money Transfer specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Initially, the company’s airtime function as currency as users could buy and send airtime to other subscribers. Subscribers used mobile banking services to send money countrywide. This is how Vodafone innovation and creativity transformed financial sector in the whole world using the mobile phone handsets.

The subsequent mobile banking innovations aimed at sustaining value. The functional architecture, design, and implementation of transfer services were innovation meant to sustain its value. However, the project lacked a roadmap and guidance during its early years.

The company also had to adjust its operations to both requirements of Communication Services and Central Bank regulations. The challenge was handling the unexpected growth realized within a limited time span. Technical innovation became the driver of Vodafone’s mobile banking service.

Mobile banking success also resulted from a near-real time money transfer service. Users could send and receive money at the speed of a text message. Financial institutions could not achieve such rapid transactions using their existing traditional infrastructure. Creativity and innovation of mobile banking transactions checked several aspects of transactions almost instantly.

For instance, the system checked whether users have authority to make any transaction through the use of PIN, whether users have sufficient balance in their accounts to make such requests, whether the transfers have exceeded the maximum numbers allowed each day. These are complex processes but Vodafone creativity and innovation allowed its customers to experience them almost instantly.

Vodafone project team configured different mobile banking SIM cards with different menus to satisfy different categories of users. For instance, subscribers had to manage their accounts from their mobile phone handsets while agents had to recruit new users and manage their cash transactions.

There were various aspects of innovation and creativity in developing mobile banking service. For instance, there were individuals, teams, and organizations performing different tasks to ensure success of money transfer. There was a Vodafone project technical team responsible for creation of the mobile banking platform.

The team had focus and an entrepreneurial spirit in order to provide a basis for service development. This team had to multitask and offered services on demand. This is a technical process, which requires a high level of innovation.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Mobile Money Transfer by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More There were also Vodafone retailers and distributors. Later, the company recruited agents. This category was responsible for driving mobile banking services at the ground level. They registered users and acted as points of sale or branch outlets. Vodafone had to motivate its agents through training actively to engage in cash management.

Finally, there were also mobile phone subscribers. This group provided an opportunity for development of the mobile banking platform during a pilot stage and subsequently became the drivers of mobile banking success. The company also carried out media campaigns to ensure that its mobile service customers adopted mobile banking services. This stage also extended to nonusers in order to add value to the service.


Favorite Restaurant Concept Essay essay help free: essay help free

Introduction The objective of planning a restaurant is to assemble, on paper, the ideas for a restaurant that will be profitable and satisfying to the guest and the owner or operator of the business. The process which is involved in the formulation of these ideas is known as the restaurant concept.

The concept is devised to increase the number of a given group which is known as the target market in this case. Marketing is considered to be the sum total of the activities which are intended to attract people to the restaurant. This includes the process which entails determining what group or groups are most likely to react favorably to the concept at hand.

A quality restaurant is a restaurant which has got certain aspects of qualities. These include aspects such as the image which it appeals to the certain market or a given target population. The concept behind a quality restaurant should fit the location, menu, and décor. It is worth noting that the concept of a quality hotel includes everything ranging from public relations, advertising, promotion and the operation itself.

There are many restaurants in the United States of America. However, there are few which have caught my eye. This is because these restaurants have certain qualities in certain aspects which appeal. TGI Friday’s is an example of such a restaurant. This is because it is a hotel which has remained successful over the years because it has stayed close to the guests and concentrated on quality and service combined with a theme of fun.

This is an aspect which attracts many young customers like me. The restaurant has got an array of menus and drinks which are on offer at any given point in time. Certain qualities which have made this restaurant to be outstanding include the fact that it has got quick service. This is also known as fast food, furthermore, they offer limited menus that re prepared quickly thus leaving the customers delighted and happy.

In addition, this restaurant offers full meals at what I can call medium prices which customers can perceive to be as good value. The restaurant also offers high cuisine at high end prices. The qualities of services that they offer are made up of ambience and quality service.

Furthermore, for a restaurant to establish itself as quality restaurant, it must have the good will. In this case, the good will is a form of advertising which is based on the word of mouth from satisfied customers. Good will can be evaluated from different points of view. For instance, this includes the location of the restaurant to the ambience which is associated with the place. Essentially, goodwill is generated from serving good food, good service, good atmosphere, consistent scheduling and adequate sanitation practices.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In conclusion this TGIF is a restaurant which quality floor management. These include informing the customers just in case there is a delay and ensuring that the customers do not wait for too long while seated as they wait for their meal. It is worth noting that this might be one hundred percent perfect, however, TGIF has tried to keep this in perspective most of the time. Thus, a quality restaurant is a restaurant which understands that the host, the hostess, waiters, and waitresses are the restaurant’s ambassadors of good will.

They should think of themselves as being on stage. They are like entertainers in Broadway production; it follows that they should never have their backs to the audience! When customers are irritated by lack of service and see waitresses engrossed in their own secrets, ignoring them, the irritation turns to anger. It is disconcerting to most people when service personnel are nestled together, whispering. The staff’s responsibility is to make sure that the customers are as comfortable as possible in all situations.

Works Cited Mischitelli, Vincent. Your New Restaurant, Avon,MA: Adams Media, 2000. Print.


Generation Y: The Demand for Innovative HRM? Report college essay help online

Introduction As many companies may have noted, there is a generation that is rapidly expanding in influence and power across all continents- the millennium generation. The millennium generation mainly consists of individuals that have been born from 1982 to around 2001.

At the workplace, the talent and capacity of millennium employees cannot be ignored. At the market, the increasing capacity of the millennial to consume goods cannot likewise be ignored.

As such, it would be foolish for companies to slumber in incorporating policies that are attractive to the millennium generation. In this paper, I will be discussing some of the important ways in which a company can attract the emerging generation of millennial.

In the direction of attracting the millennial, consideration will also be given to how companies can retain the older generation of employees and customers.

While Woodruffe (2009) believes that significant changes are required in attracting, developing and retaining the millennial generation, Kyles (2005) believes companies should focus on finding strategies which appeal to all generations.

The millennium generation includes individuals that have been born between 1982 and 2001. Many companies agree that the millennium generation will continue to grow in the market share; hence, a need for companies to develop products that are appealing to the unique needs of this (millennium) generation (Carlson, 2006).

Such a scenario has presented a dilemma for many companies. The dilemma is whether to concentrate on the older generation of customers, or focus on the new and emerging millennium generation (Carlson 2006). The outstanding idea in Woodruffe’s belief is that as the millennium generation increases its capacity of market share, there is a need for companies to tap into this emer

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More ging market by developing products and services that appeal to the millennium generation (Consoli, 2006). On the other hand, companies cannot simply concentrate on attracting the millennium generation while ignoring older customers.

As such, Kyles has suggested an approach that can be used by companies to balance between the needs of the millennium generation and those of older customers-developing enduring strategies and products that appeal to both generations.

In what ways are the needs of the millennium generation different from those of the older generation? Here, I will be focusing on the needs of customers. According to a report by the economist intelligence unit, there is need for companies to develop different approaches so as to attract millennium customers (Consoli, 2006).

Unlike the older generation of customers, the millennium generation obtains information on products through social networking websites and other internet interactive platforms (Carlson, 2006).

Here, many people may prefer online shopping, where they shop and purchase products online. Instead of visiting company offices to make inquiries on products, the millennium generation relies on online and media recommendations to buy products (Consoli, 2006).

Therefore, it is obviously important for companies to invest in peer marketing. Celebrities are especially influential in marketing products here. Moreover, rather than focusing on quality alone, the millennium generation has a deep interest in self tailored and unique products.

It is therefore important for companies that are keen on attracting the millennium generation to invest part of their marketing resources in new and emerging technologies, such as the internet. Focusing on the unique shopping behavior of the millenniums will also be helpful to companies with an interest of sharing the millennium market (Fields, 2001).

We will write a custom Report on Generation Y: The Demand for Innovative HRM? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More While workforce planning has long been a function for many organizations, it has become of increased importance because of the emergence of globalization, changing demographics, and other factors (Carlson, 2006).

Because we are interested in innovative HRM so as to attract the millennium generation, it is important to consider how the above changes affect the attraction of a talented and millennium workforce.

Since many companies are going global, so as to obtain a share of the global market, it is apparent that such a direction will lead to an employment of a workforce that is divergent in geographical demography, lifestyle, among other differences (Consoli, 2006).

A fruitful trend that has been emerging is one in which multinational companies establish sub independent companies in multiple global locations. Here, it is possible for each global area of operation to focus on unique and specific needs at play in its specific market (Consoli, 2006).

Issues of salary, experience, education, among others will obviously vary in different localities where the sub independent companies are based. However, it is important for companies to establish unique standards that are necessary for a creative workforce irrespective of where such workers may be based (Fields, 2001).

How is the millennium workforce different from the ordinary workforce? One of the most important characteristics that are present in most millennium employees is a desire to develop personal relationships with their employees (Carlson, 2006).

Most of the millennium employees will want to develop a nurturing and respectful relationship with their managers. Ordinarily, millennium employees will want to contribute to the decisions that are made by their employees, and would desire to develop and implement new ideas for the management (Carlson, 2006).

Therefore, rather than focusing on a bossy approach, the attraction and retention of the innovative millennium employees would call for a respectful relationship; beneficial to both the employee and manager.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Generation Y: The Demand for Innovative HRM? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Such a direction would call for a regular and respectful communication between managers and millennium employees (Consoli, 2006). Moreover, most millennium employees desire to grow in their careers as they attain personal development.

Such a trend would necessitate that managers implement programs that help their millennium employees to grow in their careers (Fields, 2001). Since such employees are not averse to tasks that are challenging, but fulfilling to them, it is useful for employees to develop a creative and a challenging environment for their employees.

Therefore, an opportunity that is presentable with a need to attract and retain a millennium workforce is a need for innovation (Carlson, 2006). Obviously, with the cut throat competition that presently exists in the business world, a definite approach for businesses to survive is to adopt a creative workforce.

Such a workforce would aid in the development of unique products that will always appeal to the market (Carlson, 2006). How can managers attract and retain a creative workforce? The first step would involve recruiting a talented millennium workforce; that is filled with new and unique ideas (Consoli, 2006).

The second step would involve the creation of a working environment that would promote innovation at the workplace (Consoli, 2006). Such a direction would involve an inclusiveness approach that values and encourages the workforce to develop new and innovative products for their companies.

Moreover, there is a need for companies to establish a system of supporting and refining ideasthat have been presented to the management by a creative workforce (Fields, 2001).

Here, it is important to avoid discarding any new idea that has been presented by an employee. Whenever such ideas appea to be credible, necessary support should subsequently be given to the concerned employee.

While Eckle (2009) suggests that social networking sites are good recruitment sources, Solove (2008) believes that information gathered from such sites is unreliable, and therefore, they are not a reputable source (Fields, 2001).

However, since the millennium workforce is mainly available at social networking sites, for companies to recruit a generation of millenniums, it is needful for companies to do some recruitment at social networking sites (Fields, 2001).

The obvious advantage with recruiting at social networking sites is an ability to select from a wide and global database bank of applicants. Furthermore, the process is cheaper, and it is possible to shortlist applicants at the stage of viewing their databases (Consoli, 2006). With emerging soft wares, it is possible to even automate the process above.

Here, it is easy for companies to filter applicants on the base of important attributes that they require from new employees. However, a social networking system presents a number of difficulties. Often, candidates may post impressive, but untrue information; that has been carefully designed to attract the eye of employees) (Carlson, 2006).

Besides, a non interactive physical environment with an applicant may overlook important parameters necessary for a company to decide on whether to recruit or not (Carlson, 2006).

Just like many other aspects of HRM, the issue of recruitment is becoming complex with time (Sago, 2000). With such a trend, there is an increasing need for companies to outsource some of the services that they normally perform.

By outsourcing a proportion of HRM services, a number of benefits can be accrued (Sago, 2000). Many HRM outsourcing agencies have created platforms for the recruitment and management of other HRM services.

At some levels, such companies have established platforms where they obtain multiple data banks for recruits online. As such, they are capable of initiating a program of recruiting designed to produce the best quality of applicants (Fields, 2001).

In some cases, recruitment agencies can go a step further to train potential recruits. Such a direction is important in ensuring that clients obtain recruits that have prerequisite skills (Fields, 2001).

Usually, such applicants are finally presented to clients for consideration. Moreover, useful resources, like soft wares for managing the human resource, can be accessible to companies through consultancy firms.

Besides, it is possible to easily update the skills of the workforce, which can be available through the services of consultancy agencies; hence, helping to boost the output of the human resource (Carlson, 2006).

As we had seen earlier, understanding the unique characteristics of the millennium workforce is necessary for creating an innovative employees; hence, innovative products, It is also important to understand that challenges that companies may face in an effort to accommodate millennium employees (Sago, 2000).

So as to retain the useful talents of millennium employees, it is important for companies to develop a comprehensive, and a clear system that can be used to reward innovative and hardworking employees (Jopling, 2004).

The use of bonuses, salary increments and promotions, are among the options that can be utilized by companies in the direction that has been described above (Jopling, 2004). As I had mentioned, a process that involves employees when deciding on important issues is also useful in motivating the young generation of millennium employees (Carlson, 2006).

Even with such innovations that may be precisely designed by the human resource to attract and retain the talented generation of millennium, it is ignorant for companies to ignore the needs of the older generation of employees. With such an arrangement, there is a need for companies to develop policies that carefully balance between the needs of all the categories of employees.

According to Smith (2003) in order for Australian organizations to attract and retain talent, as well as become globally competitive, investing in training and development is crucial and requires developing a more strategic, measurable and long-term Human Resource approach (Sago, 2000).

Here, global competition is based on the competitiveness of the type of products that a company will place on the global market. As it has been discussed previously, such competitiveness is reliant on a creative workforce that has a capacity to develop unique and innovative products (Sago, 2000).

Since having such a workforce mainly depends on a capacity to attract and maintain a creative and talented generation of millenniums, it is important for companies to develop a package of policies that are attractive to young millenniums (Sago, 2000).

Considering the inherent need for young professionals to grow in career and development, it is important for companies to incorporate training programs for their professionals. Such training programs must increase the capacity and skills of millenniums so that they are more empowered to increase their work output.

Here, it is important for all training to orient in attaining specific goals that agree with the overall goals of accompany (Carlson, 2006).

Apart from training and strategic management, it is crucial for companies to adopt tools that can be used to promote the capacity of employees (Heyboer, 2006). Here, it is fruitful for companies to develop effective performance management appraisal systems.

Such systems must be designed with the unique goals, and needs of a company in mind (Heyboer, 2006). Currently, there exist several approaches that can be used for the purposes of gauging the performance of employees.

Rating scale and 360 degrees are among the various performance management appraisal systems that are available to employees (Heyboer, 2006).

Apart from orienting the design of a particular performance appraisal system with the needs and goals of a company, it is important for the human resource manager to consider a number of issues and challenges that may arise from the use of such a system (Carlson, 2006).

Such a process may start by evaluating the strengths and weaknesses of each type of an available performance appraisal system. Once the above step is surpassed, it may be useful for the human resource manager to identify ways in which he can tackle the weaknesses that may arise with a selected performance appraisal system (Consoli, 2006).

Conclusion In one dimension, the process of doing business involves developing a range of products and services that will always be attractive to an existing market. With the constant change of multiple parameters that exist in a market, there will always be a need for market preferences to likewise change.

With the development of a new millennium generation, parameters at play in the global market have inevitably changed. Unlike previous generations, the millennium generation is independent in ideas, creative and technology savvy.

Such a direction has created a need for companies to develop products that will appeal to the emerging generation of millenniums. Likewise, it has become important for companies to invest their resources in attracting the innovative and creative generation of millennial employees.

Amidst such efforts, companies have tried to retain multiple generations of employees and workers so as to accommodate important market and workforce segments.

So as to tackle the challenges that exist in companies, in all the dimensions hat have been mentioned above, It is useful for human resource managers to develop policies that would auger with the mentioned challenges to increase the competitive edge of their companies.

Such a trend would call for a creative and innovative human resource that will attract the young generation of millennial.

Reference List Carlson, S., 2006. Tech-savvy ‘Millennials’ have lots of gadgets, like to multitask, and expect to control what, when, and how learn. Should colleges cater to them?’ The Chronicle of Higher Education Oct 52(7), A34

Consoli, J., 2006. Magid: Millennial Generation Imperative for Media Business. Brandnews. 21 June 2006. [Online] Web.

Eckle, J., 2009. Get social, get a job. Computer World

Fields, B., 2001. The Millennial generation: Are higher education and the workforce ready for them? [Online] Web.

Heyboer, K., 2006. To teach tech-savvy Millennials, forget ‘boring’ books. [Online] Web.

Jopling, J., 2004. Understanding Generations. [Online] Web.

Sago, B., 2000. Uncommon Threads: Mending the Generation Gap at Work Business Credit. June 2000, pg 57-59.

Smith, A., 2003. Recent trends in Australian training and development. Asia Pacific Journal of Human Resource Management, (41)2, pp. 231-244.

Solove, D., 2008. The end of privacy? Scientific American

Woodruffe, C., 2009. Generation Y. Training Journal


Leadership in the hospitality industry Research Paper college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Introduction The ability to reflect effective leadership in an organization stems from understanding employees’ and clients’ needs, designing acceptable vision as well as challenging status quo. When the aforementioned procedures are well executed, leadership in any given organization will have added since existing culture that may be obsolete as well will be redefined.

As a matter of fact, a leader ought to have acceptable attributes as well as characteristics that emanate from deep within. Boyd (2011) points out that leadership remains as one of the most remarkable models that strongly bring about positive and coherent organizational change through moderation of organizational operations, motivation strategies and creation of best working environment to achieve organizational goals.

Therefore, an effective leadership should remain outstanding in driving an organization towards change and linking its operations to long-term objectives. This paper is a deep analysis of Bill Marriott Junior leadership. The main focus of the paper is to explore his effective leadership in the hospitality industry. Besides, the paper exemplifies the need for effective vision, charisma, focus and continued motivation of employees in an organization for the sole purpose of improved performance.

A brief overview of Bill Marriott Jr. Bill Marriott Jr. can be described as one of the greatest leaders of this time in the hospitality industry because of his ability to influence change, encourage efficiency and effectiveness in business operations and also for his exceptional leadership skills. Since the passing away of his father back in 1985, Marriott Jr. has taken active charge of the operations of the entire Marriott Company.

For instance, he has successfully managed the operations of this prominent and well established hotel chain in the world. Palierse (2011) posits that Marriott has managed to innovate and improve his father’s business empire which largely dealt with family restaurants and fast-food outlets. Currently, the business chain deals with provision of large scale contracts in hospitality industry.

This business organization operates well established accommodation and lodging services. Besides, he increased competencies in the areas of operation to boost performance. His success in business has been attributed to the manner in which he attends to details such as research and collection of information, provision of clean and high quality products and services, and the logical manner through which his tasks and services are performed.

As the hospitality industry is growing in terms of complexity in operations and also becoming more competitive, businesses in this industry are also in dire need of improving their services and overall performance in order to remain relevant in the market. For example, there are myriad of strategies that are being put in place so as to remain relevant in this highly dynamic and competitive industry.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Some of these strategies include incorporating speed in decision making, increasing the flow of information in and out of the industry environment and also offering mobility and value to all of its workers. Hence, a deep understanding of the hospitality industry demands thorough understanding of up-to-date business operations, articulate discharge of leadership duties and careful coordination of teams.

It is against this background that Marriott was able to expand the company in 1993 and split it into Marriott Corporation as well as Marriot International. The former largely focuses on airport concessions and real estate while the latter is a service management and lodging company (Palierse, 2011).

Leadership styles by Marriott Jr. Organizational visioning

Boyd (2011) is quite categorical that many analysts understand organizational visioning as a unique entity especially when it has to be applied in real organizational leadership. However, organizational visioning forms the foundation upon which leaders establish their objectives. In the case of Marriott Jr., he developed a vision that changed the normal way his father used to ran business operations.

His new management strategy eventually raised the performance level of the business. Boyd (2011) continues to indicate that organizational visioning goes deeper into an organization’s streams of production, priorities of the shareholders and external forces that dictate the main operations.

On the other hand, Moors (2012) argues that a vision must be based on the benefits that an organization would realize after it has attained its goals. Leadership of any organization must appreciate the fact that all stakeholders are important when executing various functions of an organization and as such, they ought to be involved in the realization of the set vision.

The effective leadership by Marriott when he was narrowing his father’s vision sought to define the vision by outlining the benefits that the change from family and fast-food restaurants to accommodation and lodging services would bring to the business. Moors (2012) reiterates that Marriott Jr. was able to involve stakeholders and employees towards attaining the desired vision.

This was found to be necessary since incorporating all stakeholders would minimize regular resistance and conflicts within the organization. Besides, he devised ways and means through which constant motivation would be effected among employees in order to boost performance.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Leadership in the hospitality industry specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Persistence

Although creating a vision is crucial as well as part and parcel of organizational management, Bono, Hooper and Yoon (2012) hypothesize that it is the constant application of the course to attain it that is more essential. It is therefore imperative to take into consideration the fact that a vision defines the objectives of an organization. As such, a leader must create a strong force that will rekindle it and should be persistent in attaining it.

In his leadership, Marriott has been able to suggest short-term win-win situations which have been accepted by his workers and stakeholders. It is from these set strategies that he has been able to restate the vision of the company and refresh its application to his employees and stakeholders. It is crucial to understand that the win-win situation has been greatly focused and spread among his employees and top management, a factor that has lowered chances of loss of focus.

Besides, he has involved his employees in pursuing the company’s vision through use of teams. The latter has been very useful in pushing the vision ahead by facilitating acceptance of departmental and organization’s decisions as well as identity for all. In his leadership, Marriott has put a special emphasis on continued improvement where even positive results are considered to have ample room for improvement in attaining the vision (Palierse, 2011).

Encouraging commitment among other leaders

In their publication, Galli and Müller-Stewens (2012) acknowledge the critical role that top management in an organization plays in facilitating the achievement of a vision that has been set beforehand. The top management of an organization must reflect the vision an organization has through anchoring its auxiliary aspects that make it holistic at all levels.

In Marriott International, the top management has been particularly essential in establishing a clear assessment platform which has been used to identify areas that need improvement for realization of the vision of the company (Palierse, 2011).

Marriott Jr. has ensured that this management serves as a key change agent to cite and lead the application of the vision at different instances while also addressing resisting forces sufficiently. Besides, the top management has maintained constant communication with employees to identify their problems that could hinder their commitment towards the vision.

Marriott Jr. transformational leadership

The view that change is indeed the only permanent aspect in any organization has gained overwhelming and unanimous acceptance by scholars. From a transformational point of view, the leadership by Marriott Jr. has been considered a pillar that has continuously supported the realization of full potential by his employees.

Van-Ginkel and Van-Knippenberg (2012) in their article Group leadership and shared task representations in decision making groups compare leadership in an organization to the role a captain of a ship plays while sailing in the sea. The role as Van-Ginkel and Van-Knippenberg continue to say is evident from the nature of the ship’s route which is subject to key disturbances such as violent waves, mechanical problems and internal misunderstandings and which the captain and his team must maneuver.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Leadership in the hospitality industry by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Similarly, a leader in the hospitality industry should create the much needed sense of mission, commitment and morale through motivation as a force to maintain course. Under the leadership of Marriott Jr., the focus of Marriot Company has been based on taking employees efforts beyond the objectives of the organization (Palierse, 2011). Through transformational leadership efforts of all employees and stakeholders of Marriott Company have been easily mobilized and benefits maximized.

Van-Dijke et al (2012) extensively use Bass’s transformational leadership theory to assess Marriott’s leadership capabilities and how he has been able to move the company into success in the hospitality industry. In particular, Van-Dijke et al cite the fact that Marriott Jr. has increased awareness of task value and the importance attached to it.

It is imperative to note that at this point Van-Dijke et al strongly differ with other scholars like Rieley (2012) and Moors (2012) who seem to be in disagreement over the effective leadership of Marriott as transformational leadership. The theory indicates that when a leader gains special skills and respect for their application, he or she can easily transfer the same knowledge to others. As such, apart from the attached benefits to followers, a guaranteed highly competitive sequence is generated.

Besides, Marriott has set his focus on teams and team work as opposed to individualistic interest. Mayfield and Mayfield (2012) point out that this transformational leadership has brought the objectives of the organization and achievement roadmap to all employees and stake holders. Thus, it has been possible to focus on key organizational goals and rooms for competition, improvement and progress have been ultimately created.

Supportive and participative leadership

Rus, Van-Knippenberg and Wisse (2012) point out in their publication that supportive and participative leadership entail inclusion of stakeholders at all stages of goal setting and development, factors that create an inherent drive which make an organization highly self propelling. A supportive and participative leader is an individual who is considered more as a facilitator as opposed to one who is patronizing in nature and fond of issuing orders.

In what appears to be a raised platform for guiding current leaders in moving away from mechanistic leadership models Algera and Lips-Wiersma (2012) argue that participative leadership creates a sense of responsibility largely from reduced bureaucracies and ultimate communication enhancement.

In the leadership by Marriott Jr. Bono, Hooper and Yoon (2012) cite high level of participation in designing strategies and carrying out tasks that have seen the company grow and dominate the global market. Through participative leadership, Marriott Jr. has used issues and conflicts as platforms upon which reviews of objectives of the organization have been based to facilitate faster achievement of key goals.

Another method of supportive and participative leadership has been witnessed in the manner in which his leadership has been democratic. Kurt Lewin posits in his participative leadership model that a democratic leadership is the most effective model of linking goals and their achievement with workers. Decentralization of roles creates a highly charged mobile system that ensures an organization surges forward.

As a result, inherent motivation based on team spirit not only raises productivity, but encourages emergent leaders. Rieley (2012) indicates that though employees in the hospitality industry are often regarded on the basis of their status, they are endowed with crucial capabilities that should be exploited and utilized to ensure short and long-term goals easily achievable. Harnessing this potential therefore creates a cycle where top leaders use key tools such as motivation in making the correct decisions.

Situational leadership

Marriott’s situational leadership style has over the years been witnessed in the manner in which he has sought to incorporate his roles in order to create a smooth plane where employees of the company can work comfortably to realize preset goals. Besides, his situational leadership has involved a strong analysis of the existing environment situation the business in operating into and developed the capacity to adjust to it. Johnson (2012) posits that Marriott has emphasized on making Marriott International highly proactive in focusing to both long and short-term situations.

Johnson continues to by citing Hersey and Blanchard’s situational theory and posits that situational leadership creates a highly flexible and dynamic system for the leaders to relate with their environment and employees. As such a leader must understand and employ different leadership methods depending on the level of employees’ capacity to comprehend various tasks, willingness, competence and motivation.

Situational leadership calls for a kind of leadership which offers direction when employees have low competences or commitment. Strong focus and trust are required and progress effectively measured. Situational leadership by Marriott has invoked the need for a learning organization where knowledge is generated through creativity and innovation.

Leadership in hospitality industry-Application From the above discussion, leadership styles assimilated by various leaders in the hospitality industry have become some of the most essential aspects that dictate growth and development capacity of the industry. Studies indicate that effective leadership in the hospitality industry is crucial in determining how well strategies, goals, objectives and visions are formulated and assimilated to achieve high profitability.

I strongly concur with Sedmak, Planinc and Planinc (2011) who posit in their publication that in the hospitality industry, leaders are the pillars of change and progress for higher profitability. Taking into consideration of the complexity of management in the highly competitive hospitality industry, I explore the leadership behaviors from Marriott Jr. that I would apply to become successful in the hospitality industry.

Transformational leadership

As a transformational leader, I will just like Marriott Jr. develop clear visions which can be developed in order to assimilate the required growth and development of business in the hospitality industry. Armed with a clear vision, it will be possible to maintain the much needed objectivity towards high profitability and business development. Besides, as a leader, I will be able to display and exhibit high levels on integrity at all times.

This has been a factor that has boosted the brand and leadership of the Marriott Company. To realize transformation in the business, there will be need to enhance commitment both at the top management level and among workers at all levels. I will encourage strong dedication that will make employees go extra miles to ensure that the objectives and goals of the business are achieved.

Taking into consideration that transformational leaders are based on the ability to make their subjects view their roles, duties, operations, and culture differently, I believe that I should possess change agents characteristics of decisiveness, fairness, assertiveness, and carefulness.

Support and situational leadership

Effective leadership is one that understands the situation a business is in and offers support to workers. These are some of the factors that dictate the ability of an organization to achieve its objectives and propositions with minimal resistances. By applying situational leadership and supporting effective organization culture, I will seek to ensure that employees have become part of the overall operation system of the organization.

Besides, I will develop and encourage team operations. It is imperative to note that an organization culture formulates the key ties at the lower and the top management levels. Rus, Van-Knippenberg and Wisse (2012) indicated that that care should be taken to support the correct organization cultures as it forms one of the most important motivating aspects in organization management.

To ensure greater focus towards raising the employees’ commitment and motivation in the industry, I will establish the correct organization culture. Under this consideration therefore, the employees will be able to focus more on the quality of the products and services for the consumers and therefore win customer loyalty.

Conclusion To recap it all, it is imperative to reiterate that the discussion in this paper was based on the thesis statement that he ability to reflect effective leadership in an organization stems from understanding employees’ and clients’ needs, designing acceptable vision, and challenging status quo to add value and redefine existing culture to anchor continued development.

From the discussion, it is evident that leadership forms the foundation upon which organizations are anchored since it creates inherent understanding of all stakeholders while using individuals, teams and organization’s objectives for sustainability. As a matter of fact, effective leadership of Marriott Jr. has seen Marriott International and Marriott Corporation expand to greater heights in terms of performance and profitability.

In addition, the paper has also established that there are myriad of elements such as motivation and involvement of stakeholders that must be put in place when managing organizations. Finally, the paper has concluded by exploring both transformational and situational leadership styles that have been exhibited by Marriott in the hospitality industry.

References Algera, P.


Consumer Behaviour: a Purchase Decision Process Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

According to Sheth, Mittal, and Newman (1999), consumer behaviour can be defined as the mental and physical activities performed by households and business consumers that end up in decisions and actions to pay for, purchase, and use products and services.

Before purchasing, a consumer must go through a purchase decision process. This process involves stages passed through when making choices of which services or products to buy. The stages are explained in details each at a time throughout this essay.

The first stage in consumer purchase process is need/problem recognition. Grønhaug


Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques Research Paper essay help

Table of Contents Methodology

Research design


Data collection

Samples and sampling designs

The questionnaire

The interview technique

Reference List

Methodology During the study there is there is a process which involves the preparation of the report which includes data collection, analysis and inference. This section of the research proposal will show us the methods to be used in the study.

The section is important as it would guide the reader on the methods used to come up with the report. The areas to be covered under this research entail the research design, definition of the population to be used for the study, the sampling techniques and then the data collection and analysis methods.

Research design The study will rotate around evaluating the role of stakeholders in the cosmetic industry both in the retail trade and the direct trade or network marketing and compare them as well as seeing how they influence each other (Shepard, 1999).

In addition, the research will also be shaped and designed to help in the achievement of the objectives set out by the researcher under the research objectives.

Population The population to be used in the study is diverse and it ranges from performers in the same industry, competitors of the same industry and those in the retail industry. Therefore exploratory research is to be used in this case since there is less information at hand and there is no recorded data about the same that can be used as reference.

Data collection For the sole purpose of this research, and also in order to achieve the objectives data will be collected using both the primary and secondary data collection methods. The secondary data collected will help us for a backing and strong grounds for our introductory remarks which are both vital and needed also by the researcher in order to build on the project positively.

The reader to the research will also be assisted by the secondary data to comprehend more thoroughly the outcomes of the research and even be able to analyze the interpretations of the outcomes.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Primary data on the other hand shall be collected using two approaches or ways. The first way will require that a questionnaire survey is constructed and used to question the stakeholders in the cosmetics industry.

Then secondly, interviews will also be carried, the forms of interviews may be face to face for respondents who are highly reachable and accessible while telephone interviews will also be done to those who cannot be reached easily.

This is due to the wide nature of the cosmetics industry. The respondents in this case will be competitors in the industry who are both internal and external. Relevant authority will also be questioned and interviewed.

Samples and sampling designs For the purpose of generalization and fair outcome it would have been highly acceptable if all the elements of the population would be studied, but this is not possible due to the large number (Dawson, Catherine, 2002).

The impossibility of this compels the researcher to resort to the use of just a sample or a portion of the population to be used for the study. A sample in this case is a portion of the elements taken from a population, and it is considered or taken to be representative of the entire population under study.

As noted earlier primary data will be collected using the questionnaire technique where questionnaires shall be prepared and distributed to the target respondents for responses.

The sampling method to be adopted in this case is the random probability sampling method since the sample selected of 150 elements of the population is within the normally required limit of if above 30 then below 500 elements (Kothari, 1985).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This is the appropriate sample in this case; therefore 150 questionnaires will be prepared to be distributed for responses. Also, the interview technique will be used alongside the questionnaires; the interview exercise will be conducted across the board within the industry.

The questionnaire A questionnaire is a tool that is normally used to collect or gather information that is of interest to the study that is normally undertaken. In this research closed ended questions will be constructed, this is due to the need to narrow down the exercise (Kumar, and Ranjit, 2005).

The exercise is narrowed down in the sense that respondents are able to strictly choose on from a fixed set of responses. In this case the analysis and interpretation is also made easier since statistical analysis can then be employed.

The only demerit with the questionnaires is that they are likely to create bias in case the right responses are not among the choices.

The interview technique An interview schedule may or may not be prepared depending on the type of audience to be interviewed as well as the nature. Personal interviews may require the schedules since they are always conducted so as to help in the achievement of data collection (Benslaben, 1992).

Telephone interviews are only done in instances where the respondents had to be collected from as a matter of fact and they themselves cannot be reached at face value.

Reference List Saunders, M., Lewis, P.,


Current Financial Market Events and their Implications Term Paper essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Event one

Event Two

Event Three

Event Four


Reference List

Event one The recent global financial crisis has dealt a heavy blow on the American International Group, leading to loss of mortgage-backed securities. Following this loss, AIG has filed a suit against Bank of America in a bid to recover over $ 10 billion USD (Story and Morgenson 2011).

AIG maintains that Bank of America, along with its Countrywide Financial units and Merrily Lynch sold to investors misrepresented mortgages that had been placed as securities. AIG is blaming banks for this historic loss and maintains that it was misled into purchasing risky securities while the property market was still faced with a housing boom.

Other large financial institutions that IAG plans to sue on similar grounds include JPMorgan, Goldman Sachs, and Deutche Bank. The US Justice Department has also received a number of credit crisis cases but because none has yet been prosecuted, consumers and investors are now apportioning blame on financial institutions for the loss (Story and Morgenson 2011).

Nonetheless, the Justice Department is pushing for the prosecution of these cases, albeit at a slow pace. For example, a former chairman of Taylor, Bean


Obese in the Society Essay custom essay help

Introduction It is no doubt that obesity is one of the biggest challenges of the modern times. It is ironical that so much is known about the obesity especially the health hazard of the condition but yet more and more people are witnessed growing obese with every dawn.

It is not a secret that a significant portion of the Americans are aware of the dangers of getting obese but does this knowledge seem to have any effect. In this article, a suggestion is given for the government to regulate the food business. The main argument of the paper is based on the reasoning that the government should protect its people from effects of obese.

Obese has become a national issue It is no doubt that obese has become an issue of national interest. It is very clear that despite the awareness programs being carried out, there is no significant change being witnessed in the expected direction but instead more people are seemingly making assumptions about the effects of being obese and are becoming obese.

The cost of obesity is immense and nations such as the US, the government is forced to part with a lot of funds in treatment of conditions which are brought about by being obese.

As a matter of fact being obese is a risk factor for heart attack and without proper care one can easily succumb to heart attack when obese. Children and women especially pregnant mothers expose themselves to various risks by getting obese.

Physical body exercises are very significant for a proper development of children but this may not be possible if a child is obese. Government expenditure and the risks that obese citizens expose themselves are enough reason for the government to be concern.

As it has been mentioned above, despite the enormous efforts which have been put forward towards discouraging people from being obese, it has not been possible to discourage people from growing obese.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Obese has become an issue of national interest thus the need for the government to swiftly move in and control the food industry. It has been witnessed that the food manufacturers are not very concern about the welfare of the citizens and actually that is why junk food outlets and increasing by day.

On their own the people do not seem to make the correct judgment concerning healthy feeding. The food companies on their side do not seem to care about what kind of food they are selling to their customers.

If the government is to control the food industry it will be possible for the amount of junk food released to the market to be reduced thus effectively reducing the rates of obesity. It is worth noting that there will be a likely of protest against such a move probably based on the argument of freedom of choice.

Conclusion Despite the much information available in the society against being obese because of the health dangers associated with one being obese. The government should take measures and control the food industry.

By regulating the food industry it will became possible for the amount of junk food released to the market to be reduced. This will effectively reduce the obesity levels in the nation and some medical expenses. Though such a move will likely be faced with some opposition, it will likely work well.


Fashion Controversies about Hip Hop Garments Research Paper a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The hip hop garment

Origin of the hip hop garment

The controversy over hip hop garments


Works Cited

Introduction Fashion refers to an ongoing upheld attitude or behavior in a society. It covers ranges of customs as well as styles that are adopted by people in a society such as dresses worn by people. Controversy on the other hand refers to the existence of a varied opinion between two groups with opposing views.

Fashion controversy thus relates to a dispute between two opposing camps that results from conflicting opinions due to a fashion design.

This paper seeks to discuss controversy over a garment design. The paper will look into controversy that arose over hip hop garment design with the aim of identifying the source of the controversy, key players in the controversy as well as political, social and economic aspects of the fashion.

The paper will also look into the relationship between fashion and social together with political issues and impacts of the hip hop garment controversy.

The hip hop garment The hip hop garment fashion can be traced to the hip hop music following its close association with the type of music. Hip hop form of music was developed in the years of 1970s and later associated with a characterized dressing code.

This developed dressing fashion was spread and adopted among communities at the time. The dressing design was further spread and widely adopted by people in the following years of 1980s. The design, that was characterized with generally large over sized cloths that were accompanied by extensive jewelry then became recognized as a world fashion.

The widely spread design had an impact on the way that both men and women, especially the youth dressed (Adams 1).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The introduction of the hip hop dressing style shook the entire world through its influence. The fashion was extensively spread with its features being evident in almost every corner of the world. The features of the dressing style such as “oversized football jerseys, baggy jeans, and omnipresent bling” (Ultimate 1) have been common with men’s dressing while women have been identified with such dresses as “skintight mini dresses, colorful tube and halter tops and low rise jeans and of course the bling” (Ultimate 1).

Like the hip hop music, its corresponding dressing style has immensely spread and is felt among different societies. Its association to the music style facilitated its acceptance among people who had been strong fans to the music style.

Hip hop artists such as “Eminem, Fergie and Jenifer Lopez” (Ultimate 1) have been identified as some of the key figures that contributed to the spread of the hip hop dressing style (Ultimate 1). Having been popular musicians, these people through their visits to different corners of the world together with their music on cassettes and even on televisions, played a key role in the spread of the hip hop dressing style.

Another feature that was also identified with the hip hop garment fashion was its outstanding rebellious instinct. The style has since attracted the attention of many designers and companies that entered into the market to take advantage of consumers’ preference in order to make sales.

Akademics was for example a cloth company that majorly traded in the hip hop kind of design.

The designers of the company were reported to have been strong followers of hip hop music. Their involvement in the type of dressing design was therefore driven by the association between the design and the music style. Other designer groups that involved in the hip hop dressing design included Coogi, and Ecko designer companies among others (Ultimate 1).

Origin of the hip hop garment The hip hop garment is believed to have derived its roots from the culture that was developed by the hip hop music as was introduced in the beginning of the last quarter of the twentieth century. The actual dressing style however came to its notable existence later in the years of 1980s following the seemingly cultural establishment by the then hip hop music artists.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Fashion Controversies about Hip Hop Garments specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The artists clothed were identified to have changed from the normally evidenced designs that were witnessed at the time into the characteristic features of oversized clothes for men and the corresponding skintight ones for women.

The establishment of the hip hop fashion can therefore be attributed to the hip hop music artists that were in existence in the time period in which the dressing fashion was established and spread. Such hip hop artist as “Run-DMC and LL Cool J” can for example thus be recognized as the figures or personalities that instituted and promoted the development of the fashion in the then society.

The influence into the design was although later infiltrated by other groups such as the media and cloth designers together with traders in the market for clothes who then facilitated the fashion in the process of earning a living from their trading profession.

The features such as “huge gold necklaces and jewelry” together with a characteristic hair design which were introduced by figures such as “Daddy Kane or Kurtis Blow” (Deadboyle 1) also fueled the fashion.

The controversy over hip hop garments The hip hop garment as a sub culture of the hip hop has suffered much negative attacks from the society at large. There are a large number of populations in the society who have for example disregarded the culture of hip hop as a whole to be a set of immature behavior that that should only be a characteristic of school kids. These groups of people view the hip hop culture, and hence the hip hop dressing as a set of behavior that is not quiet sensible.

There have been negative attitudes towards the culture that view hip hop followers as sort of illiterate class of people who are not serious about knowledge. The set of people identified with the hip hop culture are also perceived to be “destructive and materialistic” in their nature and lives (Dyson 1).

It was because of these perceived features over hip hop followers that Dyson noted a difference when he encountered a young adult who seemingly had positive characteristics that were contrary to the critical attacks on the hip hop culture and garments.

In his argument, Dyson expresses his subject as an example of an excellent student in a perfect academic environment. The subject is described as an individual who is passionate and is also concerned with life. He reads in order to have a better comprehension of his life.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Fashion Controversies about Hip Hop Garments by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More According to Dyson’s representation, his subject was involved in the hip hop culture and was perceived to be an advocate for the tradition. The young man is expressed to be calling upon people to rise beyond their skepticisms and understand the true concept of hip hop.

The subject thus, as represented by Dyson, is an advocate for the hip hop culture with a strong feeling that the fans and followers of hip hop need not to be victimized for what they believe in and how they want to live their lives (Dyson 1).

Dyson is also himself an advocate for the culture that extends to the music and the dressing codes. He rose to the understanding of his subject, whom he met at a security check point. By appreciating the young man who was seemingly influenced by the hip hop culture, Dyson was in defense of the hip hop culture in the sense that the culture was being blindly criticized.

The comparison and contrast that Dyson held between the young man at the security check point and Dyson’s son equivalently describes a dual opinion held over the culture as he further hold the view that the young man whom he met was a proof that not all people in his generation are negatively influenced by the culture of hip hop.

The young man who is represented as a follower of the hip hop culture, though he possessed traits that were likable, together with Dyson are therefore seen as part of the group of people that have come up to support the culture of hip hop in general.

They have appreciated that being involved in the hip hop culture is neither a crime nor a social vice. In their opinion, elements of the hip hop culture such as the music itself or other elements like hip hop garments does not necessarily take away a person’s sensibility or capacity (Dyson 1).

Dyson in his defense for the hip hop culture also explains about critics of the culture on the other hand. He gives example of people such as jazz superstar, Wynton, who went ahead to publicly criticize the hip hop culture as an immature adolescent oriented practice.

Even stronger criticisms were enlisted from personalities such as Stanley Crouch who held the opinion that “the deficits of hip hop blare beyond the borders of ugly art to inspire youths to even uglier behavior” (Dyson 1).

One of the major reasons for such strong criticisms over the hip hop culture is its perceived influence to bad behavior. Some of the major drivers of the hip hop culture are also identified to be poor models to the youth in the society.

People like 50 Cent who rides in the popularity of the hip hop culture with his negative history of having survived nine bullets are identified as some of the negative influences that that are transmitted into innocent brains in the form hip hop culture. The elements of the culture such as dressing style, thus enlists these reactions among people.

The emergence of the culture of the hip hop dressing garments thus stands out to be a controversy between those who have been drawn into the culture together with those who have accepted and understood the culture on one hand and those who still strongly believe that the hip hop garment together with all other elements of hip hop are associated with negative behavior in the society. These two groups continue to be in conflict with each other (Dyson 1).

The hip hop garment controversy, or in general the hip hop controversy has been significantly felt in societies in a number of ways that range from domestic in social set up to political issues in the general public.

difference in perception among the opposing groups in the controversy over the hip hop garments, which is in most cases a result of manifestation of the dominance of the hip hop culture in an individual, has a potential to create further divisions among generations in a given society.

A responsible parent who holds the opinion that his or her child is being misled into negative behavior by the hip hop tradition might not be pleased and tolerant to the child who will at the same time be rebellious in order to protect what he or she believes in.

Tensions are therefore caused in social set ups due to the emergence of the culture and garments that are associated with hip hop. Influences of such culture also spills to economic and political issues of a society (Jones 1).

Cases have been reported in which the influence of the hip hop culture has led to negative and even criminal conducts by the youth. A case of a former student who fell for the influence a rapper, “Too $hort”, who was also a gangster saw the student fall into criminal activities leading to his prosecution.

The end result was that though the student did not face a severe penalty like his model who died in the hands of the police, he lost his financial support in college as well as his voting rights. The hip hop garments which are in most cases manifestations of the hip hop lifestyle can therefore have a variety of implications in the lives of those who acculturate the tradition in terms of political, social and even financial aspects.

Owing to the fact that the culture is majorly experienced among the youth and the fact that these youths forms a large percentage of the population, factors such as legal restraints arising from negative influence of such fashions are threats to political, social and economic developments of any given society.

Just as the hip hop garment fashion was a development and a promotion of the hip hop music, a fashion that is based on political or social aspects can be used as entry points to these avenues. Clothes with party banners can for example be used in campaigns.

The use of fashion together with its influence having proved to be effective in the hip hop music arena, its significance can therefore be similarly concluded in other aspects such as politics. The controversy over the hip hop garment still divides the opposing camp.

The youth still holds on to the meaning of the garment that spreads the influence of the music. The impacts of the influence of the culture such as imitating hip hop superstars’ bad behavior and experiences such as those of “Too $hort” still remains a threat to the behavior of those who adopts the fashion (Jones 1).

At the current trend of the hip hop influence one may be tempted to ask, so where will all this lead to? IT is true that the hip hop clothing culture is one of the fastest growing influences on the culture in the US. The youth will soon turn into parents and thus the society will be composed of families whose main dressing will be the hip hop style.

Should this raise any alarm? Personal I do not see the reason for any alarm. This reason for my stand is because this is just “mean renaissance” and such kinds of changes are prone to take place in any society.

The hip hop dressing should be viewed just like any other clothing. There is absolutely no alarm to be raised about the dressing. The only issue to be addressed is that of separating the negative influence which comes with the clothing.

If parents and authorities will be able to counsel the young generation to treat the dressing as such and avoid engaging in unwanted behavior just because they are in hip hop attire, then it would be a won war. Therefore, there is a need to channel efforts to ensure that hip hop attire are used purely as attires.

Conclusion The hip hop garment fashion that is based hip hop music’s adopted culture has spread to be globally felt. The fashion has drawn a controversy between those who adopts or understands it and those who oppose it.

It is however identified that the impacts of the garment has been felt and is significant in political, social and even economic aspects of life.

The attire has been in most cases been associated with bad influence. As a matter of fact it may be very hard to restrict the use of this attire taking into consideration that it a way of expression and thus there is a need for efforts, as pointed above, to be channeled to encouraging the youth to purely treat the attires as such and not as springboards for carrying out social evils that are mostly associated with hip hop clothing.

Works Cited Adams, Janis. What is hip hop clothing? Wisegeek, 2010. Web.

Deadboyle. Hip hop history. Blogigo, 2010. Web.

Dyson, Michael. Author comes to hip hop music’s defense. NPR, 2007. Web.

Jones, David. Standing up and speaking out. NHI, 2004. Web.

Ultimate. The hip hop clothing designers. Ultimate Hip Hop, n.d. Web.


Contemporary Globalization and its Impact on the American Worker Report (Assessment) cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Table of Contents Arguments used to explain contemporary globalization

Impact of globalization on the American worker


Works Cited

Globalization broadly refers to the process through which people and countries integrate economically, culturally and politically into a large community. Initially started during the slave era, globalization has over time brought people and nations together through advancements in technology that erases barriers of time and distance as well as improved flows of information that promotes greater awareness.

In this context, globalization refers to the expansion of economic actions across national borders, yielding systems of production, trade, and consumption that link geographically dispersed regions into a common, highly interwoven system (Vallas, Finlay and Wharton 316).

Contemporary globalization has facilitated the swift transmission of capital and jobs abroad to take advantage of low-priced labor. Nowadays, nations enjoy cheap products manufactured overseas through importation.

Globalization has also resulted in mass relocation of workers from across countries who hope to find better-paying employment in wealthier nations. New immigrants have become a source of cheap labor to employers in the wealthier nations.

Arguments used to explain contemporary globalization Recent technological advancements have considerably aided the pace of contemporary globalization. Technological innovation has reduced economic distances in terms of both time and cost. Emergence of jet planes, satellite communication, internet and fiber-optic cables have improved transport and communication. Advances in communication have enabled companies to break up the production process into definite steps.

They are able to produce goods in various locations that enable them minimize costs. As a result, modern products are assembled from components outsourced from different countries. The revolution in information technology has facilitated global trade in a range of services that vary from call center operations to advanced medical, engineering, legal and financial services. Globalization has led to outsourcing of many services and in the process expose jobs held by the U.S. labor force and other countries to international competition.

International specialization and division of labor significantly explain contemporary globalization. The breakdown of production processes into smaller parts and subsequent placement in the hands of supervisors has led to the organization and specialization of labor. Henry Ford’s organization of work and workers came to explain twentieth century industrialist capital society (Vallas, Finlay and Wharton 85).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More They observe that production processes at the Ford Corporation utilized principles of scientific management established by Frederick Taylor. Taylor’s motion and time studies aimed at the analysis of tasks and elimination of unnecessary motions with a view to reduce time wastage and increase efficiency. The authors note that the invention of assembly lines, enabled breakdown of tasks into single, repetitive motions that allowed the interchange of labor involved in the assembly of different parts.

Division of labor through assembly lines increased efficiency and facilitated mass production thus explain contemporary globalization. The authors, however, note that emphasis on increased efficiency and speed has led to misery of workers due to low bargaining power. According to Waldinger and Lichter (229), the willingness and readiness of immigrants to take on any available job has contributed to this problem.

Governments realize that resources from other countries are vital in their economies. Leadership in the implementation of policies and ratification of international agreements consequently facilitated globalization. Modern governments have waived restrictions on trade and flow of capital making it easy for corporations to operate globally.

Institutions such as the World Trade Organization have supported the inclusion of workers into the global system through the development of rules and business friendly regulations. Other agreements such as NAFTA have provided room for economic integration and explain globalization.

Impact of globalization on the American worker Contemporary globalization propagated by multinational corporations has direct impacts on workers. Many services ranging from medicine, finance and computer programming are now done cheaply by workers from other countries thus increasing competition on white collar jobs. Businesses that do not lay off workers now break their promise on health insurance and pension to remain competitive in the global market.

The result is that American workers have become insecure with regard to job tenure and ability to offer quality medical services and education for their families. In cases where corporations move to other nations in the hunt for lower labor wages, workers within the US lose their jobs.

As witnessed in the garment industries, American workers resulted to strikes counter the tendency of corporations’ minimization of wages. Emphasis on efficiency and mass production, while ignoring the health and social welfare of workers, has forced them to poverty, isolation and misery (Vallas, Finlay and Wharton 85).

We will write a custom Assessment on Contemporary Globalization and its Impact on the American Worker specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Globalization has forced American workers to create networks and unions to militate against income inequality and corporate domination. The market has favored the highly skilled workers at the disadvantage of low skilled workers. As a result, the uneven process of globalization has contributed to new social morality where some segments of the society feel cheated and displaced by globalization.

The episode resulted in the emergence of social divisions between those favored and those endangered by globalization. Workers view themselves as losers and employers as gainers. The consequence has been social detachment between the two parties even when they share ethnic backgrounds (Waldinger and Lichter 16).

Through globalization, many immigrant workers are able to relocate to America exposing local workers to extreme employment competition. Corporations exacerbated the problem through preference of foreign workers over American workers. Some employers preferred immigrant workers over US workers due to their friendliness, eagerness and optimistic subservience (Waldinger and Lichter 220).

American workers are forced to improve their skills through training and acquisition of foreign languages. Employers have also paid higher wages to bilingual Americans hence giving them a competitive edge in the job market. The authors find that employers praised Asians and Latinos for their willingness to work persistently for long hours.

Conclusion Globalization has resulted in the interconnection of the world and made it a global village where individuals and corporations can transact with virtually anyone across the globe. Advancement in technology has continually facilitated the process through improvement in transport, communication and production infrastructure. Leadership and integration policies by nations such as a waiver of trade barriers, coupled by intervention of trade agencies such as WTO and NAFTA have also aided globalization.

Globalization has impacted the worker through loss of job security as corporations waived benefits so as to compete favorably in the global arena. In most occasions, there has been competition from immigrant workers with the willingness to take on any jobs further reducing the bargaining power of the American workers. Workers have felt insecure on their ability to meet the requirements families as incomes come down.

Works Cited Vallas, Steven P., William Finlay, and Amy Wharton. The Sociology of Work: Structures and Inequalities. New York: Oxford University Press, 2009. Print.

Waldinger, Roger, and Michael I. Lichter. How the Other Half Works: Immigration and the Social Organization of Labor. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2003. Print.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Contemporary Globalization and its Impact on the American Worker by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


Children’s Implicit and Explicit Ethnic Group Report college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Connections between Readings

New Novel Extension

Connections between Findings, Arguments and Theory


Introduction Implicit attitudes in children develop according to their surroundings. These surroundings range from cultural processes, which the child undergoes, to the intergroup and child preferences as he or she grows up. Age is not an important determinant since when implicit association test (IAT) is administered; the same results are evident in both the adults and children.

However, the level of biasness differs from child to child, and it may not appear as much in the adults. A great divergence is observed at the age of 10 onwards. This is where a child begins to develop other important traits, which will assist in attitude development.

Consequently, at this age, a child is in a position to start analyzing issues critically and pay much attention to things he or she must have assumed at a very tender age.

The Children’s implicit and explicit ethnic group attitudes’ development can also be influenced by the parents. Since children copy what their parents do, they will become very resistant to anything that their guardians do not believe in. This is why many children will show a lot of favoritism in the in-group compared to the out-group.

Connections between Readings Self-esteem and intergroup attitudes play a major role in the development of the children’s implicit and explicit attitudes. Many children will show more favoritism towards the in-group than the out-group. This is the same when it comes to implicit and explicit assessments.

Therefore, it is important to note that, it is very hard to find a child who has a very low attitude in his/her in-group. However, if data are accumulated, it may appear that the white children normally have cumulative low attitude in their in-group.

Many British children, both the whites and the blacks, value the black culture and show positive implicit and explicit attitudes on the blacks. It is also evident that, the adults have low in-group preference, compared to the children.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Both readings also portray that implicit attitudes are attained at an early stages and remain practically stable throughout the development stage, up to around age 10 when there are some split between the conscious and the less conscious ethnic attitudes (Siegler, DeLoache


How Cultural Diversity is Defined in America? Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Generalizing People: Ethos on Cultural Diversity

The Argument

Emotional Appeals of the Essays

Culturally Aware of Actions

The Writers Point of Views


Works Cited

Introduction America has always had a culturally diverse society but discrimination among races is common in the country. Ethnic wars shaped the American history as the whites and colored struggle to cohabitate in the country. In the present day, though there are no more wars among races, cultural diversity still continues to be a sensitive issue among citizens of the United States. I had reviewed two essays with regards to the issue of cultural diversity in the country.

One is by Susan Brady Konig entitled “They’ve Got to Be Carefully Taught”. It is about how children in preschool are introduced to the issue of cultural diversity. Another essay I had read is “Do I Look Like Public Enemy Number One?” by Lorraine Ali. The essay is about a young American girl of Arabic descent. She is being judged and scrutinized because of her race rather by her own personality and behavior thus growing up; she was ashamed of her Arabic ancestry.

These two essays address how race is being defined by most people in America. How people of color are alienated because of their cultural backgrounds. Though victims may be American citizens themselves, still they are judged for the color of their skin, hair or ethnicity rather than by who they truly are.

This paper aims to analyze how cultural diversity is defined in America. Through the use of rhetorical devices such as ethos, logos, pathos, purpose and diction the two essays I had read and reviewed will be fully evaluated.

Generalizing People: Ethos on Cultural Diversity Ethos is used to illustrate the guiding principle or values that describe a group of people, state or ideology. Most white Americans believe that people of color are considered foreigners even if they were breed, born and raised in the United States like most white American. This ideology brings conflict to the society for it separates people according to their hair and skin color, religious and moral beliefs and their races and ancestry in general.

In Konig’s essay, she pointed out that the issue of cultural diversity is introduced to children as early as their preschool days. Teachers may be culturally biased and such bias might be transferred to young toddlers if they are not careful. Kids at ages two or three years old may not fully understand the issue. They may misunderstand the concept. This becomes very dangerous for the misconception of cultural diversity may stain relationships and outlooks on races.

In “They’ve Got to Be Carefully Taught”, Konig pointed out at the end of her essay that a young dark haired girl became an outcast. Two blonde haired young girls did not include her in their circle because she was different. It is this result that we can attest that the efforts of the school and teachers to highlight and teach cultural diversity to children failed.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In Ali’s essay, the writer aired out her sentiments on growing up as an Arabic woman in the United States. She was constantly ridiculed and pre-judged because of her ethnicity. She pointed out that her sister suffered from teachers in school.

“During roll call on her first day of junior high, Lela was made to sit through a twenty-minute lecture about the bloodshed and barbarism of Arabs towards Israel and the world: (Ali, 50 – 54).

Ideologies may influence a person but it is the person’s decision to adopt what he had learned from such ideologies. Stereotyping seemed to be very common in the American society where different races generalize one another, forgetting that each individual is different in their own way.

The Argument Logos is defined as the argument in the field of rhetoric. Both essays presented depicted the misconceptions of cultural diversity. People tend to judge a person through his or her own ethnicity. It is very common in the American society that people of color are judged by the actions of a few bad ones. They are the victims for they are not seen through clearly by the society, mostly composing of white people.

In Konig’s essay the discrimination among races and cultures are introduced as early as two years old. The introduction of the issue of cultural diversity among toddlers as the writer pointed out was mismanaged by the facilitators thus children, though they became aware of the differences among each other, became divided because of such differences.

The point is further exemplified by Ali’s essay where the writer pointed out that as a child she had trouble embracing her ethnicity because of hearsays. Being of Arabic descent became a burden for her because of what people say about her culture. Arabs are no longer seen as individual human beings who can feel pain but rather as people who are bad and heartless. People of Arabic descent are seen as people who terrorize the “good” white Americans.

Emotional Appeals of the Essays Pathos is a technique of writers to capture or appeal to the emotions and feelings of their readers. Analyzing how the two authors captured my emotional attention I can say their approaches are both very personal. It is their personal experiences that made me empathize with them and the subject matter. I can feel the annoyance Konig felt when her daughter’s preschool teacher pressed on about their ethnicity.

We will write a custom Essay on How Cultural Diversity is Defined in America? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Describing her own sentiments and feelings on the subject matter made me empathize with her. On the other hand, Ali’s pain of hiding her ancestry was epitomized by her story telling. She had managed to capture my attention when she briefly summarized her life growing up as a woman of Middle Eastern descent.

Culturally Aware of Actions The purposes of the two essays were clear. Both authors wanted to express their sentiments on the issue of cultural diversity. Konig expressed that schools generally teach students things the teachers wish to impart which are usually personal biases among cultures. By doing so students develop a sense of knowing where they belong. This leads to discrimination and division in the long run.

Ali on the other hand wanted to impart to her readers that because of how the American society depicts a certain culture through the actions of a few, they tend to generalize the whole which outcasts the most people who have done nothing wrong. Cultural diversity has affected lives of people and these two women write examples of their own personal experiences. One tells the story of how misleading school systems are in teaching the said issue another writes about how she lived with constant judgment of her ancestry.

The Writers Point of Views In writing their essays, both authors wrote in a very personal style. They used easy to understand words and instilled conversations from their experiences. Konig told her story like a master story teller by inserting dialogues in her essay. She brought her characters to life with actual conversations such as:

“We’re native New Yorkers.”

“But where are your people from?”

“Well,” I dive in with a sigh. “My family is originally Irish in both sides. My husband’s father was from Czechoslovakia and his mother is from the Bronx, but her grandparents were from Ukraine.” (Konig,46 – 48)

She managed to put some emotions into dialogues to give readers a feel of what the characters’ emotions are. On the other hand, Ali did the same thing in her essay where she would occasionally make the characters of her essay talk.

Not sure if you can write a paper on How Cultural Diversity is Defined in America? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It was interesting how she gave a brief background and history of the Arabic culture where she explained some jargons such as Haja and Hajia as she would refer to her grandparents. She explained in her essay that those two worlds are given to people who have completed a religious journey to Mecca in Saudi Arabia. Ali provides her readers a glimpse of her own culture which I personally like.

Conclusion The essays I had analyzed talked about cultural diversity in the American society. As early as in their preschool days, children are already taught about the issue of diversity but the biases of teachers are passed on to students thus children are divided according to their ethnicity.

The result of such leads to the constant generalization of races where identities of individuals are based on the racial groups they belong to. The authors’ styles in illustrating their points to the readers are quite simple as they approach readers by telling their personal experiences to hook the readers.

Works Cited Ali, Lorraine. “Do I Look Like Public Enemy Number One?” Mirror on America: Essays and Images from Popular Culture. Ed. Joan Mims and Elizabeth Nollen. America: Bedford St. Martin’s, 2011. 50-54. Print.

Konig, Susan Brady. “They’ve Got to Be Carefully Taught.” Mirror on America: Essays and Images from Popular Culture. Ed. Joan Mims and Elizabeth Nollen. America: Bedford St. Martin’s, 2011. 46-48. Print.


Renaissance Paintings by Jan Van Eyck and Filippo Lippi Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Renaissance Paintings Jan Van Eyck – Portrait of a Man in Turban Jan Eyck was an artist from Northern Europe. He worked on many paintings, but one of his most outstanding paintings is the portrait of a man in turban which he did in 1443. This artwork is thought to be his own reflection. Jan was perceived to be the pioneer of using oil paints in this region.

The image is two-dimensional because we can only see the front side and the top side. By just looking at the image, it is clear that Jan Van Eyck was a very religious person owing to the turban on his head.

The difference between the background and the foreground of the image is difficult to determine because the dark coloring has overlapped the other elements. However, the same darkness has been used to create an outline of the image. The artist used more contrast on the areas that he needed to highlight.

If there was more contrast in the entire image, a balance would have been achieved (Sider 67). This is because the image covers only one half of the frame.

The shadowing is used to block other characters in the image because the artist wanted the viewers to focus on his personality portrayed in the image (Levy 7). The same shadowing is applied on the turban to create texture. More texture has been created by the smooth lines that are on the surface of the turban to create an impression of the folds in the garment.

The outline of the turban is used to create an impression on the size of the headgear. However, the outline is blended with the background to create a smooth edge. There is an aspect of sequence in this image with regard to appearance.

When the viewer glances at the image, darkness is the first aspect to be seen followed by the bright face. The source of light flows from the left side of the image and that is why the other body parts such as ears cannot be seen.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Filippo Lippi – The Madonna and Child Filippo was another renaissance painter who was born and brought up in Italy. He is was a renowned artist who worked on the Madonna and Child 1440-1445 painting. In this painting, there is a woman who is holding a baby that is placed on a platform, but her image dominates the entire image.

The image has two dimensions because there is height and width (Paoletti and Radke 14). The colors used on the lady’s garments are of high value as opposed to those used on the child’s clothing. Both vertical and horizontal lines have been repeated to create smooth texture and smooth edges.

The colors that are used in the image are much related and thus they create an element of unity. The images are also connected to each other. The lady is linked to the child through her hand and the child is seated on the platform. The background is not blended with the outline of the image.

This argument can be verified by looking at the right hand of the woman, which is overlapped by the body of the child. There would be no balance in the image if the child were not present because the woman seems to lean towards the left side as seen from the woman’s tilted head and the elbow.

However, the position of the child compensates for the imbalance that the woman creates. The lines have been used to separate colors to make sure that each color is distinct (Bayer 1). However, this is only applied on the woman’s garments. The background is made up of several colors that are of low value.

Light is evenly distributed in the image expect on the lower right hand side where the baby creates an obstruction. The image has an aspect of religion which is evidenced by the background of the image. The background represents renaissance architecture where arcs were used and the technique was common in religious buildings. Moreover, the garments worn by the lady represent an element of fashion.

Works Cited Bayer, Andrea. Northern Italian Renaissance Painting. 2000. Web.

We will write a custom Essay on Renaissance Paintings by Jan Van Eyck and Filippo Lippi specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Levy, Janey. Renaissance Paintings: Using Perspective to Represent Three Dimensional Paintings. New York: Rosen Classroom, 2005. Print.

Paoletti, John, and Radke Gary. Art in Renaissance Italy. 3rd ed. London: Lawrence King Publishing, 2005. Print.

Sider, Sandra. Handbook to Life in Renaissance Europe. New York: InfoBase Publishing, 2005. Print.


A Concept of Best Friends Essay cheap essay help

Human beings are social beings in nature who find it difficult to stay alone. As a result, they require people who are close to them, people with whom they can share ideas and help one another. A person who is close to us and whom we enjoy spending time with is referred to as a friend. Everybody in life requires friends because they are always there when we need them. Friends can be categorized into best, fair and new friends.

Best friends are friends who can be trusted in all circumstances and who are ready to offer any assistance required. In other words, best friends have qualities that distinguish them from other types of friends. For people to be our best friends, they do not have to be cute or possess a lot of wealth, but best friends possess some crucial qualities.

One of the qualities that a best friend should possess is the ability to understand us. This means that the person knows us very well by recognizing our behaviors, fears, and the things will value and adore.

In addition, a friend who understands us knows when we are unhappy and comforts us. Another quality that is characteristic of best friends is honesty. A best friend should be able to keep our deepest secrets and should never talk ill of us or betray us.

Honest friends are trustworthy and we feel safe when we share secrets with them because we do not have worries that the information will spread to other people. A friend to qualify to be our best friend also needs to be caring. An example of a best friend is our parents or our spouses.

The second type of friends is referred to as a fair friends. Although fair friends are slightly different from best friends, they are friends who can be relied on in different ways. One of the qualities that should be possessed by a fair friend is impartiality.

Being impartial means that fair friends are just and they do not give information aimed at making us happy when, in real sense, there are potential risks. In all circumstances, fair friends like to see that we get the attitude that we deserve. Sometimes, we require people who tell us the truth, no matter how painful it might be, so that we avoid getting into trouble.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, some friends praise us when they know that we are heading the wrong direction. Fair friends are honest enough to give us honest advices that save us from getting into trouble. An example of a fair friend is a work mate who challenges us to ensure that we do our best.

The third type of friends is new friends. Since human beings are social in nature, they interact with different people in different activities. During such interactions, they meet other people they have never met and known before and establish new contacts. These are usually referred to as new friends.

New friends are people we meet in our lives and gain interest in their character. They are important because they increase the number of friends that we have. Since we always need assistance in various ways, it is important to have new friends who can assist us.

It is, therefore, important to make new friends because, by doing this, we increase the number of people who can assist when in need. Examples of new friends include people we meet during meetings, seminars and in learning institutions.


Peculiarities of Plagiarism Descriptive Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

Plagiarism is one of the most crucial problems of academic writing. Today, the level of plagiarism increases due to the easy access of Internet sources. Many students copy the sentences or the ideas of the researchers or other students without marking it as the citation. The results of such method of writing lead to a number of problems.

First of all, copying someone’s words, the student does not reflect about the real meaning of the particular idea; therefore, he/she does not comprehend the topic appropriately. Moreover, in some situations, plagiarism can be considered as a crime, copyright infringement. It is obvious that plagiarism is a significant problem within the process of academic writing.

There are several aspects of possibility of plagiarism. Firstly, it may happen by chance due to the use of the facts which the student may consider as common or well-known. In this case, he/she does not provide a name of the author or source. However, this problem can be easily avoided by the use of the quotation marks and footnotes or endnotes.

Surely, everyone has the different writing ability. Therefore, many students try to search some information that can help them to cope with the assignments. They cite not only the sources which are appropriate and can be used in a paper, but also the samples of works of other students without changing the structure of sentences, paragraphs or even the whole texts.

Most of the time, such work fails the verification procedure and gets the negative responses. In order to avoid this problem, students should paraphrase sentences or to restate it in a different way. Thus, there will be evidence that the student wrote this paper by oneself and comprehended the topic well.

As it was mentioned before, when the student use the certain facts or ideas, it is necessary to mark it as a citation. The various citation styles have the different requirements of the endnotes and footnotes. However, all of them emphasize the necessity of an adequate citing.

Besides, when the student uses an appropriate quotation from a good source, this point can help to get better results. The teacher will admit that the student made a deep research, analyzing the related texts.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Additionally, today there is an access to the programs which can check the paper, indicting the sentences that have to be reworded. Although many people may suppose that this issue is not significant, I totally disagree with this statement. Plagiarism can be considered as a stealing of someone’s property and, depending of the level of seriousness, the person who uses plagiarism can bear the disciplinary or criminal liability.

Academic writing has to demonstrate the personal ability to make the research, to analyze the ideas, compare and contrast the opinions and to express the reflection. Therefore, it is absolutely wrong to present someone’s idea or text as one’s own. Simple paraphrasing and the use of quotation marks will help to solve the problem.

However, it is always necessary to pay attention to the information provided in the text in order to be sure of its originality, importance and adequacy. As the use of Internet makes thousands of sources available, the different programs that check the plagiarism are also can be accessible and used in order to solve this serious problem of academic writing.


Book Review: The Great War and Modern Memory Review Essay college admission essay help

Paul Fussell book “the Great War and Modern Memory” is about the British people and their experience during World War I and World War II. The book literally examines the effects of world wars on the British culture. The author, an infantry platoon leader during the World War II, excellently analyzes the changes the war has on the soldiers way of thinking in the battle fields and the people left at home.

Using lots of literally material from different sources including poetry, memoirs, newspapers, letters, and magazines Fussell manages to recreate the events that led to the change in ideals and beliefs of war when the British engaged the massed armies of the western front.

The book re-examines and restates the striking and typical expressions of the English literally consciousness arising from the war and after the war. The British men loved war when they believed it was worthy and with every opportunity, they had expressed the desire to fight. War gave their lives a special kind of meaning.

Ironically, the seriousness of war was lost on them as many lost their lives fighting in a war they did not fully understand. Paul Fussell documents the huge loss of British soldiers during the war with 20000 men killed during the first day of the Somme offensive.

Over 60000 British men were killed during the war and the author depicts vividly in a grotesque picture the emotional and physical effects of the war on the soldiers leading to disillusionment in the war. The unimaginable life in the trenches, blood, death and the painful reality that death was just around the corner undid the soldiers long held beliefs and ideals. The author superbly uses literally imagery of the trenches, enemy, and symbolism to bring out the changes in the book.

Despite the bloodshed, suffering, and agony experienced during the war, the major objective was to defeat the enemy and stop it. If this was done then all the suffering was justified. Fussell uses Sassoon memoirs. Sassoon who was an infantry officer writes ‘George learns the truth about the war that is ruining England and has no good reason for continuing it’.

It had to continue if the Germans who fought again in 1935-1945 had to be stopped and defeated. Sassoon who had been out with injuries went back to the war front courageously to fight, in reality ‘to stop the Germans’

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The courage and valor of the soldiers is admirably but the book evokes pain in absence of a sense of purpose of the war in the men. The British were not prepared for war, and they had the notion that the world was getting better socially and in other aspects and hence the war psychologically took a heavy toll on them. Hitler on the other hand had made sure that Germans were psychologically and materially ready for war and hence Germans had no psychological issues to deal with.

Fussell drives this point home when says, “The British were amateur, ad hoc and temporally. The Germans were efficient, clean, pedantic, and permanent. Their occupants proposed to stay where they were”. This is very true considering that the Germans had deep bunkers furnished with tapped water, beds and other accessories compared to the British trenches that made them live in squalid conditions.

The naivety of the British mind which world war one had not changed was starting to crumble and the British could not be able to figure out Germany and how to deal with her during the post war period.

The historical cultural change in Britain according to Fussell leans towards the warfare and the very traumatic experience in the squalid trenches within a very short period of time. This loss of the 19th century social and cultural ideals had already begun much earlier than the world wars.

This change could have been due to social reorganization and advanced civilization of the society and other factors and the war simply hastened the process. In the Great War and Modern Memory, Fussell fails to give credit to this and thus gives a skewed picture of the changes in ideals of the generations in the war and after the war.

The book is written in a British literature background and there is no mention of the other European countries effects of the war. Fussell does not tackle the shaping of cultural ideals and history of the European countries by the war, a major omission by his book. He answers this indirectly by indicating he was dealing uniquely with the British cultural mindset.

In a liberal perspective, however, there was a big difference in the national’s cultural response and reaction to the war and the author should have read other literally work from authors in the other European Nations.

We will write a custom Essay on Book Review: The Great War and Modern Memory Review specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This can show the similarities and differences in the responses and can help us understand the reasons behind the varied reactions of different people faced with the same situation. The war culture that began with the war in 1918 was captured by the literally writer Gabrielle d Annunzio who was never disenchanted by the war. He simply approached the wars as a period in human history and development.

The war had a major effect on the elite literally mindset of the British people probably due to the high level of civilization and orderliness of the country at that time. Militarism was not institutionalized in Britain as it was in other Nations especially Germany.

The second world war spurred the biggest literally change in Britain a phenomenon the world war one failed to produce. Fussell expertly brings out the major symbols and themes in British War literature arising from the world war one.

The expertise of Paul Fussell in literally writing is illustrated on the way he draws his story from many sources while at the same time masterfully developing his book from chapter to chapter. His chapters have a story to tell and he does this superbly with his sources.

In the chapter, ‘adversary proceedings’ he writes Siegfried Sassoon autobiography while at the same time bringing out the ‘enemy’ and the mindsets of the British men fighting in the war. In the chapter on ‘myth, ritual, and romance’, he uses David Jones and uses other writers expertly. They continue to influence the present cultures perception of war to date.

The book does not justify the Great War and finally one wonders if the war was necessary, this is brought about by the disillusionment and lack of purpose in the soldiers. The book illustrates the cultural change war brings and the way war can change a nations beliefs and ideals. Ideally, it warns against rushing to war without really having a worthy cause.

Works Cited Fussell, Paul. The Great War and Modern Memory. New York: Oxford University Press, 1975. Print


Pilot’s mission in flying jet aircraft and spacecraft Essay college admission essay help

Abstract The impact of pilot’s mission in flying jet aircraft and space aircraft since 1945 is one that cannot be ignored. Since the inception of space program in mid 20th century, pilots have been an integral part of space exploration programs in US and Europe.

This is demonstrated by the Project Mercury space program and it’s over-reliant on military test pilot as part of the mission.

The technical skills possessed by these pilots and their ability to fly sophisticated aircrafts both in space exploration missions and air combat has evolved since 1945 and undoubtedly continuous to play critical role in the modern age of space programs and air combat missions.

Compare and contrast Pilot’s mission in flying jet aircraft and space aircraft and how it has evolved since 1945

The civil aviation industry has constantly been making progress since the inception of commercial air travel in Florida in the early 20th century. Moreover, all divisions of aeronautical sciences and technology have recorded a magnificent evolution to maintain this progress.

The major input by aerodynamics, propulsion, structures and avionics have also been invaluable to the civil aviation industry such that the human perception of space, time and lifestyle has been altered completely (Martinez-Val, 2007, p.32).

The discourse presented in this paper will therefore trace the evolution of civil aviation with a special focus on the role of pilot’s mission in flying jet aircraft and space aircraft since 1945.

The history of the United State’s spaceflight can be traced back to some 50 years ago when the Soviet Union landed Sputnik successfully in the space.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Soviet Union’s achievement compelled the Eisenhower government to initiate several space exploration programs to match and possibly, exceed the Soviet Union’s space technology.

For example, the Department of Defense provided additional resources to Wernher von Braun and his team to launch an American satellite in space. The deadline for launching the Army’s Explorer project was set on February 1st 1958, which was less than five months after the Sputnik mission.

Von Braun and his team went on to work on a crash program using a modified Jupiter C ballistic and successfully launched Explorer I in orbit on January 31, 1958 (Launius, 1995, p.355).

Later, the US Congress passed the National Aeronautic and Space Act (1958) that set up NASA which was mandated to carry out exploration on space for meaningful gain to all humankind (Launius, 1995, p.355).

The main component of NASA was derived from the previous Advisory Committee for Aeronautic that was made up of over 7000 workers and a yearly budget of over $ 90 million.

It later integrated a number of institutions such as the Jet Propulsion Laboratory, controlled by California Institute of Technology, Naval Research Laboratory in Maryland and some sections of the Army Ballistic Missile Agency in Alabama.

These structural changes were responsible for the enormous accomplishments in space exploration in early 1960s. Specifically, the Apollo Moon landing was a critical success in the United States’ spaceflight exploration and served as the benchmark for the country’s future space exploration programs (Launius, 1995, p.356).

We will write a custom Essay on Pilot’s mission in flying jet aircraft and spacecraft specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This viewpoint was aptly expressed by Richard Nixon after the Apollo II mission in July 1969 that the first lunar mission symbolized a major human achievement on earth since its inception (Launius, 1995, p.357). The discovery of novel technologies has significantly played a major role in pilot’s mission in flying jet aircraft and space aircraft.

After NASA was established in 1958, Robert R Gilruth, one of the foremost engineer in human space exploration program, was granted consent to work on Project Mercury. Under a presidential directive, NASA opted to train Mercury astronaut pilots that were selected from military service test pilot force.

These pilots were preferred due to their flying experience and other precious skills that NASA deemed important for its space mission. Test pilots possessed the ability to fly sophisticated aircrafts, identifying a problem, analyzing the source, and relaying it to the mechanics and engineers comprehensively.

Since military jet test pilots were highly disciplined, they would enable NASA to select a team of pilots who were extremely inspired and in possession of technical abilities needed in Project Mercury (Launius, 2005, p.1).

Moreover, given that majorly of the NASA staff in Project Mercury was derived from aeronautical research field, it made it easier for the agency to adopt test pilots in the project since they knew them well from their past encounters.

Thus, after a meticulous set of mental and physical examinations, including medical evaluations at the Lovelace Clinic in New Mexico, a team of six astronauts were finally selected for Project Mercury and disclosed in April 9th 1959.

These astronauts were: from the Air force, Capt. Virgil Grissom, Capt. Gordon Cooper and Capt. Slayton Donald; from the US Navy, Lt. Scott Carpenter, Lt. Cdr. Walter Schirra and Lt. Cdr. Alan Sheppard.

The main of the project was to establish if humans could endure the rigidity of takeoff and orbit in the ruthless environment of space (Launius, 2005, p.3).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Pilot’s mission in flying jet aircraft and spacecraft by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The Mercury Seven astronauts were thus vital to the success of NASA’s future space exploration programs.

Since 1945, the account of aviation as from1945 has basically been characterized by the amalgamation of electronic technology and aeronautic advancement that was initially witnessed in electronic air combat in Europe.

From the more sophisticated night fighters planes combined with primal control and command nets, the world has experienced rapid technological advancement in aviation industry that has led to the development of jet aircrafts and space aircraft with modern navigation systems (Hallion, 2000, p.11).

Two major historical incidents contributed to these developments. To begin with, the nuclear face-off between the United States and the Soviet Union required unrivaled capacity to trace, track, and destroy enemy targets with precision and speed.

This was best epitomized by the US SAGE air defense system in 1950 and its combination with the F-101, F-106, F-102 and the Century series interceptors.

The use of systems technology for air to surface assault was the next phase, shown by the F-IIIA and A-6A, the first of smart aircrafts (Hallion, 2000, p.12).

The second phenomenon was the emergence of the United State’s space program that led to significant achievements in electronic flight control expertise.

Fly-by wire was a novel revolution of its kind. Given the need for high-speed flight, after 1945, the flight control technology gradually laid emphasis on hydro-mechanical structures sustained by emerging augmentation mechanisms.

It is worth to note that previous models of supersonic jet aircraft such as the F-4, the F-100 and the F-105 had periodic but serious handling traits and critical stability and control features that rendered them susceptible to enemy attack.

For example, hydraulic failures as a result of leakages could make them unmanageable by pilots in matters of seconds. This led to the inception of ‘fly by wire’ technology demonstrator and later, the development of F-6, the earliest fly-by wire military aircraft (Hallion, 2000, p.12).

The ability to make use of computer control flights and combining that capability with new patterns in aircraft design since 1980s has contributed immensely to the development of new types of aircrafts that possess incredible agility (such as the X-29 and X-31), low visibilities (B-2 and F-117 stealth fighter) or an amalgamation of these with system abilities, mainly with computer- run engine performance -examples include X-32 and X-35 Joint strike Fighter concept demonstrators and the current stealthF-22 Raptor- and system capacities.

The utilization of these abilities with new models of operation has contributed to extraordinary echelons of competence for aerospace power protrusion in air combat missions (Hallion, 2000, p.13).

For example, during the Second World War, the United States used more than 100 B-17s, delivering over 640 bombs to obliterate one German power plant. On the contrary, it took only one jet aircraft, delivering a single bomb to destroy power plant in the Gulf War.

Thus, the technological advancement in the aviation industry has led to the development of jet aircrafts with the ability to deliver payload with a high precision, from an average CEP of 3,100 ft for B-17 jet aircraft to less than nine feet for a laser guided missile.

Moreover, stealth technology proved to be valuable for future combat missions. For example, on a single attack against Shiba airfield, in Iraq, eight combat aircrafts (four Saudi Tornadoes and a similar number of A-6Es) were monitored by three drones, four F/A-18sused in combat air patrol, four F-4G Wild Weasels, and over 16 F/A-18 Harm antiradar missile shooters.

Meanwhile, the 21 F-117s attacked automatically over 39 greatly shielded aim-points all by themselves. Also, seven F-117 fighter jet aircraft could hit 16 different targets, guided by auto-pilots (Hallion, 2000, p.39).

Thus, the advent of stealth technology and use of drone planes to deliver payloads greatly reduced the number of pilots used in combat mission.

The modern age is dominated by the relationship between intelligence, surveillance and reconnaissance equipments with high precision combat systems.

The successes achieved in military air combat over years, especially since the Gulf War undoubtedly demonstrate that the world has entered an age where the ground military combat is now heavily dependent and guided by intelligence gathered by pilots above the surface (Hallion, 2000, p.42).

Consequently, the role of pilots in flying jet aircraft and space aircraft since 1945 has immensely contributed to the major achievement witnessed in military combat and space exploration programs.

References Hallion, RP. (2000). A short History of Aircraft Survivability. California: National Defense Industrial Association.

Launius, RD. (2005). Heroes in a Vacuum: The Apollo Astronaut as Cultural Icon. AIAA Aerospace Sciences Meeting and Exhibit, 702, 1-12.

Launius, RD. (1995). American Spaceflight History’s Master Narrative and the Meaning of Memory. Journal of Monnon History, 21,353-387.

Martinez-Val, R. (2007). Flying Wings. A New Paradigm for Civil Aviation. Acta Polytechnica, 47, 32- 43.


The Play ‘Electricidad’ and Its Physical, Vocal and Spatial Presentation Essay best essay help: best essay help

Introduction Public speaking involves speaking before a group of people. It is a structured process that has a deliberate intention of entertaining, influencing or informing the listeners. It is almost similar to presentation, normally done in business meetings.

People involved in public speaking are leaders and highly influential people such as politicians, religious leaders, and entertainers. Public speaking has fundamental elements just like any other form of communication.

These elements can either help or hinder the overall production of one’s presentation and they include: physical, vocal and spatial presentations. This paper is a response paper that discusses how the actors in the play ‘Electricidad’ perform public speech. It focuses on 3 of the actors and evaluates these actors’ physical, vocal and spatial presentation.

Nino the young Choro, has been sent by the father to be trained to be a Choro. The young boy seems to be very weak during the training session in the first scene. He finds the training so hard and he is unable to withstand it.

He is supposed to be trained and then go back to Vegas for a Choro title march. Young Choro has been in training for six months with his trainer but still displays weakness. Though his physical presentation is weak, he has good vocal presentation because he is very audible and confident even though he is made to repeat and explain a word he did not pronounce clearly.

He maintains a conversation with his trainer and asks him several questions. He even goes ahead to narrate how he became inspired by a small light bulb back in his home. He has good stage movement that brings out the emotions in his words coupled with good tonal variation.

The other character in the play is Young Nino’s trainer. He displays good presentation skills in the play. He is relaxed in the whole play and has a good sense of humor. He makes the audience laugh on several occasions. His vocal presentation is great because he is very audible and he pronounces the words quite clearly.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He also knows how to begin a conversation with a lady in the traditional Latino way. His humor is good at keeping the audience attentive at all times since they will be anxious to watch the scenes that he appears in.

Though he mixes Spanish and English in the play, the overall outcome is very exciting even for non Spanish speakers. The last and final actor in the play is a lady who comes from the same place as the trainer of young Choro. Her physical presentation is good as she uses appealing language to woo the trainer into her house. She is very confident even in responding to a perceived stranger who wants to hit on her.

In conclusion we see that overall production of the play as good because of the confidences and wonderful stage presentation of these characters. When these elements of public speaking are not displayed well in a presentation then, then the person giving the speech will not win the ears of the audience.

The audience’s concentration needs to be sustained at all times. To assist in enhancing the skill of public speaking, one needs to undergo training. Training is good because it enable one to get familiar with the stage and hence builds the necessary confidence required to make a good public speaker. It is hard for one to run away from this form of communication for it is applied almost everywhere.

Work Cited Electricidad. By Luis Alfaro. Dir. Luis Alfaro. The Greeks, California. 2000.


Critical Cultural Theory Essay college essay help online

Table of Contents Shaping culture

Consumption and culture

The corporate culture



Jean Baudrillard commences his work on “simulacra and Simulation” by falsely attributing the quote, “The simulacrum is never which conceals the truth-it is the truth which conceals that there is none; the simulacrum is true,” to the book of Ecclesiastes in the Bible (Baudrillard, 1988, p. 166).

Explaining why he commenced his work on a ‘lie’, Baudrillard explained that unlike what most believe, the bible is exhaustible since people cannot find everything they need or want in it (Baudrillard


Employee Empowerment Problem at the Workplace Problem Solution Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Introduction It is necessary that employees be empowered in their places of work. While there are varying methods in achieving such empowerments, the reasons behind any approach used by employer must be made known to the employer, in order to for employees to reach sound decisions individually. When this is achieved with the right measures and intentions, it will results in increased productivity and satisfaction among the employees.

The hotel industry continues to experience high attrition rates, which are set to double in the next few years. Therefore, employers are actively seeking ways through which they can make their staff stay; one such method is through empowerment, so that they can perform hospitality services with personal discipline.

This paper shall discuss the concept of employee empowerment in the hospitality industry and examine the extent to which it contributes to job enrichment and satisfaction among employees. We shall look at contemporary trends in empowering employees in the industry, issues affecting the empowerment process, and the benefits of employee empowerment. We shall see that the empowering employees supersede the shortcomings of the process.

Findings and analysis Employee Empowerment

This is the process of enabling employees to work and make decisions individually. The employee is able to control and take responsibility of the outcome of a given task without stringent supervision from management.

Employee empowerment requires management to give up some of its powers to the employees. Management will, therefore, have to take up new responsibilities, roles, and knowledge that were previously left for employees. This, however, does not mean that management will have to relinquish all its authority, delegate all the process of decision making, or let employees work without accountability or supervision.

Conversely, empowerment provides for the chance to build mutual trust and cooperation between management and employees. The two develop a concise agreement about the roles and responsibilities that each has to perform, and through trust, one is led to perform the tasks independently (Blanchard, Carlos


Hotel maintenance system Report essay help online free: essay help online free

Table of Contents Introduction

Types of maintenance

People involved and time schedule

Employees, guests and corporate purposes

Cost accounts

Future renovation projects

Environment and the economy


Introduction The maintenance system under consideration will consist of various types of repairs. Some will be routine, others will preventive while others will be scheduled. In case of an emergency or breakdown then maintenance will still be necessary.

This system will consist of the staff needed to carry out maintenance and it will outline their respective schedules. It will also specify materials and equipment needed in order to carry them out and the criteria used to make those choices. Cost accounts, environmental concerns as well as future renovation projects will also be part of this system.

Types of maintenance Leysin hotel will carry out scheduled maintenance as part of its general maintenance system. This will consist of all those repair and maintenance works that require long periods of time. It will involve immense planning of all tools and staff needed as such kinds of maintenance are interdisciplinary.

A typical example would be erecting a wall or getting rid of a ceiling and replacing it. The hotel will also need to prevent occurrence of certain dangers by carrying out preventive maintenance.

Here, the company will inspect and identify areas within the premises that require simple adjustments. The major aim of carrying this out will be to ensure that all hotel equipment lasts longer such that the company reaps maximum benefits from it.

This maintenance system will also involve room maintenance. In that process, staff will inspect guest rooms, identify and report potential problems. These deficiencies will then be corrected according to a time schedule. Normally, reports should be made during peak times such that the hotel can purchase all necessary material for the repairs.

Those activities ought to be carried out during the off peak season so as to minimise guest interruptions. Usually, room attendants are in charge of these activities. Despite all the care that the hotel can exercise, there may still be a possibility of a breakdown.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Some equipment can breakdown without detection and the firm needs to act quickly in order to correct this. It should then take note and keep watching those things that easily breakdown so as to prevent future incidences. Leysin will set some money aside for this purpose so as to ensure that they can be accountable for future challenges.

People involved and time schedule An administrative assistant will be crucial in this maintenance system because he will be responsible for keeping records about repairs that have been detected. He will also order the parts that are needed in the repair after liaising with other members of the team. The administrative assistance will also be in charge of repair inventory and will deal with payroll for contracted maintenance experts.

The maintenance system will consist of a shift engineer. Such a person will be at the beck and call of the hotel as he will respond to the repair alerts made by housekeeping, guests or any other staff member at Leysin. Usually, these may occur on a daily basis.

However, there could be other scheduled ones that are not as urgent and maybe scheduled. There will also be general engineers who will be coming into the organisation from time to time in order to work on long repair and maintenance projects.

These individuals will be contracted from time to time. The system will also possess electricians who will be hired when they are needed. It will be essential to work with one or two key people who already understand the electrical system in the hotel.

Also, this team will be composed of a series of generalists who are proficient in some mechanical work, carpentry and plumbing. Such kinds of people are less expensive than specialists. Specialists may cost the company a lot of money yet they can only respond to a few challenges in their line of specialisation (Hirsh, 1995).

Housekeeping will also be a vital part of this system because if it was not for them, Leysin Hotel would not be clean or attractive. These individuals will play a vital role in ensuring that guests are comfortable and that everything is as expected. Here, they will carry out tasks such as turning the heating and lighting systems on and off, taking care of the kitchen equipment and many others.

We will write a custom Report on Hotel maintenance system specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In terms of time schedule, it will be imperative to carry out any regular maintenance in the afternoons. These activities need to be done on a need-to basis. On the other hand, scheduled maintenance will need to be done during the off peak season. Sometimes this can last for as long as three months so it should start as soon as that season begins.

Seamlessness will need to be the major goal in these operations. Afternoons were selected because most guests come back to their rooms in the evening hours.

Employees, guests and corporate purposes Maintenance in this hotel will be imperative in order to ensure that facilities and equipment stay in their ideal state. Future breakdowns are either detected or prevented due to this. Essentially, it serves a crucial role for guests because it ensures that no service hitches occur.

It would be a pity if a guest tried to turn on the taps only to find no water or if he wanted to get his laundry done, he found that the machines are ruined. Such scenarios can tarnish Leysin’s name and destroy potential business in the future. Consequently, the company needs to know whether its facilities are in order so that it can serve the needs of consumers (Grattan, 1999).

Maintenance would also be quite useful for employees and the corporation. When Leysin is well maintained then chances are that employees can carry out each of their respective duties without having to worry about breakdowns.

They can also be protected from possible physical harm that would emanate from poorly maintained buildings. The company will be the greatest beneficiary in this maintenance system because it will get to save costs, it will operate in an environmentally efficient manner, provide high quality services to consumers and increase returns because of satisfied consumers.

Cost accounts Cost Annual Amount (pounds) Hiring generalists and engineers 400,000 Permanent maintenance staff 1,000, 000 Equipment and materials for breakdowns 2,000,000 Temporary labour 100,000 Renovations(inclusive of material costs) 1,000,000 Breakdowns 500,000 (Henderson


Manga and Anime Influence on Japanese Women Essay college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Manga and anime influence on Japanese women



Introduction Manga means comics in Japan. Anime refers to animated characters. The presentation of anime in manga literature and displays is a motivator of actions in individuals’ behaviors in the world today. The proliferation of this literature has been witnessed due to the increase in technology, and the development of information minded economies. The manga for women is varied in terms of girls and older females. The concern of girls’ manga, also known as Shoja manga, concentrates on relationship, romance and sex.

The Shoja manga is more fantastic and less realistic than the adult women manga that gives more realistic and sometimes brutal honesty on romance and sex. The adult anime and manga for women deals with issues of women at work or in offices, marriage, family sagas, and in-laws.

The writers of the manga, known as manga-ka for adult women, have a tendency to explore the dark, exotic sexual territories. This paper will look at the role that manga and anime has on Japanese women in society. The manga meant for adult women is known Josei Manga (Brenner, 2007).

Manga and anime influence on Japanese women According to Brenner (2007), the gender reading of manga literature is blurred since at a number of times girls are found to read Shonen manga. For adult men, there is also a tendency to read Shoja manga, although this is only in America. The difference between American and Japanese manga lies in the interpretation of various words and views due to different cultures. However, in Japan, manga has influence on women gender roles in society. Manga and anime’s use of the word picture combinations has a recapitulation of traditional Japan.

The turn of 1970s heralded the influx of women manga-ka who felt that the men oriented Shoja manga lacked the sentimentality needed and expressed by a female audience. This process led to about 400 creative women. Therefore, it signaled the challenge of patriarchal point of view in the Japanese society. Gravett (2004) observes that manga provided the most powerful and female empowering forum for communication.

The plight of women deteriorated during the Mejji era where women were considered of lower class than men. At this age, imperialism and militarism eroded egalitarian ideals of the traditional Japanese wife, daughter, and mother. Resonating in other countries like America, the society has come to recognize and change the injustices against women. Japanese women started to change the differences between women and men as illustrated by Murasaki Shikibu.

Therefore, this strength found echoes in these women who had become scripter of what the woman felt and thought about the world. Thus, the panel took the form of the heart emotions and displayed by either fading or withering flowers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This was meant to softened rules on borders, as well as overlapped or merged sequences into collages (Gravett, 2004). They used expressions on faces to communicate feelings and thoughts that ranged from fear, terror to confusion, and intoxication also reigned with a hand stroke of the creative women manga-kas.

The creation of what the female world looked and saw things in manga from these women used a plethora expressionistic effects and textures. This emphasized on facial and body posture that geared to capture the characters psychic auras.

In the end, artwork emphasis would disappear in place of dialogue balloons. This led to connection with the reader emotionally and thus Japanese manga-ka stood a chance to focus on genres like science fiction, exploration, social problems, and the issues surrounding women.

The presentation of gender boundaries and forbidden love were some of the early hits of manga-kas. For instance, Riyoko Ikeda was a mangaka whose work, “The Rose of Versailles” in 1972 set the ball rolling towards this important form of art. In this manga, two women are depicted loosing their true feelings for the sake of duty at the height of French Revolution. One lady, Queen Marie-Antoinette, is married to a Crown Prince since childhood and longs for a Swedish count.

The second girl is raised as a nobleman in order to satisfy her father’s need and wishes for a son. Oscar becomes Captain of the Royal Guard. However, she later resigned in order to follow her love, Andre, who is below her in terms of positions in the society. She joins in a battle and dies stressing the importance of women being free from the trappings of feminist.

In the same manga, the relationship between Andre and Oscar, disguised as a male character, explains the idea of women’s view on men. To a great extent, it illustrates that women are interested in love that is pure as represented by beautiful boys depicted in the manga.

The manga are consistently read by females, especially those who view themselves as related in a sister form of relationship. The presentation of aesthetic homosexual figures of manga boys presented the search for love in women who became apparent and ardent readers. Many women mangakas illustrate beautiful symbols that show that the examination of identity and self acceptance, personal fulfillment families, ageing and dying are the main concerns.

We will write a custom Essay on Manga and Anime Influence on Japanese Women specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In the absence of love, manga reveals situations that young girls would take in various activities like bullying, depression, lesbian attraction, self harming, parental abuse and divorce, and pupil teacher scandals, suicide attempts, and conspiracies to blow up things. The effect of these Shojo manga as revealed in the study by Gravett (2004) that indicated that issues demonstrated by manga found resonance in the actions of women in society.

A female proclaimed that her departure from Japan to London was encouraged by Shojo manga by mangaka Moto Hagio and others. This mangaka had illustrated that people who were brave would chart new courses alone and survive successfully on successive repetitions.

The role of Shojo manga and anime to the Japanese women in the society probably is strongly illustrated by analysis of their influence to contemporary style of women’s writing. Shojo manga had an influence on the novels ‘Cobalt Series’ that can be compared to harlequin romance. Nonetheless, it was written by a man whose theme focused on teenage pregnancies.

The teenage girls were advised through the moral lesson to avoid such pregnancies in order to live life fully. However, the start of the 1970s saw the entry of women writers who composed their work in first person, just as was the case with the anime that got their material from manga.

The use of direct speech in both genres of manga and writing represented the real, lifelike verbal communication. The considerable use of onomatopoeia played a crucial role in representing the adult’s daily use of language to pass emotions and messages that mattered to them.

This was essentially true by comparing men’s writing that never indicated the use of first person. Nevertheless, the men writing made use of a third person, less of use onomatopoeia, and use of difficult to tread appearances that were not meant to create a personal relationship with the reader (Homem


Learning Outcomes Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Teaching is one of the most interesting professions because it enables teachers to be able to evaluate their performance in class. This essentially leads to the analysis of the teaching objectives which have been set. Learning outcomes are statements of desired outcomes of learning expressed in terms that make it clear how measurements can be achieved.

As such, they act as a logical basis for measuring and reporting on the students’ achievements (Melton, 1997). In particular, they focus attention on what is to be learnt.

Bearing in mind that learning outcomes are a form of the referenced objectives, it follows that they may derive from, and be identified by the type of strategies for objectives and competences that have already been described.It is therefore important for the teacher to be as specific as possible when they are assigning the learning objectives in order to be able to achieve the desired outcomes at the end of the lesson (Melton, 1997).

Learning outcomes should have certain characteristics for one to be effective (Kubiszyn


Placing People Where They Belong Research Paper essay help free

The Peculiarities of HRM Recruitment Methods Dealing with the issue of hiring employees is one of the most crucial aspects of any company’s work, since the further development of the company depends on the careful choice of the workforce (Abdullah, 2009).

However, despite the efficient and quite successful scheme of sorting the employees in the workplace according to certain principles has proved quite successful new methods of recruitment strategies emerge and the new ways of convincing people to work in the given sphere, allowing the former to perfect their skills and indulge into the favorite task emerge.

Therefore, the current HRM strategies are to be analyzed to find out which of these proves to be the most effective and is likely to develop further on.

It must be kept in mind that with the advent of the new technologies and the Internet, the process of staff recruitment has become both simpler and more versatile, allowing the HR managerial to broaden the horizons of the recruitment procedure. However, it is worth marking that the old, time-tested means of choosing staff still prove quite popular.

Therefore, the old and the emerging means of recruitment are to be analyzed as well. Implying “successful recruitment begins with proper employment planning and forecasting” (Richardson, 2000, p. 3), the existing kinds of staff recruitment are to be considered in the given paper.

Direct Mailing: Acting in a Straightforward Fashion One of the most obvious ways to recruit a new employee must be the establishment of a direct contact with the latter, which one of the key recruitment techniques presupposes. It must be admitted that electronic mail has broadened the possibilities of the given strategy (Othman


Compare and contrast a spiritual and an educational feminist Essay writing essay help

Over the years, various women movements have arisen to campaign for the conferment of equal rights for both men and women. The first women movement had the chief intention of campaigning for suffrage rights. Since then, other movements came into being seeking to accord women economic, social and educational rights tantamount to those available to men.

In this context, those people who believe in equality in human rights, both men and women are referred to as feminists. Consequently, feminism entails all the movements established with the intention of campaigning for equality in economic and social equality rights coupled with the creation of equal opportunities for both genders.

Feminists “oppose anything that is detrimental to the societal growth of women. With regard to Bart, “a feminist speaks or writes against sexual harassment, sexual assault and domestic violence” (538). A Feminist is, therefore, in the simplest terms that person who believes in gender equality.

From this end, the writer’s personal definition of feminism may suffer some detriments perhaps following the need to include aspects such as writing and acting coupled with other issues relating to women rights including injustices and social status quo in a single definition.

Perhaps attempting to consider the a historical era and momentous events that brought into being the concepts of feminism takes people suffrage endeavors in early 1930’sAmerica. Suffrage refers to women’s rights in voting.

However, according to Krolokke and Sorensen, “the expression is also used for the economic and political reform movements aimed at extending rights to women and without any restrictions or qualifications such as property ownership, payment of tax or material status” (10).

Through feminists efforts, by 1960’s, women had acquired some voting rights in Sweden, the United States, and Britain. Success in fighting for suffrage evidently marked the onset of other feminist’s movements and the emergence of feminist thinkers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The modern feminists movements emerged depending on the existence of certain issues that tend to disfavor women. One may view modern feminism may as comprising of three waves. The first wave “refers to the movement of the nineteenth century all the way to the twentieth century, which dealt mainly with suffrage, working conditions and educational rights for women and girls” (Humm 251).

The second wave predominantly focused on issues relating to persisting inequalities in law culture, and advocating for roles of women in the society that undermine both their integrity and position in society. This movement lasted between 1960 to early 1980’s. The third wave took up soon after the end of the second wave. It sought to address perceived failures of the second wave along side with continuation of the achievements of the second wave.

Educational feminists campaign for women rights from all contexts in the society right from economic to social perspectives. Religious feminists look at religion from women perspectives. As Stone reckons, religious feminism is a “field that studies the scriptures and religious texts from a feminist perspective” (40).

Consequently, religious feminism focus on the interrelationship of scriptures massage with customs, practices, theologies and traditions from the perspectives that guarantee equality to all genders. One of the areas of focus of the religious feminism is perhaps the dominance of men clergies in various religions.

Religious feminists attempt to increase the various roles assumed by women in religious institutions. Belenky and Goldberger posit that, “feminist speaks also about the images of women in various established religious sacred texts” (80). In this regard, the functions of the religious feminists may be argued as predominantly inclined in the need to ensure equal presentation of women in all position of the religious leadership as their counterparts-men.

On the other hand, educational feminism theorists argue, “the educational structures are flawed in their overemphasis on progress as the highest value and the competition to attain it” (De Vaney 568). Additionally, educational feminists argue that overemphasis on quality, with the belief that men are more capable to deliver it as compared to women, serves to marginalize women, and minority groups.

According to Hart, the systems that are engineered with hierarchical structures need to be altered to promote “equal valuing of knowledge, human intelligence, critical thinking, and creativity” (98). Furthermore, opposed to religious feminists, educational feminists show much concern on issues of marginalization of women in work places, and even in educational institutions settings.

We will write a custom Essay on Compare and contrast a spiritual and an educational feminist specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Adding on this, Martin et al. argues, “Feminist pedagogies have developed, in response to feminist, claims that classrooms are patriarchal, competitive, and hierarchical” (Para.10).

Educators of feminists, consequently, emphasize that people need to gear the key concerns of education need towards fostering social activities, which predominately ensure cute integration of collaboration learning projects, as opposed to individualistic activities, which only enhance divisions and competitions in schools.

Additionally, educational feminists go to the extent of performing studies that seek to show that, given opportunities, women can perform equally or even better than men in tasks that have stereotypically perceived as districts of men. Huff and Cooper conducted one of such studies in 1987.

In this study, Huff and Cooper sought to address issues pertaining to design of software among educators that could enable students use commas without errors. When female educators were put to task to write the software, there was no difference between the software written by them and boys.

Consequently, Huff and cooper deduced that “student programs are the most game-like, boy programs are in the middle and girls programs are on the ‘learning tool’ side of the function” (529). They express concern that the educators “may have been simply using ‘male’ as the default value of ‘student’” (Huff and Cooper 529).

Arguably, this research indicates the concerns of educational feminists in campaigning for incorporation of women in information technology since they have equal chances of excelling as men. Thus, it may be substantial to make an assumption that, if educational feminists views are things to go by, perhaps the next software developer which will revolution the world’s current software market will have a woman name behind it.

According to the definition of feminism given by the author, various limitations and acts of resistance while not negating some strengths are worthwhile for consideration. According to the author, feminism infers putting women into perspectives in all societal activities including politics, economic sectors and more importantly equal rights for access of education for both girl and boy child.

Concerning the definition, society, especially modern society, that seeks to prosper in all pillars that anchor it, cannot perhaps achieve its developmental goals without proactive interplay of all genders. Additionally, a more balanced society in terms of universalism of roles allocation is perhaps only to be born only when all potentials are tapped among women and men collectively.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Compare and contrast a spiritual and an educational feminist by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Adequate scholarly evidence is available showing that men and women can perform equally in all sectors of economy (Oram 5). All that people desire is the creation of opportunities for women to compete freely with men. This is the aim of the endeavors of feminism activities, as implied by the definition adopted by the author.

While this gives the definition adopted by the author some strength, some limitation may perhaps also be evident. For instance, while feminist’s endeavors to accord women equal opportunities for women and men, to some extent critics concur that not all jobs can be equally accessible to both men and women. For instance psychologically women have been found to be well talented with oratory skills as opposed men and hence well suited for jobs such receptionists and secretarial.

Conclusively, the paper finds it subtle to uphold the spirit of feminism. Feminism, as people discuss it, is a phenomenon that came into dominance in the early 1930 when women movements were seeking to secure suffrage rights.

Though initially headed by women only, the calls for these movements attracted even men. Consequently, the word feminist was coined to refer to all people (of both genders) that support equality for women. The movement seeking the suffrage rights for women formed the first wave of the feminism movements, which lasted until 1960’s.

Subsequent waves extended the fights for women rights in other areas: something that gives rise to various forms of feminisms among them religious feminism, cultural feminism, educational feminism among others. However, two of these types of feminism have been given a detailed introspection in this paper: religious and educational feminism.

Works Cited Bart, Pauline. Feminism Unmodified. The American Journal of Sociology 95.2(1989): 538-539.

Belenky, Clinchy, and Tarule Goldberger. Women’s Ways of Knowing. New Jersey: Basic Books, 1986. Print.

De Vaney, Arthur. Will Educators ever unmask that determiner, technology? Educational Policy 12.5(1998): 568-585.

Hart, Martin. Working and educating for life: Feminist and international perspectives on adult education. New York: Routledge, 1992. Print.

Huff, Curtin, and John Cooper. Sex bias in educational software: The effect of designers’ stereotypes on the software they design. Journal of Applied Social Psychology 17.6 (1987): 519-532.

Humm, Maggie. The Dictionary of Feminist Theory. Columbus: Ohio State University Press, 1995. Print.

Krolokke, Charlotte, and Anne Sorensen. From Suffragettes to Grrls in Gender Communication Theories and Analyses: From Silence to Performance. New York: Sage, 2005. Print.

Martin, Donna, Linda Lucek and Sylvia Fuentes. Issues of Feminism and Multicultural Educational Technology, 2010. Web.

Oram, Alison. Women Teachers and Feminist Politics, 1900-1939. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1996. Print.

Stone, Lynda. The Education Feminism Reader. New York: Routledge, 1994. Print.


Ethnozoology as a Fundamental Field of Study Essay best essay help: best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Importance of Respect

Taboos and Animals

Restrictions on Roles of Women



Introduction Ethnozoology is the scientific study of the relationships between animals and various ethnicities across the world. Ethnozoology is a fundamental field of study because it enhances understanding of indigenous cultures that rely on hunting and gathering as their dominant economic activity.

Ethnozoologists study relationships between animals and varied ethnicities so that they can elucidate the cultural importance of animals. Among indigenous communities, animals play a significant role in cultures because they do not only have economic value, but also cultural value in terms of shaping traditions, beliefs, and taboos of people.

Ethnical communities such as Gwich’in, Seri Indians, Koyukon, and Sebei attach their cultural traditions, beliefs, and taboos to animals. The Gwich’in is an indigenous community that lives in Alaska, while Seri Indians are indigenous community that lives in Sonora, Mexico.

The Koyukon is an indigenous community that lives in northern Alaska, while the Sebei is an indigenous community that lives in eastern Uganda around the slopes of Mount Elgon. Since the four indigenous ethnicities rely on animals in their social, economic, and cultural aspects, ethnozoology is essential in understanding their traditions, beliefs, and taboos.

Hence, ethnozoology of different ethnicities indicates that, respect given to animals is central in the formulation of taboos relating to interaction with animals and restriction of women’s roles.

Importance of Respect The Gwich’in is an indigenous community that occupies northeastern part of Alaska in North America. The Gwich’in has lived in Alaska since time immemorial while practicing their subsistence form of lives for many years.

Due to their subsistence way of life, the Gwich’in highly respects their environment because it provides them with food that has continually helped them for many years. Specifically, the Gwich’in relies on Porcupine caribou in production of food, source of livelihood, basis of religion and foundation of respect in a community.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Herd of Porcupine caribou lives in Coastal Plain where the Gwich’in believes to be a sacred place where life originates. For many years, the Gwich’in has been relying on the herd of Porcupine caribou, as they are animals that are critical for their existence and culture, as well.

The Gwich’in believes that, the existence of Porcupine caribou herd is same as their existence, because they do not only depend on the animals as food, but they also respect them as the source of their culture. Inoue (2004) argues that, Gwich’in rejected preposition to change Coastal Plain into mining ground for oil because it would cause extinction of Porcupine caribou and consequently damage their culture (p.183).

Apart from Porcupine of caribou, the Gwich’in also survive by hunting animals such as snowshoe hare, moose, muskrat, lynx and wolverine amongst other wild animals that they highly regard as the source of their livelihood.

The Seri Indians are indigenous community that resides in Sonora, Mexico. The Seri Indians live subsistence lives where they hunt reptiles, birds, fishes, and mammals for survival. They highly respect animals as part of their lives because they profoundly depend on them as the source of food as well as cultural importance.

The Seri Indians hunt green turtle for both substance and commercial purposes during the winter and summer because they have various tactics of hunting. The turtles provide oil for cooking and their skin is the source of genuine leather for making sandals.

Other reptiles that Seri Indians hunt are tortoise, snakes, and lizards. The Seri Indians also hunt different types of birds such as gulls, pelicans, waterfowl, owl, heron, and yellowlegs. They feed on birds and use their feathers as decorations or making arrows that they use in hunting.

In addition to hunting reptiles and birds, the Seri Indians also hunt mammals such as mule deer, antelope, coyote, and pronghorn amongst other mammals that are available in their environment. Fleger and Moser (1995) state that, mule deer provides the main source of food, and has cultural significance to Seri culture (p.51).

We will write a custom Essay on Ethnozoology as a Fundamental Field of Study specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Thus, they have many strategies of hunting that include tracking, luring, creeping and by using dogs without trapping them. Hence, it is quite evident that Seri Indians immensely respect wild animals.

The Koyukon is an indigenous community that lives in northern parts of Alaska. The Koyukon community lives subsistence form of lifestyle of hunting and gathering. The Koyukon community respects flora and fauna because they provide them with food and have cultural significance.

Hunting lifestyle of this community is more than satisfying economic needs of subsistence because the Koyukon have ritualized hunting and its related practices. The Koyukon community takes hunting as both cultural and economic activity that they do in their subsistence form of lifestyle.

Since hunting is the main economic activity, which suffices subsistence lifestyles, the Koyukon believe that, flora and fauna are the source of their lives; hence, they jealously guard their forest in northern Alaska.

Since Koyukon respect animals, they have hunting ethics that prohibit them from setting traps so that porcupines can have freedom of wandering without endangering them. Nelson (1986) holds that, the Koyukon community has hunting ethics that protect animals from undue suffering because they respect animals (p.161). Hence, promote sustainable hunting because they show respect to animals through their ethical hunting and proper disposal of bones.

The Sebei are indigenous community that lives on slopes of Mount Elgon in the eastern part of Uganda. Economic activity of the Sebei is mainly keeping livestock. The Sebei believe that livestock such as goats, sheep, and cows are their inherent property, and thus they raid neighboring communities to obtain more animals.

According to myth, the Sebei community believes that spirits recognize livestock as community’s property, thus making the community use sheep, goats, and cows in offering sacrifices or appeasing their gods. Goldschmidt and Goldschmidt (1976) argue that, when one is sick, a diviner may advise a person to sacrifice an animal to the spirits (p.139).

Sacrifice is central to cultural beliefs and traditions because the Sebei keep large herds of livestock. Possession of livestock in not only a sign of richness but also acts a cultural pride. The Sebei respect their livestock because they look after them in grazing field by ensuring that they feed well.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Ethnozoology as a Fundamental Field of Study by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More They also help them in breeding by ensuring that a hybrid bull is available by castrating the rest. Thus, care that the Sebei give to their livestock indicates that they respect and value animals due to their economic and cultural significance.

Taboos and Animals The respect that the varied ethnical communities attach to animals results into various taboos. Since the Gwich’in are hunters, they greatly value hunting weapons for they prohibit women and children from touching them.

Thus, it is a taboo for women and children to touch bow and arrows because they will reduce the effectiveness of the weapons during hunting. Moreover, among the Gwich’in, Porcupine caribou is a sacred animal that portrays the existence of the community.

Since the Gwich’in mainly relies on Porcupine caribou, they recognize it as a sacred animal that is in the heart of every person and community. According to Inoue (2004), the Coastal Plain is a sacred field where life originates because it provides a calving ground where Porcupine caribou breeds (p.183).

Porcupine caribou does not only provide food, but also has physical, emotional, cultural, and spiritual importance to the community. Hence, since the Gwich’in value Porcupine caribou, they have set ethics that governs their hunting practices. For instance, it is a taboo for one to use traps in hunting because it disregards the sacred value they place on Porcupine caribou.

Although the Seri Indians hunt for reptiles, birds, and mammals, they do not eat all animals because of taboos. The Seri Indians eat turtles because they believe that they have substantial proteins and oil; however, it is a taboo to feed on their eggs.

Moreover, the Seri Indians do not feed on some snakes and lizards because of taboos that consider them dangerous even though they are not poisonous. According to Fleger and Moser (1995), the Seri Indians eat most of the birds that they capture except ravens, hawks, and vultures (p.50).

They believe that ravens, hawks, and vultures are birds that are not good because they spell misfortunes to hunters. Additionally, Fleger and Moser (1995) add that, Seri Indians do not eat dogs and coyotes because they believe them to have reincarnated from ancient people (p.53). Hence, taboos associated with certain animals determine whether they are edible or not among the Seri Indians.

The Koyukon have taboos and beliefs that guide their community in showing respect to nature, particularly the animals. The Koyukon taboos dictate who consume certain animals that they hunt. For instance, taboos dictate that women should not eat lynx or some forbidden parts of a bear.

Thus, when a man goes hunting, he should consider killing animals that women need as well as that men require. Violation of taboos by eating forbidden animals has serious consequences, which may include one being an outcast from society or denied specified food for the rest of his/her life.

Arundale and Jones (1989) argue that, since taboos forbid women from eating specified parts of bears, when men butcher bears, they keep their meat in the jungle for a longer period to reduce the spells associated with fresh meat (p.160).

Hence, forbidden animals require certain form of treatment during slaughter to avoid violation of taboos. For instance, since the Koyukon believe that fresh meat of forbidden animals is not good for women and children, men would slaughter lynx and bears in the bush and preserve them for a period of one week before bringing the meat home.

Moreover, the respect that the Koyukon community has for animals require that there should be proper disposal of bones according to beliefs of reincarnation or sacrifice. Poor disposal of bones is a taboo because it is like cursing the source of livelihood and disrespecting spirits that reincarnates.

The Sebei have a fantastic deal of taboos associated with their livestock. They believe that, livestock play a significant role in mediating between spirits (oyik) and humanity; hence, they use animal products in offering sacrifices.

For instance, when one is sick, they believe that the spirits are angry, and the only way to heal a person is through sacrifice of a goat, a sheep, or a bull to appease ancestors or spirits, otherwise failure to offer sacrifice is spiteful to spirits.

Traditions and taboos dictate the choice of sacrificial animals and ways of slaughtering them. For example, a medicine man can order a sick man to slaughter a bull at homestead during the evening and place pieces of meat together with bull’s skull in the kraal to appease spirits. According to Goldschmidt and Goldschmidt (1976), the Sebei smear chyme on initiates, path of mourners, and parents of twins to purify them and protect them from evil spirits.

Moreover, the Sebei use milk and fat in ceremonies to anoint and bless people. The Sebei also believe in reincarnation of people from one generation to another in that, spirits can turn one into an animal. Kawachi (2010) contends that, religious beliefs of the Sebei hold that, one can reincarnate according to the dictates of spirits (p.131). Thus, it is a taboo for one to go against traditions and taboos associated with offering of sacrifices to spirits.

Restrictions on Roles of Women The respect that varied ethnical communities have for animals has given rise to beliefs that have defined and restricted roles of women in community. While the Gwich’in men go hunting Porcupine caribou and other animals, women take care of children and do some farming as they await men to come home with meat.

In the Gwich’in community, lifestyle of hunting and gathering has restricted the roles of women to chores for they do not participate in hunting. Likewise, among the Seri Indians, men usually go into the sea where they hunt for turtles and catch fishes while women remain at home taking care of children and doing other chores.

Women cannot go into the sea and fish because it is full of dangerous animals like bears, whales, and sea lions. The Seri Indians believe that, men have the capacity to venture into deep seas while women have limited capacity, hence restricting their roles to activities within homes.

The Koyukon also have restricted roles that women play in their community. Traditions dictate that, women should not hunt nor slaughter animals because it is the responsibility of men. Arundale and Jones (1989) assert that, the Koyukon belief system restricts women from handling hunting equipment or overstepping their roles by slaughtering some animals (p.161).

Hence, taboos that prohibit women from eating certain animals also prevent them from performing certain activities that relate to hunting. In the Sebei, while the roles of men involve raiding and looking after livestock, the roles of women entail taking care of children and milking livestock.

Raiding and looking after livestock are dangerous activities that do not fit women because other raiders from neighboring communities can attack. Hence, warriors have the responsibility of looking after livestock and raiding other communities. In this view, keeping of livestock as the main economic activity of the Sebei restricts the roles of women in the community.

Conclusion Ethnozoology gives comprehensive understanding of culture from perspective animals associated with respective indigenous communities. Ethnozoology indicates that relationships that the Gwich’in, the Seri Indians, the Koyukon and the Sebei have with animals define cultural beliefs, values, and taboos.

Moreover, respect that different communities attach to animals determines how a given community defines roles of women. Hence, ethnozoology is critical in understanding cultural beliefs and taboos of indigenous communities.

References Arundale, W.,


The United Continental Holdings Essay college essay help

Before the merger with the United Airline, Continental airline was ranked as the fourth airline in the United States of America. The airline had hubs in Houston, Newark and Cleveland. The airline had well established networks globally and operated over 2,700 flights daily in over 240 destinations.

Some of its major destinations were in Europe, Northern, Central and Southern America as well as Asia. On the other hand, the United Airline was by then the third largest Airline in the United State of America. The airline had hubs in San Francisco, Denver, Los Angels and Washington DC. It operated more than 3, 300 flights daily to more than 230 destinations globally.

The merger of the United States of America third and fourth largest airlines the United Airlines and Continental airlines formed the United States largest Airline Corporation referred as the United Continental Holdings, Inc. The brand of the new entity is delivered from the brands of its mother brands.

The airline possesses the continental lively logo and colors with the United Airline name. The heard quarters of the United Continental Holdings, Inc is based in Chicago. The United Continental Holdings, Inc maintains a significant presence in Houston which is expected to be the airlines largest hub. That is the reason why the CEO of the entity opted to have its offices in both Houston and Chicago (Armin, 2010).

It is noted that there are strong incentives for airline consolidations. This is because the economies of scale and scope provide larger airlines with the competitive edge over smaller airlines. This is because airline mergers facilitate airlines to lower down their costs of operations.

Lower costs of operations enable the large airlines to offer their customers services at a discounted rate which enhances their demands greatly. Similarly, mergers of airlines have been known to reduce competitions and thus improve their market power especially on non-stop routes to and from hubs.

The merger between the Continental Airline and the United Airline was not expected to affect the routes they were serving. The resultant merger is expected to continue operating in all the routes that the two airlines were operating. The merger is likely to increase the performance of the resultant airline greatly.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The United Continental Holdings, Inc commands a 21% market share in the United States of the American air travel which makes it the largest airline in the United States of America ahead of the Delta Airline that commands a current market share of 20%.

This makes the airline to enjoy the advantage of the scale of economies by cutting down its costs of services which in turn increase its demand considerably. The merger between continental airline and united airline had greatly helped the two airlines to reduce airline competition in the U.S. greatly especially in those routes they initially competed.

Less competition will help the airline corporation to control the pricing of flight fares accordingly since customers do not have many alternatives. The merger is likely to see the customers paying more because the rationale for mergers is to reduce the capacity.

This involves cutting down the number of seats in the industry and thus increasing airline fares. The merger is likely to bring overlapping flights to 13 nonstop destinations including flights to and from Houston and Denver (Mouawad


Domestic Violence: Reason, Forms and Measures Essay essay help: essay help

Introduction Domestic or family violence involves abusive behavior patterns that individuals go through in an intimate relationship. Domestic violence takes place in families where parents may abuse their children or in marriages where one spouse abuses the other.

The term domestic violence is defined by American Medical Association Diagnostic and Treatment Guidelines on Domestic Violence (AMADTGDV) as the state, in which powerful individuals in an intimate relationship dominate, misuse their power and victimize the less powerful.

Some of the factors that maintain power differences include differences in financial positions, age differences and state of health. Powerful people use their position to intimidate and control the less fortunate people. According to Buzawa and Buzawa (2003), some people go the extent of using physical violence.

Although all people can experience domestic violence, the most affected are women. Husbands and boyfriends in a relationship are the main perpetrators of violence while girl friends and women end up being the victims. Violence against women is a major problem all over the world in the present days.

This is because the number of women abused and misused by their husbands increases from day to day. Men act as victims of domestic violence in other cases. For instance, in homosexual relationships, powerful men victimize their fellow men.

Domestic violence is a major problem that many people overlook and term as a family issue. Its impacts can however be much more than people may think. Domestic violence has major impacts to families and societies. The main aim of this paper is to determine the reason behind the rapid increase of domestic violence, forms of domestic violence and measures that should be taken to reduce its effects (Aron, Aron


The Concept of Leasing Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Types of lease

Advantages of Leasing

Disadvantages of Leasing


Leasing is understood to be a financial instrument that permits an individual or the lessee to enjoy the utility of a physical asset without possessing it or without assuming ownership of the asset. Leasing can also be defined as an arrangement between two main parties namely: the lessor or the leasing company and the person or the lessee.

The customer or the lessee can rent the asset from the company for a particular period of time. The rent for leasing are always predetermined and are due after a particular fixed intervals of time and the lessee assumes the ownership of the property for the entire lease period.

There is no purchase option at the expiry of the lease period. Leasing applies to equipments that are expensive and bulky or large. Leasing has advantage of tax exemption since the individual avoids the per annum leasing charges; also there is the advantage of avoiding the making of down payments.

A company with huge capital outlay will use their profits to lease assets by simultaneously defraying charges from depreciation as profits. Business organizations consider the use of leasing as the best instrument to apply for capital equipment during the financial period of the investment.

There is always an operational capital that is accrued from leasing especially when the companies supply the equipment instead of financing the equipment, this kind of capital accrued is called financial leasing (Mishra, 2008). Leasing can be an instrumental source of finance and can be used to modernize business operations.

Types of lease There are five types of leasing namely: financial leasing, operating lease, leverage lease, the sale and lease back and cross border lease.

Financial lease: This is a type of lease which cannot be revoked or canceled. The lessee enjoys the use of the asset for a long period of time; the lessee maintains, insures and can avail it for after sale services and warranty.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this type, the lessee bears responsibility over obsolescence for the entire period of lease. Financial lease has the option of purchase after the predetermined period. Nominal charges are charged to the lessee so as to finance legal and other costs.

Operating lease: the contract period between the parties’ covers a period of less than economic life of the equipment; the contract is short tem in nature. The contract can be terminated via a notice as stipulated in the agreement terms. Obsolescence risks, maintenance costs and other expenses lie in the hands of the company or lessor.

Leverage lease: this only applies to assets of massive capital and involves three parties; the lesser, lessor and the lender or other stakeholders.

Sale and lease back: this is an arrangement where a company can sell an asset to a company the can lease it out. The lessee can get the equipment at a market value. The lease back arrangements are at a net basis.

Cross border leasing: this is also called transactional leasing and it is a leasing transaction between parties based on different countries (Burt, Petcavage,


The Starry Night by Van Gogh Essay best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Use of Different Colors in the Starry Night

Representation of Different Colors in the Painting


Works Cited

Introduction The Starry Night is one of the ancient pieces of antique paintings and it has continued to draw a lot of interest in the museum galleries and art exhibitions the world over. One of the most interesting aspects in the painting is the use of colors to bring out the textural aspect in this painting.

One of the attributes that has made this painting very common is the fact that over time it has continuously been replicated by many artists and students over the course of time. There are certain very important features that make this painting to grow in popularity; perhaps the most important feature is the fact that there is a representation of the sky that is characterized by the stars that whose illumination causes a blaze that is further on enhanced by the crescent outline of the moon (Pioch, 1).

The exaggeration of these features perhaps makes the use of colors in this painting even more crucial; the fact that many people can easily identify with the scene that is represented in this painting is perhaps one of the reasons as to why it is regularly chosen by most of the student to show the effects of using different colors to represent different textures and emotions through a work of art.

Use of Different Colors in the Starry Night Different colors represent different emotions and feelings in a work of art such as a painting; perhaps one of the most important facts in the use of color is the ability to actively involve the visual use of colors to ensure that a viewer is able to clearly visualize the painting and get a feeling of the true reflection of the scenery that is put forth in the painting.

The use of different colors in the painting can serve to bring different emotions to a viewer; originally, Van Gogh was able to make use of the color textures to show the peaceful essence of the hills and horizons (Pioch, 1).

The cool dark colors are able to revive memories of the early childhood years in addition to spurring on the imagination; a viewer is able to get an imagination of what exists in the skies and also creates a sense of distance.

It is also important to consider the fact in the original paintings the colors are used to bring out a sense of size in the painting, a change of the colors will bring an entirely different aspect with regard to size. Another important aspect use of color is the ability to bring out the aspect of isolation of certain structures in the painting; the dark colors used in this regard are able to bring out the massiveness of the structure in the painting. Finally the colors used in the structure enables the viewer to be able to make their own analysis of the background features in the painting including the bushes and the variety of objects in the painting (Pioch, 1).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Representation of Different Colors in the Painting It is important and crucial to note that the use of different colors in a painting bring out different effects and interpretation on the part of the viewer, in this case a change of the colors from those that were originally used by Van Gogh will ultimately create a different interpretation of the painting by the viewer.

This is because the texture will change and this will result in a different effect in terms of emotions; another important aspect is the representations of the reflections of the different colors in the skyline that will be definitely affected by the change of the colors.

In the modified paintings it is important to consider the motivation for the use of the paintings that were selected; one of the important aspects is that the different colors that have been chosen actually represent different feelings and emotions and also they do affect the overall texture which ultimately has an effect on the painting in terms of distance.

In the second painting a few aspects have been changed and these include the background colors which have changed form a light blue to a dark blue color, the structure in the foreground has also been modified and the dark color has been made more vivid; perhaps the most important aspect of the painting that has been affected by the change of the colors is the aspect of distance; in the original painting, the artist was able to clearly bring out the aspect of distance but as a result of the modifications in the second painting, the distance seems to have been significantly reduces as a result o the color choices.

In the third and fourth paintings there is a kind of complete overhaul of the colors resulting in a completely different interpretation of the painting; one of the important aspects of the Van Gogh Painting was the fact that the use of the white and yellow colors was able to create a spiral effect that brings out a textural effect to represent the skies.

In the third painting it is important to note that the change of the colors that are associated with fewer echoes creates an entirely different effect in the picture. In this painting the aspect of distance seems to have altogether disappeared and the as the colors used for both the background and the structure in the foreground are similar, therefore the use of color in this painting modifies the texture of the painting resulting in the disappearance of the aspect of distance that had been vividly represented in the original painting.

There is however some aspects that are still eminent in this painting as the colors used still create some kind of contrast in the picture despite the change of colors.

We will write a custom Essay on The Starry Night by Van Gogh specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The aspect of illumination that had also been associated with the stars as shown clearly in the previous painting is also absent in this painting; the change of the colors in this aspect also creates a change in the interpretation of this new color scheme.

In the final painting, the use of the green color to engulf the whole painting creates a kind of silhouette that leads to a disappearance of the illumination as well as the distance that had been created in the painting.

The use of the bright colors in this aspect therefore leads to merging of the various objects in the painting and they all appear to be in the same place and context. This therefore creates a clear distinction between the use of the bright and the dark colors.

Conclusion It is evident from the use of the different color themes in the painting that the use of different and contrasting colors results in different textures in a painting that ultimately creates different emotions in for the viewer of a painting.

However in the Starry night, the aspect that is changed in the painting is the effect of distance and distinction between the various features that are represented in the painting. The use of the different colors in the four paintings therefore creates different interpretations of the paintings as is clearly evident.

Works Cited Pioch, Nicolas. Gogh, Vincent van: The Starry Night. Paris: Web Museum. 2002. Print.


Social Psychology: Individual and Environment Behavior Term Paper college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Interpersonal Attraction Social psychology is the study of how people react in social situations, how they think and how they feel. This study focuses on how individuals perceive, interact and influence each other in the social organizations. Social psychology is a section of the psychology of an individual; it tries to establish the correlation between the behavior of the individual and the environment which is made up of his colleagues (Wozniak, 1994).

Attraction is the orientation of an individual towards another and it may be described in terms of intensity and signs (positively or negatively) (Husain


Risk Management in Corporate Governance Research Paper a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Risk Management

Effective Plan for Risk Management

Importance of Risk Management



Introduction Corporate governance involves promoting corporate accountability, fairness and transparency. OECD (1999) defined corporate governance as “the system in which the business corporate is controlled; corporate governance structure specifies the distribution of rights and responsibilities among different participants in the corporation, including board managers, share holders and other stake holders” (OECD, 2005, p. 1).

Corporate governance defines the rules and procedures in reaching corporate decisions and affairs. This way, it lays down appropriate structures in which a company’s objectives are set, with clearly spelled out means of attaining the objectives (EIU, 2002).

Corporate governance has become the main-stream concern in most corporate board rooms and in many academic meetings. The events which have heightened discussions on corporate governance are the 1998 financial crisis in Brazil, Russia and Asia due to poor corporate behavior affecting the entire nation’s economies.

This was followed by the 2001 crisis due to corporate scandals in the U.S. and Europe. The private sector, being the major contributors in most nations’ economies and other development projects such as market liberalizations, has enhanced the need to attain good corporate governance.

This paper traces the importance of corporate governance and its dimension in risk management. It endeavors to highlight the role of corporate governance in defining the risks for public corporations.

Risk Management A good corporate governance structure establishes the mechanisms to attain accountability between the executives and the shareholders so as to protect the interests of the various stakeholders. Various means of improving corporate governance described by Economist Intelligence Unit (EIU) (2002) include regularly meeting non-executives to examine their performance and establish areas they feel inadequately explored by the management.

Secondly, risk management should be focused on. Ill-judged management decisions on risk management are usually the roots of failure. They should also audit performance of the board and the non executives (EIU, 2002).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Risk management refers to the processes organizations address methodologically the potential events and consequences (threats) with the aim of achieving sustained benefits. No corporation is risk free. Risk management consists of 3 Rs namely returns, risks and ruins.

Risk management increases the probability of succeeding and reduces the uncertainty of an organization’s failure. The process should be continuously running throughout the organization’s strategy implementation.

A good risk management should be addressed methodologically covering the organization in the present and in the future. The management should be integrated with the organizational culture and policies. Risk management should translate the strategy into tactical and operational objectives, which assigns overall responsibility and those that support accountability, performance and efficiency (AIRMIC, 2002).

Effective Plan for Risk Management Every organization requires a set of management programs and organizational frame work to identify and evaluate risks associated to the organization. This way, the firm will know the exact and effective policies and controls that can address the identified problem.

The management activities enable the firm to act on the risks throughout rather than managing the risks in an ad-hoc manner or only when the problem arises or is reported by the relevant authorities (ARCHIE, 2003).

Risk management process requires intensive planning and organization. It involves several phases as described below. Phases in risk management include identification of risks, risk assessment, risk control, minimization, transfer and retention.

For an organization to identify risks, it must be intimately knowledgeable concerning the markets it operates in, its legal and social environment. It is also important to identify the cultural environment as it dictates much in every corporation.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Risk Management in Corporate Governance specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Identification should be done in such a way that all activities are identified and all risks pertaining to the activities are defined. Risks identified can be grouped as strategic such as political risks, sovereign and physical environment changes.

Operational risks are those associated with present running of the organization. Financial issues include those like availability of foreign exchange rates, creditors and debtors. Other risks are knowledge management risks and compliances (AIRMIC, 2002).

After the risks have been identified, risk description follows up. Description should cover nature of risks, scope of risk, stake holders, risk quantification, risk appetite, risk treatment and control mechanisms, potential action and strategies, and policies for development set by the organization.

Risk estimation is then carried out and classification of the risks done in the following manner: High for those likely to occur every year with more than 25% probability. Such risks are potentially indicated as of repetitive nature. Medium risks are those likely to occur in a decade. Such risks are difficult to control but can be indicated by the past occurrence. Low risks are those unlikely to occur and have not occurred as yet (AIRMIC, 2002).

After being identified, risks are analyzed. There exist various analysis methods. Risk analysis is mainly done to weigh the significance of the risk to the organization. The risks are then reported. Risk reporting and communication are mainly done to ensure that the management understands the significance facing the risks and the possible outcomes thus creating awareness.

Board managers should ensure that the risk-management procedures are operating effectively. Reports are also given to business units to make them aware of risks associated to their departments and outline the performance indicators which would enable the managers monitor the progress and be in a position to identify problems that require intervention. Reports at individual levels are directed to augment accountability for individual risks and to establish means on how the risk management response can be improved (AIRMIC, 2002).

Lastly is the risk treatment. This process involves the selecting and modifying of measures to be implemented to mitigate the risks. The treatment involves having internal controls, being compliant to the organizational culture, laws and regulations to ensure effective and efficient operations (AIRMIC, 2002).

Therefore, public firms are recommended to implement policies, which will analyze risks, establish their recommendation, strategize methods of treating those risks and monitor their effectiveness to sustain the firm’s performance.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Risk Management in Corporate Governance by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In brief, the firms should establish criteria for identifying the risks by looking into the loss exposure and existing risk management, firm’s loss history to evaluate the exposures and the extent they have impacted the prospective firms. A corporation should also establish risk based auditors responsible for the inspection of key facilities and to gauge the extent the policies laid are put into practice (ABAG Plan Corporation, 2009).

Importance of Risk Management Importance of risk is to evaluate unexpected occurrences. Regulators require organizations to determine those risks which might bring rise to such occurrences. It is said that when an organization understands its risks, it understands its opportunities.

On the other hand, if it does not know the risks in its environment, it cannot determine the extent of risks accepted. Not knowing the risks to accept implies that it does not know the risks to take. In turn, this implies that it does not know how to grow.

Understanding the risks prepares the organization to hold back when events hit it. This way, the firm controls the events and seizes opportunities. Risk management enables a company to understand the risks involved in the ongoing projects. In the same context, the company gets prepared to accept the risk and can take the necessary actions to manage the risks (Griffiths, 2006).

Risk management helps the firm to prioritize relevant issues enabling them to effectively use finite resources. Risk management also helps in reaching reasonable and sound conclusions when taking risks through evaluating possible outcomes; and in deciding the best strategies to deal with the risks.

Risk management process pulls together all the information from other relevant areas like vulnerability analysis and operations to have an overview of the business risks. It helps in identifying the levels of contingency plans in the event the risks become a reality. The often overlooked advantage of risk management is the common platform provided to the managers to communicate the differences between needs wants and resource requirements (ARCHIE, 2003).

Conclusion Undoubtedly, risks threaten every organization’s objectives. Risk management process is an internal control system responsible for risks reduction to a level that is considerable by the organization to be safe. Management is responsible for monitoring of events and seizing of opportunities. It is also the role of the management to identify, assess and manage risks. Risk management is essential because it helps an organization to realize its objectives and missions.

References ABAG Plan Corporation. (2009). Risk management Manual. Association of Bay Area Governments. Web.

AIRMIC. (2002). A risk management standard. AIRMIC, ALARM, IRM. Web.

ARCHIE, D. (2003). Security program management and risk. GIAC Security Essentials certification Practical assignment Version 1,4B. San Institute, CA: Prentice Hall.

EIU. (2002). Corporate governance the new strategic imperative. A white paper from the economist intelligence unit. KPMG International. Web.

Griffiths, D. (2006). Risk based internal auditing. Internal Audit. Web.

OECD. (2005). International Experts Meeting on Corporate Governance of Non-listed Companies. OECD. Web.


Types of Thinking Styles Report (Assessment) writing essay help

Thinking Styles: Optimistic, Pessimistic, and Emotional One of the key avenues of concern in critical and creative thinking is the recognition, acknowledgement, and appreciation of the influence of human factor to the thought process of each individual. A broad spectrum of factors, therefore, exists bearing a mark on the manner in which human beings think.

Examples of such factors are culture, emotion, stress, ego, among others. The discipline of critical and creative thinking strives to direct the attention of each person on the invaluable role played by these factors in making of decisions. This paper analyses, and compares and contrasts optimistic thinking, pessimistic thinking, and emotional thinking.

Optimistic thinking is the type of thinking in which a person chooses to align his/her thoughts on the positive side of life regardless of how gloomy things look. People who have optimistic thoughts normally reassure themselves that all is well in any condition they find themselves.

This, of course, has its advantages and disadvantages. Pessimistic thinking is the opposite of optimistic thinking. It refers to a style of thinking in which an individual sees the negative side of situations. In good and bad situations, such a person will always have something to get him/her worried.

This obviously has its advantages and disadvantages. One of the advantages is that such a person will be able to anticipate challenges, and plan on how to overcome them. Emotional thinking is the style of thinking that is driven by what a person feels at a particular point in time (Martin, 2010, p. 1). For instance, if a person is feeling depressed, this style of thinking will attract thoughts of hopelessness and other related thoughts.

The three thinking styles are largely similar. One of their similarities is the fact that the three thinking styles stem from the disposition of the particular individual with whom they are associated. For instance, an emotional person is likely to have an emotional thinking style; a pessimistic person is likely to have a pessimistic thinking style while an optimistic person is likely to have an optimistic thinking style (Pritchett, 2007, p. 1).

In addition to this, emotional and pessimistic thinking styles are likely to have more negative influences on an individual than the optimistic thinking style. This is because the thinking style of a person is a key determinant of the appropriateness and success of actions that he/she takes in order to make a situation better.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The way a person perceives and thinks after succeeding in a certain thing is also a determinant factor of future success. A person with an emotional thinking style may for example over-celebrate an instance of success leading to future failures.

It is however important to note that despite the fact that the optimistic thinking style is generally better as compared to the other two, it has its weaknesses. A person with an optimistic thinking style may take things for granted while assuming that all will be well.

This may lead to a failure that will take him/her by surprise. After repeated failures, such a person may even develop a negative disposition like being emotional. This may make him/her an emotional thinker (Martin, 2010, p. 1). It is, therefore, important to note that dispositions are not static. Therefore, a person may have more than one of the three thinking styles during his/her lifetime.

Reference List Martin, P. (2010). Explanatory Style – Optimism/Pessimism. Retrieved from [November 4, 2011]

Pritchett, P. (2007). How pessimism can add value to our work, Hard Optimism. Retrieved from [November 4, 2011]


Netcare Company’s Success Case Study essay help free: essay help free

Netcare was founded back in 1994 and later in December 1996, it got a listing on the Johannesburg Stock Exchange. At the time, Netcare comprised of six hospitals. After the listing, Netcare acquired a number of small and autonomous hospital holdings in South Africa including Excel Medical Limited and Clinic Holdings.

It later acquired Medicross, which had a network of 75 dental and medical centers athwart South Africa in 2001. Medicross acquired another holding, Prime Cure in 2006 that had 25 medical centers and a 130,000-customer base.

Reasons for Netcare’s success in South Africa From its history, one of the main reasons behind Netcare’s success is its series of acquisitions. After its listing in the Stock Exchange, it acquired very organized holdings with large networks in South Africa’s health system. These acquisitions enabled Netcare gain customers and control many clinics.

This was coupled with organizational growth that saw Netcare expand the existing hospitals as well as building new hospitals in which four were completed in 2006. It also earned huge contracts for its 911 emergency along with the ambulance service.

It also took advantage of budding markets by offering high volume and low cost service to the private patients who were unable to pay for conventional private hospital contribution previously. Netcare’s record growth was so strong that by the year 2007, it boasted of 18,877 employees.

In the same period, its capacity had grown to 9,546 beds in 56 hospitals with 86 hospital and retail pharmacies and 358 operating theaters in a private hospital that offered trauma services. Its 911 emergency service comprised over 7.5 million members with 246 ambulances and response vehicles, as well as 3 helicopters over and above 2 fixed-wing ambulances.

Another reason for success is the operational excellence by driving efficiencies and controlling costs by means that could not compromise quality. It also implemented a system of Systems Application and Products (SAP), the endorsement of the entire hospitals in addition to an effort to put into practice shared-service centers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Netcare focused on creating and maintaining traditions of excellence at all levels of operations. This has also been achieved through heavy investments made in facilities, technology as well as doctor and nursing training. After this move, Netcare attracted extra 162 medical experts in 2007.

This was further enhanced by the entry of a new CEO who brought many changes in terms of administration and governance. Friedland appreciated the government as a key stakeholder in the health industry and government’s regulations greatly affect profit making. He therefore, meant efforts to enhance relationships with the government.

Netcare derived a lot of success from looking into foreign markets through international expansion. Netcare did not hesitate to look at markets outside South Africa and create the brand in these nations. A case in study is Netcare’s entry into the UK market in which Netcare has repatriated many benefits.

This portrayed Netcare as a company that was keen to take advantage of any opportunities that it saw in the international market. It used its proficient skills developed back in South Africa as an upper hand to secure tenders in the UK with the NHS.

These contracts have been very instrumental in increasing the net worth of Netcare as it had offered reputable and quality health-care to over 10,000 patients by 2006. This Netcare’s success could be attributed to innovativeness and risk taking ability.

They were daring to initiate ophthalmic units that were mobile and could operate from different locations and offer services like surgery, post, and pre-operative care. It has also displayed its innovativeness in developing factory services to obtain economies of scale by setting up a huge number of related operations jointly.

Netcare undoubtedly built a name in terms of best and safe healthcare. It also boasted of passionate professionals who were friendly to the patients. Netcare human resource was a strategy that they well utilized to attract many customers.

We will write a custom Case Study on Netcare Company’s Success specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As other hospitals in South Africa were keen hunting doctors who had fled through brain drain, Netcare strategized itself as the employer of choice. It embarked on attracting and retaining skilled nurses as well as, training workers and nursing students to avert shortage of skills.

It initiated a clinical governance plan that well described clinical pathways that ensured safety of patient care. It also had its guidelines that looked into infection control, trauma, and ICU. Consequently, it had the lowest infection in South African hospitals. This saw an outburst in clients, for example, between 2006 and 2007 their admissions increased by one million (5.9%) and primary care visits by 3.6 million (9.4%).

Type(s) of competitive advantage that Netcare had in South Africa Netcare has various types of competitive advantage in South Africa. One of them is cost leadership or lower costs with benefit. Netcare has managed to improve the quality of healthcare without compromising on the quality. It has also enabled many private patients to gain access to traditional private hospital which they could not afford before.

Another comparative advantage comes from strategic relationships. This has been acquired through good relations with the government and its major acquisitions with independent hospital groups since 2005. This has gained more customers and attracted reputable doctors reducing the effect of brain drain.

Netcare has also gained quality and first mover position as one of the comparative advantages. It offers quality services, largest and efficient 911 emergency services, and ancillary health-care with logistical infrastructure. It has also gained very high ratings on BEE commitment.

Delivery advantage is another comparative advantage gained by Netcare. This is in both speed and reliability of the services offered. It has well equipped ICU and the largest emergency service, so customers are assured of speed in service delivery. It also has a large number of nurses, doctors, and paramedics who are well trained. Its services are reputable and timely. Netcare also boasts of skilled and friendly staffs that make customers very comfortable.

Differentiation advantage is another type of comparative advantage gained by Netcare since it has specialized in various medical conditions. Netcare is well proficient in various fields like trauma, pediatric trauma, neo-natal, oncology, eye operations, and various types of surgeries. This has also enhanced cost advantages as many operations can be done under the same unit. On the same note, the 55 private hospitals have well entrenched its impact in the market.

Competencies that Netcare acquired in South Africa transferable to other markets Netcare has acquired a number of competencies that can be effectively transferred to other markets. One of the key competencies is organizational growth that has seen Netcare utilize the expertise in the market to break through both the private and the public health markets.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Netcare Company’s Success by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It has quickly asserted its force in the market by expanding the acquired hospitals and constructing new ones, as well as expanding its emergency service to be the leader. Notably this has been done at low cost, high volume and quality service.

Another competence that can be transferred to other markets is the provision of excellent care using the most sophisticated and modern technology and hospital networks. Netcare has established several centers of excellence with modern facilities, which are offering quality health-care. Through these facilities, it has created one of the most efficient trauma services in the world. It also has very sophisticated facilities for dealing with breast cancer particularly at Milpark hospital.

Netcare has gained competence in operation at low cost but maintaining the quality of health-care service. Operational excellence tops their list. It has succeeded in training nurses and doctors, as well as investing in facilities and technology. Netcare has a reputation of practicing the safest and best health-care.

It has a clinical governance line up that describes clinical pathways. It has also stipulated its private guidelines on ICU, trauma, and infection control. It has the lowest infection rates in South Africa. Additionally, it has also improved its policies and new standards in their position to maintain the best private healthcare.

To cap it all, one of the most remarkable competencies is quality. This is maintained in terms of skills and knowledge of the medical experts, facilities, and safety, hygiene, and health outcomes. Netcare has built a name in the world in terms of trauma services, breast cancer, emergency services, neo-natal, oncology and general patient care.

A lot of investment has been directed towards acquiring the newest technology to treat various diseases for example electrophysiology system and the “stereotactic Niobe electrophysiology catherisation laboratory”. After all, Netcare’s aim is to provide quality healthcare all over the world.

Pros and cons Netcare had for expanding internationally or exploiting opportunities at home In 2008, Netcare had the options of expanding internationally or exploiting opportunities in South Africa, which have both advantages and disadvantages. Expanding internationally provides good opportunities for Netcare as it presents infrastructure, purchasing power, an efficient management team, property and facilities, local connections and most importantly enable Netcare build its brand on an excellence podium outside south Africa.

Netcare’s entry into UK market through GHG was marked by success and global recognition. Netcare has also had opportunities to invest in other African countries. However, the nature of these economies poses a big challenge.

The insured population and government’s participation in healthcare are key considerations. Netcare must also overcome many challenges in order to gain competitive advantage that will enable to penetrate and succeed in emerging markets.

There is also a likelihood of straining resources when Netcare wants to be present in every continent. International expansion is more likely to be looked at as lack of commitment to provide quality health-care back home and exposure to foreign debt.

Expanding opportunities available in South Africa is also a good option since Netcare brand is well established in South Africa. It has created brand loyalty and Netcare knows the market’s strengths and weaknesses.

However, the market does not offer more opportunities for growth. For instance, Netcare has to content with the shortage of medical skills that have griped South Africa for the longest time. Another challenge that faces Netcare’s if it chooses to exploit opportunities at home alone is the recent legislation by the parliament that could greatly affect its strategy. More acquisitions in South Africa will be subject to rigorous examination from competition regulators.


Housing Problem in Canada Research Paper essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

The Historical Development

The Growing Gap

Dualism Policies


Reference List

Introduction The idea of public housing in Canada can be traced as far back as 1938 when the national housing Act was passed. Public housing is a government subsidized program for the low income and the un-housed individuals and their families.

A total of 5% of the Canadian households live on the social housing program, representing the smallest social housing sector in any developed country with the exception of the United States of America (Hombs 2011 120).

The Canadian housing system is unique compared to other developed countries in the world. Unlike other developed countries, it solely relies on the market mechanism for allocation, provision and maintenance of the housing. That is why the public housing has presented a big problem to all the players. A housing system based on the market forces is not responsive to the social needs (Hulchanski 2009 98).

The federal government has defined affordable housing as any rent or housing cost that is 80% of gross market rent or less. Many have argued that the definition should be based on household income and not the market rent.

Most of the poor people live in housing that is either over crowded, substandard or unaffordable to them. The poor housing in Canada as defined on the level of affordability or the people’s ability to find affordable and quality housing is very important as far as their health is concerned and it is a measure of the country’s states of social infrastructure (Quarter, Mook and Armstrong 2009 85-102).

Mary Hombs. Modern Homelessness: A Reference Handbook. (Washington, DC. ABC-CLIO). 2011) 120.

David J. Hulchanski 2009. Finding Home: Policy Options for Addressing Homelessness in Canada. (New York. The homeless Hub Publishers. 2009) 98. Experts say affordable housing should not exceed 30% of the household income.

Jack Quarter, Laurie Mook and Ann Armstrong. Understanding the Social Economy: A Canadian Perspective.( Toronto. University of Toronto Press. 2009) 102.

Lack of access to adequate and affordable housing is a serious problem which leads to poor health for many, and contributes to the invasive but avoidable health inequalities among the citizens (Hulchanski 2009 104).

The Historical Development The mortgage and the insurance institutions were created by the federal and provincial governments many decades ago. The Municipal governments provided the land service and the zoning regulations that give permission to construction of relatively cheap housing subdivisions.

From as early as 1970, there has been a steady rise in house purchase assistance programs which have maintained Canada’s house ownership at a rate of approximately two-thirds. In 1963, the federal government introduced the joint provincial and funding program (Hombs 2011 129).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Later in the 1970s, this program was replaced with the centralized and community based program, almost 200,000 housing units had been built, about 2% of Canada’s present housing stock. This was a modest housing program because of its objective policy which was broad in nature was to leave the housing system to the market dynamics as much as possible.

The Canada Mortgage and Housing Corporation CMHC which was founded in 1946 mainly focused on making the mortgage market to work for the house buyers and for the private investors in the rental housing.

David J. Hulchanski. Finding Home: Policy Options for Addressing Homelessness in Canada. (New York. The homeless Hub Publishers. 2009) 104.

Mary Hombs. 2011. Modern Homelessness: A Reference Handbook. (Washington, DC. ABC-CLIO 2011) 129.

In 1954 it saw the creation of the federal Mortgage Insurance Fund; this was to encourage banks to enter into the risky market of mortgage lending. One of the CMHC‘s major functions has been to manage this funds.

The history of the role of Government’s housing policy in Canada has been an effort aimed at the ownership of the housing. All along these policies has been seen as one sided, only aimed at assisting the homeowners and not the renters, and there was no policy of tenure neutrality (Hombs 2011 137).

To own a house is a long term investment plan that helps to maintain a certain standard of living over the life of an individual. Over half of the Canadian owners who have paid off their mortgages spend about 11% of their income on housing, implying that they have more disposable income.

Besides, a large and expensive house can also be traded in for a small house which is less expensive and some money could be freed up or even a negotiation of a reverse mortgage that will provide a regular annuity payment to the owner (Sewll 1994 107).

The present Canadian housing system has been the way it is because of the history of the government’s activity and the ongoing role of different levels of government in supporting the Canada’s market oriented approach to supplying, allocating and maintaining the stock of national housing plan. The home ownership in Canada’s housing system has also benefited the well financed and the sympathetic to politicians and the bureaucrats.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Housing Problem in Canada specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More John Sewll. Houses and Homes: Housing for Canadians. (Toronto. James Lorimer


The economy of Asian countries Essay online essay help: online essay help

Introduction Assessing the economy of Asian countries that have marked the greatest improvement in terms of economic performance in the past decade, it is clear that the rapid pace at which the economy has grown is closely linked to their strong export orientation.

Economic growth within these East Asian economies followed the change of economic activity from being based on the customary importation substitution towards activities and policies that are more focused on exporting goods to other countries.

The result of such policies was immediate net annual growth of twenty percent and this extended over a long time period (Balassa, 590). The aim of this paper will analyze the similarities and differences between economic developments in Asian countries.

Emphasis will be laid on the difference and similarities between first and second wave. Under the first wave, we will discuss in detail, three cases, namely Japan, South Korea and Taiwan. Under the second wave, we will also discuss three cases i.e. China, India and Thailand.

First Wave of Economic Revolution Japan

The achievement of export trade has always been closely linked to the general growth of Japan’s economic development. Volume trade averaged seventeen percent up to the year 1973. The net effect of export trade to Japan was not only limited to the provision of much needed foreign currency for the purchase of raw goods, but it also benefited the country through developing its industry so as to take advantage of the economies of scale that could not have succeeded if it was to rely solely on its domestic market.

It is also through export trade that firms realized the threat of competition and the need to be innovative and efficient (Buckley, 45).

So what are the catalysts for Japan’s success? The country’s industrial policy has always fostered a culture of innovation and support for local firms. Local firms are encouraged from the outset to aim for export of their products.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More All this is done in order to ensure that the country is able to compete with the West when it comes to global trade. The industrial policies of Japan are aimed at offering not only financial support but also technical support that includes advisory services and arranging trade fairs all around the globe (Buckley, 67).

South Korea

Export trade in South Korea has mainly been catalyzed by two important key policies that were instituted by the Government. The first was land control: Land was redistributed so as to accommodate the rising population. At the time, there was a pending population crisis as immigrants flocked from the North.

A family was only restricted to three hectares. The second policy that assisted the country was education policy. The government realized at the time that the country needed qualified persons in order to run its industries, thus it placed emphasis on good and quality education for its citizens Thus the government can be attributed as one of the biggest enablers of the export trade and economic development of the country.

Policies regarding export trade were drafted and based on phases. For example, the plan applied all through the 3 decades can be divided into phases. Throughout the first and second financial year phases, the country was involved with export of any goods.

There was a generalization on the types of goods to be exported. The 3rd and 4th year was characterized by exports of heavy industrial machines while the phase after 1980 was characterized by export of high tech machines. This led to a steady and strong growth in South Korea’s economy (Balassa, 570).


Of all the three countries discussed under the first wave, Taiwan was relatively at a relatively better position to advance its export trade as it had acquired an already established infrastructure from its Japanese colonizers.

There was no shortage of skilled labor as Chinese immigrants from the mainland came in droves. Land and education polices had already been established and financial aid from America fuelled the development in the country.

We will write a custom Essay on The economy of Asian countries specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This enabled the country to concentrate on the development of firms that could export products of international standards. Government policies are also largely responsible for the booming export trade as they allowed the private sector to thrive and provide the needed momentum for economic growth.

In addition, the Government has promoted a secure macroeconomic environment. It has also ensured strived to support local investments, industrial expansions that will drive up export volumes

The similarity between all the three cases is that the Government is hugely responsible for establishing crucial policies that have led to the growth of export trade in the countries.

Second Wave of Economic Revolution At a common point, it can be said that commerce and manufacturing guiding principles of the Economies that made up the 2nd wave i.e. China, Thailand and India, were similar to those of countries that made up the first wave. I.e. Japan, South Korea and Taiwan.

After a phase where the countries implemented import substitution and where China’s policy was more focused on central planning, all the economic policies evolved to become more export oriented. This change in policies led to a further increase in trade (export and import) of goods. This had a net resultant effect of higher GDP growth (Chang, 136).

Critics have argued that where economic growth of the “first wave” countries was largely attributed to abnormally positive global trade environment, countries involved in the second wave had to endure a more complex environment that was plagued by increased and selective trade protectionism among trade partners witnessed from the fifties and sixties.

Despite of all the complexities, these economies have emerged as the leading lights of Asia’s economic growth. Another key difference between the two waves was that where export promotion was utilized by Japan, South Korea and Taiwan to encourage their local industries, countries in the second wave have not comprehensively utilized this tool and have instead used their exchange rate policies to stabilize their domestic macroeconomic environment rather than for export competitiveness.

In the case of China, economic growth has been realized despite the inherent political risk that the country faces. China being a one party state faces a political risk for local and foreign businessmen and investors (Chang, 142).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The economy of Asian countries by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion In summary from the above understanding of export policies in Asia, it is apparent that success that did not happen overnight due to supply and demand. Instead the economic boom was attributed to government intervention and participation in the development of local enterprise.

Most notably, stages of booming growth and expansion were distinguished by public policies enabling a steady fiscal environment with a diverse range of incentives for the private sector. Incentives also included the promotion the addition of both human and physical resources.

Works Cited Balassa, Ben (1964), “The Purchasing Power Parity Doctrine: A Reappraisal”, Journal of Political Economy, 1964. Vol. 72, 584-596.

Buckley, Roy. (1998), Japan Today, Cambridge University Press, New York and Melbourne, 2007.

Chang , Hinn.(1993), “The Political Economy of Industrial Policy in Korea”, Cambridge Journal of Economics, 2003. Vol. 17 (2), 131-157.


Legal issues facing TaskRabbit Company Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Cutting-edge technology

Likely legal implications



TaskRabbit is a company that offers online solutions for individuals seeking to recruit other persons to carry out their duties and errands. Apparently, the idea seems simple but with the flexibility of the Internet, it is highly effective. For those that have dirty lawns or room, but feeling tired or committed elsewhere and not seeking a continuous employer-employee commitment, TaskRabbit is the viable option.

The unique online services are immensely vital for people planning to relocate to a new estate or home, or just a long trip, but are unwilling to beg nearby store managers for their subject’s services to help with the readying of luggage. Task Rabbit offers the solutions of temporary services.

All one needs to do is sign up with TaskRabbit, and start to enjoy the efficient services of dedicated people in search of odd jobs. TaskRabbit cuts the niche of an online hub that provides exceptionally common services, and it is probable, many iOS subscribers have yet to notice the immense opportunities and legal challenges that the medium offers.

Cutting-edge technology According to Edgar (2010), TaskRabbit supports the exploration of its services by users through applications such as Facebook Connect, which offers users effective navigation options without necessarily filling the sign up form online. The online tool leans more on setting up employment opportunities that seeking a service, a development that is normally facilitated by cutting-edge technology.

Owing to the TaskRabbit application that is apparently intended to establish tasks more than employment opportunities especially of the company workforce, legal regulations guiding employment agencies could catch up with it, internally as a result of employee court cases or externally following civil cases filed by regulatory bodies that oversee employment issues.

Meanwhile, if one has a task that needs accomplishing, he or she picks a group from the default options provided on the site, such as washing, shopping or transporting food, after which the ‘employer’ keys in his or her details.

According to Figueroa (2010), task details an inputted by the service beneficiary may include exact location for easy delivery of goods and services; a timeframe within which the task should be carried out and the service fee that the buyer of a service is comfortable to pay.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For users who are not comfortable with the entry of their true identity, and commodity specification, perhaps due to time constraints, an audio file or pictures that illustrate the nature of the job are welcome. Nonetheless, this could open floodgates to fictitious persons into the business.

Meanwhile, one can either configure the application to routinely choose a TaskRabbit or just employ manual assignment of the task after reviewing the options available. TaskRabbit delivery agents undergo rigorous vetting process, an initiative executed by the company to assure job submitters of security and convenience.

The company executives must have learnt the weaknesses of the online medium which carries genuine users and criminals, and that a haphazard method of selecting task runners might be a fertile ground for recruiting individuals of uncalled for character, who may prove costly to the company if a victim sues for reparation of a criminal act targeted at him or her (Edgar, 2010).

If an individual is interested in finding out the kind of jobs that are awaiting workers in a given locality, the “browse tasks” button offers the solution. It displays available tasks and their exact location on a chart of an enquired region. TaskRabbit services have been extended from San Francisco to Chicago, Boston, Orange County, Calif, Los Angeles, and New York (Figueroa, 2010).

Although, the task that TaskRabbit capitalizes on from its base in San Francisco is to help link committed persons with a jobless individuals who are capable of executing the job, the expansion of the job giver-task seeker across states is likely to raise lots of legal issues in different states that could hamper its operations.

For now, the company is one of several outsourcing websites that rely on social networks for wider outreach and appeal to clients.

Likely legal implications Gerzema (2011) suggests that from the look of things, TaskRabbit seems to be establishing a provisional employer-employee association when the task posted on the site matches the capacity of a task performer. For a limited number of assignments, the ‘employee’ could be classified as a worker under contract basis and should be entitled to tax waivers that regular employees are not subjected to.

We will write a custom Essay on Legal issues facing TaskRabbit Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Nonetheless, in case a Runner enjoys an extensive and continuous relationship with job submitters, for example through several related tasks with TaskRabbit, particularly for more than 12 months, this could be noticed by respective State Employment organizations in the regions where the company is operating.

Generally, Edgar (2010) believes one of the primary determining factors which dictate employer-employee-contract working relationships is who calls the shots with regard to the various aspects of the job, such as the actual working location, the best time to execute a given task and what it takes to call a job well done, conditions which are fulfilled by both the company and task clients.

Further, if those issues are ironed out through negotiations between the job poster and the individual seeking the job, then the two parties may be referred to as the employee and employer who enjoy the bond that is present in any other formal job agreement.

If that is the situation, TaskRabbit may arguably just take the form of the facilitator and does not play the role of an employment agency. Nonetheless, it is arguable that if TaskRabbit were reduced to a mere third party, playing the role of a facilitator, it would not go the extra mile of vetting likely runners and paying the runners on behalf of the ‘real’ employer (Figueroa, 2010).

Additionally, analysis of TaskRabbit reveals that the company is in fact tendering financial reports regarding Runner payments to the IRS through 1099.

The company also reaffirms that employees are actually self-determining parties, without any solid contractual commitment with the company, thus there is no need to fulfill legal obligations that is required of employers.

Indeed, as stipulated in the TaskRabbit rules of the game, they appear to drop the legal gauntlet of employment tax remission at the Runners’ doors. Conversely, Gerzema (2011) believes this endangers the operations of the Runners, many of who may be uninformed of the storm that they are fermenting through their actions.

Legal hurdle that the Runners might face revolve around their bidding measures of job acquisition, while not being abreast with the likelihood of their substantial reduction of wages if the tax man descended on them. Worse still, failure to remit the taxes willingly, could expose the Runners to huge legal fines and possible prosecution for evading tax.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Legal issues facing TaskRabbit Company by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion In general, companies that rely on online social networking sites have been accused of violating user privacy, and relying on some level of unverified information posted by users. TaskRabbit may not escape the condemnation either.

The TaskRabbit of allowing users to post the kind of task they need accomplished and the cost they are ready to pay could be disastrous in terms of under-valuing or overvaluing of the Runner tasks. The company’s unwillingness to take insurance cover for its operations could prove legally devastating to the operations in case of a problem realized during operations.

It may not be easy to trace a Runner that did not disclose his or her true identity, but disappears with the property of a job submitter. Worse still, the company may come under a barrage of legal tussles in case the Runners fail to deliver whole items to the clients, because of day to day accidents such as breakages during delivery process.

The company should therefore set up safeguarding measures to protect the privacy of users, insure its operations and hammer out a solid employment deal with the Runners to avoid any possible legal challenges.

References Edgar, L. (2010). Now You Can Auction Off Your Coffee Run. Bloomberg Businessweek, (4204), 46-47.

Figueroa, A. (8/5/2010). “TaskRabbit: new part-time work for people without jobs.” Christian Science Monitor. Print.

Gerzema, J. (2011). The Joblet Recovery. Inc., 33(8), 38.


Angel Investing Essay best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction


Angel investors

Benefits of angel investors




Introduction Entrepreneurship is all about setting up and successfully running a business venture for growth and prosperity. This noble undertaking involves a host of decisions that the entrepreneur has to make. After conceiving a business idea, necessary steps are taken to ensure that the business idea is fully implemented.

Business planning plays a major role in developing the business. During business planning the entrepreneur will take a great deal of time to make projections about the financial needs of the business as well as the possible sources of finances to be pursued in realizing the business dreams.

Angel investing is increasingly becoming one of the viable options for funding business ventures and as such many businesses have benefited from the huge amounts of venture capital those angel investors are able to contribute in running businesses.

This paper will discuss the critical role that angel investors play in the establishment and development of business ventures. It will also analyze the pros and cons of using angel investments as an alternative source of business finance.

Discussion Implementation of a viable business idea will normally require a great deal of capital and the ability of the entrepreneur to raise the necessary capital, the higher the chances of business success. Start ups are businesses at the initial stages and hence there are very limited sources of funds available to such businesses due to uncertainties surrounding their success.

Start ups will therefore depend largely on the owner’s capital and contribution from friends. Credit facilities from financial institutions and other lenders will normally require collaterals and this limits the chances of new business owners to secure such findings.

In recent times however, the entrepreneurs across the world have been able to get a lot of reprieve from venture capitalist that are willing to support a business idea to its implementation stages. A venture capital is a specialized form of funding that targets high risk high return investments with potential growth in the future.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The capital is commonly provided to business start ups that cannot acquire funding from the conventional credit and capital markets. Venture capitalists are unique in the sense that they provide both financial and managerial expertise to the business that improves the chances of success.

Venture capital comes from various sources that may include wealthy individuals with investment appetite in the targeted area of business and institutions such as investment banks and corporate orgaisations.The venture capitalist therefore assumes a significant level of control in the business through the share of capital and as well as decision making processes.

Although venture capital assumes different forms as mentioned above, wealthy individuals have come handy in the recent past to support new businesses and has formed a greater part of angel investors.

This form of investment has played a major role in the development of start ups as a larger percentage of venture capital has comprised of the angel investment options. This paper will discuss the pros and cons of angel investments as a source of venture capital.

Angel investors Angel investments have become the new trend in the management of start ups and hence this form of venture capital has the potential of ensuring high levels of business developments and economic growth in any country. Angel investors allow small and medium scale entrepreneurs to acquire the necessary capital and hands on management expertise to run a successful business venture.

Preston (2007) defines angel investments as a mutual partnership between entrepreneurs and wealthy individuals who seek to benefit from the early synergies created by a new business idea and make substantial amount of profit as they assist the entrepreneur achieve his r her dream in a specific business.

The angel investors will benefit from the high levels of profit as well as capital appreciation while the entrepreneurs will be able to acquire cheap sources of capital and also get managerial expertise. This mutual relationship has led to high levels of success in start ups.

We will write a custom Essay on Angel Investing specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Benefits of angel investors The question as to whether small and medium entrepreneurs should opt for angel investors or not comes from the key benefits one is able to get from these sources of venture capital. The increased use of angel investments as an alternative source of funding is attributed to the following benefits that they provide to both the investor and the entrepreneur:

Angel investments have been found to appropriately suit the entrepreneurs who intend to start up new business ventures and as such no other source of funding is convenient to businesses like the angel investments. During the initial stages of the business a lot of resources will be required.

They range from financial, managerial expertise and technical skills. Angel investments are able to provide all these resources at a lower cost hence it has the best combination of resources that can allow a start up to grow.

Angel investors are normally spread across a financial district of any country more so in areas that have adopted new technologies. This makes the source of finance to be the most available.

Angel investors are normally driven by success in the business and hence they are keen to mobilize their resources to ensure that the business idea succeeds. They are however flexible and allows for alternative plans.

This is the best approach for any entrepreneur who starts a new business since success is not normally guaranteed. In this regards, the angel investors allows for flexible terms of engagement as opposed to the conventional lenders who demand for strict investment in the agreed type of business venture (Benjamin


Exiting Strategy Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

Businesses are entities that are likely to undergo changes in the course of operation. It is important to note that businesses go through phases and each phase has got its special requirements.

For instance when business is starting there is need to ensure that the legal documents are put in place, there is sufficient capital and there are available parties to run the business. Evaluations should be carried out against the stage of business development as well as the prevailing circumstances at that point.

As an entrepreneur, one of the main goals of establishing and running a business are to make profit and make the business a success. This implies that in cases where this reason and any other reason are not met then there is need to bring the business to an end.

Among many other reasons entrepreneurs bring the business to a close in light of the following reasons, boredom and burnout, lack of operating and growth capital, no heirs to leave the business to, desire for liquidity, aging and health problems and the desire to pursue other interests.

In such cases, a strategy is developed by the entrepreneur to enable him or her to gain maximum benefits while ending the particular enterprise.

The strategy which is utilized when one is changing or shifting from one enterprise to another is known as an exit strategy. The exit strategy can be defined as a component of a business plan where an entrepreneur describes a method which investors realize tangible return on their investment.

Investors will always want to convert their share of the investment into a more “liquid” form, known as liquidity event which refers to the position of the venture for the realization of a cash return for the owners and the investors. This “event” is most often achieved through an initial public offering or a complete sale of the venture.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In essence, many entrepreneurs seek to gain or acquire capital through the public markets. This is done through the initial public offering which is used to represent the registered public offering of a company’s securities for the first time.

It is important to note that through a capital increase associated with an IPO against cash contributions or through the issuance of shares to private and institutional investors, the company’s capital adequacy is improved all over sudden.

With a well planned and professionally structured IPO the company will receive significant cash inflow. In contrast to a credit financing that is subject to regular interest and principal payments, whereby these are of course determined independent of the success results of the company.

A case in point is the acquisition of Paypal by eBay. Paypal is a company which is based in America which specializes in e-commerce. It allows payments and money transfers to be made through the internet. This offers the customers alternative ways of transacting money from the traditional methods such as the checks and other paper methods.

Paypal had been a service provider of choice until October 3, 2002 when eBay acquired stakes in it. This acquisition cost eBay $1.5 billion. eBay is a San Jose based company which offers its services across the world.

This took place when Paypal went public through the initial public offer. Through this acquisition, eBay was able to control the electronic payment service. Analysts state that due to the stiff competition which Paypal had with eBay, it was easier for eBay to buyout Paypal than to beat it.

Among the means by which entrepreneurs and investors can exit their venture, the one that receives most attention by the press and has been studies most extensively is the IPO. Essentially, an IPO is the sale of the portion of the company to the public through a stock offering, and is considered by many to be the preferred choice of exiting a firm.

We will write a custom Essay on Exiting Strategy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Successful initial public offerings enable businesses to gain higher valuation for the stockholders who are in existence thus leading to generation of cash from interested investors. This is often due to the increased legitimacy and visibility of the venture and increased liquidity of the company’s equity, making it a less risky and more accessible investment.

The drawback of the initial public offering is normally contributed by the nature of the process. An IPO is an expensive and lengthy process. This implies that it is a process which requires a significant amount of time, effort, and financial resources to complete the legal steps which are required by the legislation.

Furthermore, the IPO requires the company to exhibit much greater transparency to the public and to regulators. An IPO is a point of transition from the private to the public domain.

Although firms preparing for an IPO often attract investors’ attention, the attention sometimes does not result in investment because IPO firms lack a publicly available record for their stock price and because IPO firms are riskier than larger more established firms.

During the Paypal initial public offering there were certain aspects which had an impact on Paypal’s later performances. Essentially, Paypal did not set a price tag this implied that there were no specific limits about the amount which was expected to be raised.

Furthermore, it offered an IPO when the markets were struggling. Initially, the Paypal stocks soared unexpectedly in the market during its debut, but that did not last long. This drop was attributed to market conditions which were prevailing at that particular time.

In addition, the announcement from eBay about the stake acquisition of 35%also had a major blow of the way the stock shares behaved in the following days. This was a major blow because the majority of eBay users had been using the Paypal service.

Thus this led the investors to interpret the acquisition as an indication that eBay would be more aggressive in the promotion of services which were similar to Paypal. During this time, Paypal suffered another blow when a customer filed a law suit against it because of claims regarding freezing of their accounts without sufficient reason.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Exiting Strategy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The company could not make any statements due to the restrictions regarding the company weeks before and after the stock offering. This tainted a big blow to the image of the company.

There are several ways that this situation could be averted. First, it was important to establish the timing and ensure that the market trends do not harm the prospects of the organization. As a company which is listing is going public, the management should be careful not to bring out contradictory information or inflammatory remarks which can taint the image of the company.

Thus, it is fundamental to note the establishing the rules of going public is not just a public relations affair, it entails bringing on board a diverse team of experts who should advice on the best move possible as well as inform the management team on any looming pitfalls during and after this period.

Lastly, entrepreneurs are generally risk takers. This is because they attempt things that have never been attempted before and they go ahead and execute with precision. However, it is not always the case that the outcome will be positive. This notwithstanding, information and insight into any venture is crucial for business.

References Kuratko, D. F.,


Global Financial Crisis of the United States Mortgage Industry Essay college essay help near me

In 2008, the world suffered global financial crisis that led to world’s economic retardation, it was believed to have originated from the United States mortgage industry. The crisis led to economic down falls of companies, governments, countries, and institutions; during the period, majority of nations recorded a negative economic growth rate.

Although the exact cause of the crisis is complex and intertwined, it is believed that, two major American mortgage companies called Freddie Mac and Fannie Mac were responsible for the crisis; by the end of 2007 the two corporations had owned and guaranteed over 50% of the United States mortgage market. The amount of loans they owned was beyond their control leading to increased costs as the market and price of houses went down (Shaw, 1996).

The main sector that was affected by the crisis was the financial and insurance sectors as they were directly involved in the financing and insuring for the homes. With the crisis, the firms were getting loss of revenue as people were not able to finance their facilities and at the same time insurances were finding it hard to compensate all the claims that were made by either the financier or the customer.

The deterioration of economies called for government to take fast and immediate measures to rescue their nations; the United Nations for instance had to make policies that protected its local industry from the adverse effects of the crisis.

The country made indirect and direct methods to protect their local industry from competitions of outside world (Park, cona


External/Internal Case Analysis for HNA Group Case Study a level english language essay help

As a new airline company with high development in the China civil aviation, Hainan Airlines (HNA) group is facing both internal and international competition in the economic globalism. It is thus very vital for HNA group to assess its environment so as to draw up a development strategic plan that will enable it to strengthen its competitive ability.

In this paper I will: discuss one factor from the general environment that is relevant to the case; make an assessment of HNA group competitive environment using Porter’s five forces model; discuss the strategy of the firm; explore HNA group competitive advantages over its main competitors; assess the company core competency; identify the main alternatives for HNA group and give the pros and cons of each alternative; and conclude with an opinionated recommendation.

External Environment One factor from the general environment that is relevant to the case of HNA group is political influence. China’s State Council, in 2008, approved that the domestic civil aviation industry was among the most strategic corporations in the state and that it would retain a more sheer control over nation-owned industries.

Some of the impacts that this regulation may have on HNA group being a privately administered venture include: restrictions in terms of flight rates, routes of entry and pricing; ability to form alliances; and strong rivalry with home carriers.

An Assessment of HNA Group Competitive Environment Porter’s five forces model of competition enlarges the ground for competitive analysis and takes in the threat of novel entrants, the negotiating power of buyers, the negotiating power of suppliers, the risk of alternate products and the power of competition among rivals.

The key rivals of HNA group are: Air China, China Southern Airline and China Eastern Airline. Some substitutes for HNA group include: Shenzhen Airline and Shanghai Airline. Shanghai Airline was the earliest limited liability airline in China which was instituted in 1985.

Originally, it functioned out of both Shanghai Hongqiao and Shanghai Pudong, before extending its routes to incorporate cities in South East Asia, Northeast Asia and Europe.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Conversely, Shenzhen Airline was instituted in 1995 and its airline focused chiefly on home passengers’ routes with a number of flights to Southeast Asia and North East Asia together with a few global freight operations. Furthermore, there are new entrants who joined the market in 2005, after the liberalization of the industry.

United Eagle, located in Chengdu, Okay Airways, located in Tianjin, and Spring Air located in Shanghai were the earliest to enter the market in this group. These have further hardened the rivalry. There is also a threat of entry by increased foreign careers, especially with the signing of the open skies agreement which is projected to come into effect by 2020.

The bargaining power of suppliers is temperate as HNA group is a vertically incorporated corporation. Alternate products are commodities from exterior industries that carries out analogous or the same function with products from the company.

Also, in the air travel business, the bargaining power of buyers is a vital feature. HNA group subsidizes its prices by offering discounts to its customers. To create its own competitive advantage, the group has efficiently extended its business value chain.

The Strategy of the Firm The key Strategies of HNA group include: the low cost strategy, expansion and formation of alliances. China did not have low cost carriers pending 2005. Nevertheless, Hainan Airlines was instituted in January 1993 and commenced its activities on 2nd May 1993. Its surfacing is thought to have had the outcome of lowering air transport.

With the intention of becoming a public stalk airline, Hainan has taken each chance since then to enlarge. After attaining Shanxi Airline in Taiyuan and Chang‘an Airline in Xian ten years ago, Hainan was in a position to expand bases in northwestern towns, which were components of China Northwest‘s and afterwards China Eastern regions after the two airlines surfaced.

All at once, Hainan obtained the Tianjin-based Xinhua and Beijing airlines, enabling it to get admission to Tianjing Airport and the neighbouring Beijing Airport. In 1990s, Hainan organized a number of aircrafts at Ningbo, an adjacent city to Shanghai, to create a home center in the East China region.

We will write a custom Case Study on External/Internal Case Analysis for HNA Group specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Therefore, a sequence of takeovers has enabled Hainan to have freights move to and from Xian and Taiyuan in the northwest, Hainan Island in the South, Ningbo in the east and Beijing and Tianjing in the north, which granted it the status of the fourth leading airline in China by the last part of 2002, in regard to routes travelled and destinations serviced.

In the course of the execution of its expansion strategy, price rivalry was an efficient and regularly-used means of obtaining market share, and as a result the existence of Hainan on a path may have had an analogous result to that of a low cost carrier by building pressure on the key carriers, and hence a model variable representing the existence of Hainan Airlines is integrated as a sign of price rivalry whenever a city- duo is supplied by this airline.

The bigger pressure on China Southern pricing may have originated from the verity that Hainan Airline‘s early base, Hainan county, is as well a center for China Southern Hainan division, and Hainan county is next to China Southern main hubbing airstrip, Guangzhou. While Hainan is not a low cost hauler, it seems to have forced prices in the areas in which it functioned.

Formation of alliances is another strategy of HNA Group.The Company formed an alliance with H


Employee Resistance in the Workplace Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Reasons for employees’ resistance

Effects of resistance

Harnessing resistance


Reference List

Introduction Although employee resistance and managerial control are core processes at the workplace, their operation tends to be by and large concealed and as such, it is quite hard to observe (Prasad


Steve Jobs’ greatest product: Apple II Report custom essay help

Steve Jobs’ death has devastated great masses of Apple products consumers as well as the business community itself.

According to Jackson’s article, Jobs had made an unprecedented impact on world’s electronic consumer market where his string of successful products like iPhone, iPad tablet and iPod have changed the whole arena of the PC world, electronics and the digital media industries thus he is one of the greatest CEOs of all time (Jackson, 2011, p. 1).

According to Jackson (2011), as many across the globe associate Jobs with his recent iDevices, Canadian consumers have had a different perception when it comes to prioritizing some of Jobs greatest Apple products. They consider Apple II to be Jobs greatest achievement to their world of computing.

A third of the Canadian consumer society credits the Apple II personal computer as having the greatest impact in their personal computer lives. Though the Canadians do appreciate Jobs’ mobile devices that helped register a new wave on the mobile device functionalities which blended its personal computer capabilities, they still take the Apple II to be the best device ever.

This means the Canadians’ priority of Apple II is at the essence of their classical approach from personal computers to iDevices thus their emphasis still remain gripped within their first experience with the Jobs Apple II innovation.

There is much that needs to be considered before analyzing any poll results especially in the consumer markets. For instance, there is need to evaluate the age groups (demographics) of the voters/respondents.

There is also the need to look at the experience of the voters or respondents with different gadgets (Apple product opinion poll – Asking Canadians). These are some of the many considerations that need to be in check before coming up with a candid conclusion on the research/poll findings.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Jackson’s article on the most preferred Apple product among the Canadian consumers which claims that Apple II personal computer is Jobs best product among the Canadians, can be said to be biased because he does not enlist the criterion chosen when determining the participants in the poll.

Additionally, the 1034 respondents (Jackson, 2011, p. 1) of the poll may not be a good enough representative number of technological consumers which is presumed to be over two thousand.

In the recent wave of Apple’s products, the iPhone 4s seems to have a lot of interest among the Canadian consumers and with such a surmountable interest, it may be among the best favored Apple products in the Canadian technological consumer segment in terms of experience and functionalities (Clandestine, 2011, p. 1) which in return, can surpass the Apple II preference.

Jackson’s conclusion on Apple II as the most preferred gadget in Canada is limited in view because it did not consider the changing retail market structures, the increasing use of technological stores (Apple Stores), the internet and the consumer market place, the growing presence of social networking as the new advertisement, consumer front and the changing trends in the tastes and preferences among consumers (Digital Life, 2011, p.1).

With the above variations in mind, it is clear that with time, the consumer perceptions change especially with new gadget experiences as well as diversified innovations on the same. Thus, the young generation may be more compelled to use the iDevices and this may be their first experience with Jobs products.

Reference List Clandestine, B. (2011). The N E W iPhone 5 / iPhone 4S. Hub-pages. Web.

Digital Life. (2011). iPhone 4S pre-orders record-setting 1 million in first day. Communication Technology – Blog. Web.

We will write a custom Report on Steve Jobs’ greatest product: Apple II specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Jackson, B. (2011). Steve Jobs’ greatest product the Apple II, Canadians say. IT Business Canada – Blog. Web.


Human Impact on the Environment Research Paper essay help: essay help

Human interaction with the natural environment has imposed diverse impacts on the natural resources, which has resulted to degradation and depletion of the biophysical surroundings, biodiversity and natural resources.

This poses the need for the implementation of effective policy regulations in order to address the negative influences that human activities impose on the natural resources such as water, air, soil and forests (Fimbel and Robinson 45).

Forests are a vital component of the ecosystem, and any human activity that results to its degradation imposes significant impacts on the overall functioning of the larger ecosystem. Recently, there have been increased concerns relating to the impacts of logging on the viability and sustainability of forest resources.

Illegal forest activities such as logging have imposed destructive influences of forests, and have resulted to noteworthy ecological and socio-economic impacts in countries where forests are a major natural resource.

Tropical forests are one of the most valuable ecosystems in the world; they are on the verge of their degradation and depletion due to human activities such as encroachment and logging (Turyahabwe 147). Biodiversity, plants and animals are most affected by the degradation of the forest resources.

In addition, forest degradation also imposes significant impacts on other natural resources such as soil and water. For instance, forest degradation results to increased soil erosion and degeneration, which in turn results to sedimentation in the water bodies, thus increasing the vulnerability of extinction of the water bodies.

From a global perspective, forest degradation imposes significant effects on the trends of changes in the global climate. The purpose of this paper is to evaluate the impacts of logging on the forest resources in Uganda and offer recommendations that can be used to mitigate and manage the identified impacts.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Logging in Uganda. Overview

Since 1990, the forest cover of Uganda has declined by 33 percent because of the increased need for farmlands, increasing human population and urbanization, which translates to an increased need for the forest resources such as timber and charcoal. An implication of this is that effective intervention strategies are needed to address the impacts of logging on the forest cover within Uganda.

According to a report released in 2009 by the National Environment Management Authority (NEMA), Uganda had at least 5 million hectares under forest cover during 1990, and by 2005, there were only 3.5 million hectares of forest cover remaining in the country.

This means that the forest resources in Uganda are declining at a rate of 2% per annum, which is currently the highest in the globe. According to estimates by NEMA, if deforestation in Uganda goes on at the present rate, the forests in the country will be completely depleted by 2050 (UNEP 148).

The primary reason for the forest depletion in Uganda is due to unchecked logging. The present forest coverage in Uganda is shown in the following figure 1

Figure 1: The present Forest Coverage in Uganda

Source: UNEP. Dead Planet, Living Planet: Biodiversity and Ecosystem Restoration for Sustainable… Nairobi, Kenya: United Nations Environment Programme, 2010.

Logging in Uganda can be divided into selective logging and clear-cut logging. Selecting logging mainly involves the harvesting of high-valued and commercial trees, leaving the trees that are of low value and not suitable for development of valuable forest products (UNEP 178).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Human Impact on the Environment specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Clear-cut logging on the other hand involves harvesting all the trees without selection of trees basing on their commercial value. In most cases, clear-cut logging is conducted for the main purpose of agricultural farming and land use. A common trend of logging in the context of Uganda is illegal logging, which is a booming trade in most parts of the country.

Illegal logging in Uganda has been facilitated by the personnel who have the convenience of doing so (Fimbel and Robinson 148). The case of illegal logging in Uganda is worsened by the fact that National Forest Authority creates a perception it lacks the capacity to address the challenges of forest destruction imposed by illegal logging.

In some documented areas, the NFA has disbursed licenses for logging to individual traders who have played a great deal in clearing forests for farm purposes. The following diagram shows the decline in forest area in Uganda and future projections.

Figure 2: Forest Area Per Capita in Uganda and future projections

Source: Turyahabwe, Tweheyo. “Does Forest Tenure Influence Forest Vegetation Characteristics? A Comparative Analysis of Private, Local and Central Government Forest Reserves in Central Ugandano access.” International Forestry Review (2010).

Socio-economic and biophysical impacts of logging on forest resources in Uganda

A significant proportion of the Ugandan population relies on forests and trees to different extents. In the country, it is estimated that timber saw logs are consumed at a rate of approximately 750,000 m3 per annum and a sustainable production rate of between 250,000 and 300,000 m3 (Turyahabwe 123).

The construction industry in Uganda, which has an annual growth rate of 10 %, is the main driver for the demand of logging. A significant percentage of timber logs access the market illegally, and this explains why Uganda has the highest rate of deforestation on a global perspective (Fimbel and Robinson 148).

Illegal logging also imposes significant ecological impacts in Uganda. The forest resource in the country hosts a wide range of biodiversity and forest tree species. The NFA reports that the forest in Uganda hosts about 315 mammal species, at least 1000 birds species and 1200 butterfly species.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Human Impact on the Environment by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In comparison from a global perspective, the Uganda forests hosts 11percent of the bird species and 7 percent of mammal species in the world. This implies a rich biodiversity that translates to increased tourist activity and economic value.

In addition, forests protect the water catchment areas, shores of water bodies and stability of steep slopes. This implies that logging imposes negative influences towards the sustainability of the ecosystem and other natural resources such as water, soil and air (UNEP 202). The following figure shows a map of Uganda depicting the dry land areas associated with logging.

Figure 3: a map of Uganda showing the location of dry land areas due to deforestation

Source: UNEP. Dead Planet, Living Planet: Biodiversity and Ecosystem Restoration for Sustainable… Nairobi, Kenya: United Nations Environment Programme, 2010.

Evaluation of Policies

Illegal logging in Uganda can be significantly attributed to poor forest governance practices in the country. Cases associated with an increase in illegal logging in Uganda is caused by high levels of corruption within the country’s forestry sector, political interference within the administration and management of forest resources, increased population urbanization and the changing viewpoints of the government regarding forestry (UNEP 147).

A weak interagency cooperation, insecurity and lack of sufficient capacity also play a role in increasing the extent of illegal clear-cut logging within the country. This section evaluates the effectiveness of the policies used by Uganda to address the problem associated with illegal logging (Turyahabwe 122).

Uganda has implemented laws that govern the aspect of land ownership and access to various natural resources. The Uganda’s forest policy was implemented with the main objective of enhancing governance and management of the forestry sector using partnerships that encourage transparency, efficiency and accountability within the stakeholders of the forestry sector.

The government policies for reducing mass destruction of forests allocate the responsibilities of forest management basing on responsibility (Turyahabwe 120). Generally, the forest policy has a goal of attaining sustainable socio-economic benefits from the forest resource in the country.

A provision of the forest policy in the country is the National Forestry and Tree Planting Act of 2003, which proposes a collaborative effort between the government and the public sector in forest management. In addition, the act serves to regulate forest activities associated with unchecked illegal logging and encroachment within the forest reserve.

The ineffectiveness of the forestry policy is Uganda can be attributed to policy inconsistencies, which is evident in the different positions of the government with regard to forestation in the country (UNEP 150). For instance, there is no precise law that governs the deployment of chain saws during the milling of timber, resulting into wastefulness.

In addition, the government is seeking to reform its functionalities with the principal objectives of addressing the national needs and enhance effective governance that results to rationalization (Derek and Nathaniel 1260). From a theoretical framework, this represent significant shifts regarding the role that the government has in the management and conservation of forest, lays emphasis on a facilitation role.

In practice however, the government responsibility in forest management has been distributed to the various government institutions that have conflicting interests and mandates. An outcome of this is a conflict between the institutions relating to the sectoral policies and the changing position of the government with regard to the forestry sector (Puts 1001).

The government also uses monitoring systems to address the issue of illegal logging. The country has established a timber monitoring system that keeps track of the timber from the forest to the vendor (Turyahabwe 121).

Forest products that are in transit should be from a documented source accompanied with the papers representing the legal requirements for such forest activities. Despite the refinement of the system to meet international standards, it has been effective in addressing cases of illegal logging due to the policy constraints and interference from the authorities that are supposed to regulate forest activities.

Alternative solutions and recommendations

The problems associated illegal logging in Uganda can be mainly attributed to ineffective policies with respect to forestry administration and management. In order to enhance the effectiveness of the policies, political support is needed in order to eliminate issues associated with political manipulation during policy implementation.

It is recommended that the government should offer an open and strong political support to the institutions associated with forest management and law enforcement. It is also recommended that a strong interagency cooperation and partnership can be helpful in combating illegal logging and ensuring that there are no cases associated with illegal logging in Uganda (UNEP 147).

Another potential solution to illegal logging in Uganda is to encourage private forestry. This can be initiated by encouraging tree planting on both private and public lands in order to reduce the pressure imposed on the natural forests. This is helpful in restoring degraded forests in the country (UNEP 151).

Conclusion Illegal forest activities such as logging have imposed destructive influences of forests, and resulted to significant ecological and socio-economic impacts in countries where forests are a main natural resource.

Tropical rainforests are one of the most valuable ecosystems in the world; they are on the verge of their degradation and depletion due to human activities such as encroachment and logging. Illegal logging in Uganda can be considerably attributed to poor forest governance practices in the country.

Cases associated with an increase in illegal logging in Uganda is caused by increased corruption within the country’s forestry sector, political interference within the administration and management of forest resources, increased population urbanization and the changing viewpoints of the government regarding forestry.

A weak interagency cooperation, insecurity and lack of sufficient capacity also play a role in increasing the extent of illegal clear-cut logging within the country.

Works Cited Derek, Pomeroy and Seavy Nathaniel. “An Overview of History and Development of Forest Policy and Legislation in Ugandano access.” International Forestry Review (2008): 1259-1269. Print.

Fimbel, Robert and John Robinson. The cutting edge: conserving wildlife in logged tropical forest. Columbia: Columbia University Press, 2001. Print.

Puts, Sist. “Reduced-impact logging: Challenges and Opportunities.” Forest Ecology


AIDS: From the Perspective of Sociology Expository Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Impact on Mankind

Highly Communicable Disease

The Stigma surrounding AIDS

A Social Problem


Reference List

The importance of sociology in the fight against AIDS has been mentioned several times by prominent researchers. Macionis and Plummer wrote: “The social implications of AIDS are so many that it becomes almost a test case for the relevance of sociology to health” (2008).

Macionis and Plummer are correct in the sense that AIDS is a disease which infection rate is strongly correlated to interpersonal relationships, such as sexual intercourse, blood transfusion and intravenous drug use. Furthermore, in the beginning of its evolution, the disease was associated with homosexuals.

Therefore, there is a need to incorporate insights regarding interpersonal relationships when it comes to the design of prevention programs. AIDS is a perfect example of the close link between health and sociology.

Impact on Mankind The importance of sociology in the study of AIDS is based on its unique attributes. There are many deadly forms of diseases that claim many lives. For instance, medical conditions like cancer, diabetes, and heart disease claim hundreds of thousands of lives.

But AIDS/HIV is the only highly communicable disease that has no known cure and, at the same time, can infect a person without developing any type of symptoms. This characteristic is the primary reason why AIDS has reached crisis proportions in many parts of the globe.

Consider, for instance, social impact of the infected person engaging in sexual relations with wife and other people. The virus is passed on from one person to the next without their knowledge. A prostitute can unknowingly pass the disease to her clients before the virus ends her life.

The infected wife continues to bear children infected with the virus without the family’s knowledge of impending doom. There is, therefore, the need to access sophisticated medical intervention processes in order to detect HIV/AIDS. But in poor countries the lack of technology is just half of the problem. People are even unaware of what AIDS means.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The inability to combat AIDS at the early stage is a sociological problem because the lack of education and the lack of medical facilities enhance the power of the disease. Paul Farmer in his book Infections and Inequalities: the Modern Plagues lamented the fact that people die not because there is no means to fight the disease, but simply because they have no access to decent healthcare.

However, mankind must not succumb to despair. It would be best to follow the suggested course of action of a man who saw the collision of sociology and medical science and he said: “One learns, I would hope to discover what is right, what needs to be righted – through work, through action” (Farmer, 1999, p. 18).

The first step is to acknowledge that medical science must work in tandem with the social science to develop strategies to combat HIV/AIDS.

Highly Communicable Disease The ability to stop the spread of the HIV virus should not be ignored by medical professionals. It is understandable that it is their primary duty to unlock the mystery of the AIDS virus; nevertheless, it is the job of social workers and social scientists to help people understand the disease on their own terms and through a language that they can comprehend.

For example, if the prevention strategy centres on abstaining from casual sex, than the social workers must be able to explain the logic behind the infection period. In other diseases, the infection period usually lasts for a short time, or a few months for some highly contagious diseases (Middleberg, 2003).

But in the case of HIV, the infectious period can last from 8 to 12 years (Middleberg, 2003). They have to understand the implication that HIV carriers can infect others during this time period without a clue that they have the virus.

The Stigma surrounding AIDS Aside from the need to explain the unique attributes of the AIDS virus, sociology also plays a major role when it comes to coping with the disease. It has to be reiterated that the stigma surrounding HIV/AIDS is rooted in its mode of transmission from one infected person to another human being.

We will write a custom Essay on AIDS: From the Perspective of Sociology specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It may be a contagious disease, but a person sitting next to an HIV carrier does not get infected. Furthermore, scientists were able to determine that the virus cannot survive in the open air or in the water – it is not an airborne or a waterborne disease (Piot


Critical Analysis of Avahan – the India AIDS Initiative Case Study scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Avahan AIDS Initiative




Introduction Since the discovery of AIDS a few decades ago, there have been numerous scientific breakthroughs when it comes to understanding the virus and its devastating medical consequences (Nelson


International Business Law Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

International law is normally a set of rules which are generally regarded and agreed upon as binding in relations that exists between nations (Brownlie, 2008). They are conventional and may often require the national legal systems to be in line with the provisions of the international rules.

They are mainly instituted by covenants, customs, resolutions, treaties as well as general principles of law. Other sources of international law include declarations of international organizations as well as writings of judges. The scope of international law also includes relations between individuals as well as international organizations.

The international law is facilitated by several international organizations. One such organization is the United Nations (UN) whose corporate social responsibility is to facilitate cooperation in international law. It ensures social progress of nations, human rights as well as achievement of world peace.

The World Trade Organization (WTO) is another international organization that facilitates international law. Its corporate social responsibility is to supervise as well as to liberalize international law.

Thus, it regulates trade between member countries; provides platform for dispute resolution process in international trade conflicts between member nations; provides framework for formalizing trade agreements as well as negotiating trade agreements.

World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) is another international organization under the UN that facilities international law.

Its corporate social responsibility is to ensure the protection of intellectual property among member states. It facilitates the transfer of technology such as industrial property especially to the developing countries so as to promote economic, social as well as cultural development.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More International Labour Organization (ILO) is a UN specialised agency whose corporate social responsibility is to promote social justice. It also promotes internationally recognized human rights as well as labour rights.

Basic concepts of international law include property, status, tort as well as obligation. Tort as is defined in international law refers to civil wrongs which are recognized by laws, both national and organizational, as basis for lawsuits.

Wrongs as defined in the tort law are injury or harm which constitute the grounds for making claims. The main aim of this law is to ensure that the wronged party is compensated for the damages incurred as well as to discourage others from engaging in similar crime. Tort law covers defamation, invasion of privacy as well as other economic crimes.

Multilateral obligation on the other hand refers to a legal duty whose bearer, which is normally a state or organization, becomes accountable to the international community (Amnesty International, 2011). Under international law, countries are expected to hand over suspected criminals to international courts or courts in other countries should they be requested to do so.

Property refers to any valuable thing that one possesses such as land and things attached to it. These are governed by property law. It also includes any movable object that a person owns; both tangible and intangible. The use of personal property is regulated by intellectual property laws.

Status is a concept used in international law to refer to different types of protection accorded to different categories of individuals as defined by the law (Cerone, 2002). Depending on the nationality, crime committed or the situation one finds him/herself in during a conflict, he or she must be accorded protection as is defined in international law.

International law has general principles which guide its operations. According to Dubay (2011) the principles of the international law have been derived from the law of merchant (lex mercatoria) which is a body of international trading principles.

We will write a custom Essay on International Business Law specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More These principles are applied in solving international commercial disputes. Principles of international law are built on the concept of standard international trading rules aimed at facilitating foreign commerce by steering clear of conflicts that could arise from the different local customs laws.

The general principles applied in international law therefore include obligation of conducting trade in good faith, non-discrimination of traders from different regions, reciprocity of obligations, as well as, negotiated dispute settlement.

The principles of international law govern international business, which again has several components. Trade, which is a basic component of international business, refers to exchange of goods, services as well as capital across territories which include international borders.

International business also comprises of risks which have to be dealt with. Managing risks refers to putting in place strategies and measures that enable multinational companies, businesses or countries leverage uncertainties or risks such as political risks and therefore protect their investments while taking advantage of opportunities in those areas.

Licensing agreements form basic components of international business. They generally refer to authorization by one party that allows the other (licensee) to use the licensed property. In most cases, the party in need of the license acquires it from authorities to allow for operation of an activity in an area.

Intellectual property rights on the other hand refers to legal rights which includes patents, trademarks, copyrights as well as other rights such as trade secrets or industrial design rights which are entitled to an individual, organization or institution due to intellectual activity in a specific field which may include literary, artistic or industrial field (Adler, Ostrow, Pisacreta


Microsoft Company and Competition Law Report essay help online

Summary of the Case In May 1998, the Department of Justice, 20 states’ Attorneys, and the District of Columbia sued Microsoft for anti-competitive and exclusionary tactics (Economides, 2001, p.1). They claimed that, Microsoft schemed to control the personal computer operating systems market.

The company had sought to extend control to the Internet browsing software. To attain this monopoly status, Microsoft engaged in acts that violated the antitrust law (Economides, 2001, p.2). The cases focused on claims presented mainly by Netscape Communications Corporation.

Netscape alleged that Microsoft had excluded its Navigator Web Browser from fair competition in the market. Moreover, Netscape moaned that Microsoft used its dominance windows to hamper Netscape’s entry into the Internet explorer browser market (Klein, 1999, p. 218).

Events and Arguments

The government’s arguments were that Microsoft had engaged in a number of anticompetitive acts to remain a dominant player in the Operating System business. They were-

Microsoft monopolized the market for the PC operating system and used anticompetitive acts to dominate and own the market illegitimately (Brinkley,


Concept of Downsizing Strategy in Business Research Paper essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Abstract


Literature Review

Downsizing and the Effects at the Individual Level

Downsizing and the Impact at the Organizational Level

The Effects of Downsizing at the Group Level

Analyses of the Effects on Downsizing in an organization


Works Cited

Abstract Most research studies on the effects of downsizing in an organization have focused on various levels and organizational aspects. Downsizing is defined as a move geared at improving productivity, competitiveness, and efficiency via the reduction of the labor force. Despite that this strategy is geared at enhancing effectiveness and competitiveness, many organizations implementing this strategy face the risk of a reduction in the innovation ability coupled with other consequences on the organization’s reputation.

This paper illustrates the impacts of downsizing at the organizational, group, and individual level. The purpose of this research is to provide a clear illustration of the impacts of downsizing on the three levels of an organization. Existing theories have been used to demonstrate the impacts of downsizing at these three levels. In particular, the paper focuses more on the impact of downsizing on the level of creativity and innovation in an organization.

This is because organizational development is measured by the implicated level of innovation and creativity, which has an impact on the reputation of the organization. In this regard, the paper illustrates the impact of downsizing on the individual creativity, the organization’s knowledge capacity, and the group’s knowledge creativity.

The implicated reputation of the organization with regard to the state of these three aspects equally will be examined. Previous studies equally have indicated the role of these three components in shaping innovation alongside various other components in an organization.

Introduction Faced with increased competition, many organizations are adopting strategies to earn a competitive advantage and at the same time improve efficiency. Initially, organizations would adopt strategies that would result into adaptive changes with minimal consequences. At the moment, most of the available strategies are characterized by negative consequences for the organization and the implicated individuals. Downsizing is apparently a preferred strategy for restructuring organizations.

This strategy is radical and at the same time of significant impact on the individual, group, and entire organization. The shift toward the use of this strategy is shown to have increased in the nineties where it featured among blue-collar employees. At the moment, many organizations are using this strategy when dealing with their workforce at various skill levels (West 113).

This strategy can be achieved via the use of different forms geared at reducing the number of employees. With the current economic struggles, this strategy has had consequences on the affected employees and the downsizing organization. The reasons in favour of this strategy are that many organizations are faced with stiff competition, high costs, technological demands, and strategic issues like outsourcing.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While examining the impacts of this strategy on an organization, many studies have not shown an increase in organizational performance following the adoption of downsizing. Many of such studies have examined the effects of downsizing on an organization’s intangible assets. Similar studies have shown that this strategy has various negative impacts on the implicated assets in an organization (Wagner 1).

For instance, most studies have indicated that a shift toward downsizing results into a reduced organizational knowledge capacity and social capital. Only a few of such studies have examined the impacts of this strategy on the corporate reputation and innovation. These two aspects are very important because they determine an organization’s competitive advantage in a corporate world.

At the moment most research studies seem to focus on the direct and indirect impacts of downsizing on an organization. Most indirect studies examine the effects of this strategy on the innovation and reputation of the organization through other factors in an organization (Stelios 1). A majority of the direct studies examine the effects of this strategy on the reputation and innovation in an organization when other factors are held constant.

Most indirect studies have indicated that if downsizing results into a positive effect on the firm’s financial performance there will be a positive impact on both the innovativeness and reputation of the organization. Empirical evidence clearly has indicated that downsizing does not improve performance at the individual and group level, which basically implies that this strategy has a negative impact on the innovation and reputation of an organization.

Literature Review Most researchers have indicated that downsizing is a reactive measure in response to organizational crisis. This measure is taken for the organization to achieve corporate renewal, especially with regard to the corporate reputation and innovation. Other studies indicate that downsizing is a proactive measure as opposed to a reactive measure. A particular study done in the 90s established that a large percentage of firms that adopted this strategy earned profitable gains in their operations.

The later may indicate that downsizing is both a reactive and proactive organizational measure geared at reducing various resources but mainly affecting human resources. This measure is taken for the purpose of reducing costs, improving profits, and organization competitiveness. Other benefits of using this strategy include better communication, empowerment of employees, and improved decision making.

Downsizing and the Effects at the Individual Level The effects of this strategy occur at the organizational, individual, and group, or team level. However, the most severe consequences of this strategy occur at the individual level. With regard to the later, the most affected individuals are those meant to leave. Downsizing basically puts their welfare at stake. A majority of the individuals leaving the organization cause an increase in the struggle for the availability resources in the community.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Concept of Downsizing Strategy in Business specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The entire process results into a drop in the income levels of the community making it hard for individuals to obtain their basic needs. For individuals who survive the exercise, various responses are expected. Research studies on individuals who survive a downsizing exercise indicate that a majority of these individuals experience a reduction in their motivation and general performance (Spreitzer and Mishra 767).

The effects of downsizing equally may affect the project leader when focus changes from the goals and objectives of the project to achieving financial gains (Wagner 3). The power to take risky measures subsequently may decline as the leaders of the project resist change. Further studies equally have indicated that downsizing may result into a disappearance of valuable skills, which has a negative impact on the problem-solving ability in an organization. The entire process equally may have negative impacts on the development of team building skills in an organization.

Further studies indicate that majority of those who survive the exercise experience feelings of job insecurity and anger. These effects amount into a reduction in loyalty feared to increase employee absenteeism, which may lower productivity. Downsizing may result into a need to adopt new procedures and processes alongside taking up new responsibilities for the surviving members (Spreitzer and Mishra 769).

This results into changes in relationships as the surviving members struggle to take up responsibilities initially held by those who left the organization following downsizing. Some of the responsibilities may require different skills, which may result in a reduction of the education levels of the surviving employees. The later is feared to result into a decrease in the level of specialization among the surviving individuals.

Because of these negative effects, the wellbeing of surviving individuals equally is affected as they struggle to handle the emerging stressing conditions. These aspects have a negative impact on the organization’s efforts geared at enhancing innovation and attaining a corporate reputation. This is because the implicated negative effects of downsizing equally will affect individual creativity.

Downsizing and the Impact at the Organizational Level For an organization, measures geared at downsizing are mainly related to the factors driving the need to downsize and how to approach the exercise. Although some studies have indicated that some firms have attained profits following downsizing, many organizations have reported numerous negative impacts following the adoption of this strategy. This has led many researchers into concluding that downsizing has more negative impacts as opposed to the positive impacts.

Innovation is key to the development of a firm’s reputation, which is credited for influencing the competitive advantage (Mirabal and De Young 23). The relationship between an organization’s level of innovation and its reputation in relation to the implicated competitive advantage has been examined in various fields in business literature. The implicated innovation in an organization is a shared responsibility that cuts across the senior management, the individual worker, and the group.

The main aspect of an organization likely to suffer major consequences following downsizing is the management. Because downsizing affects the organization’s workforce, the management is subsequently affected, especially at the middle level where a large percentage of the workforce is thought to be involved. A majority of the individuals laid off may hold vital management skills that determine the success of the organization (West 34).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Concept of Downsizing Strategy in Business by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Following a downsizing exercise, an organization is compelled to work with a minimal stock of competency, which subsequently may have a negative impact of the quality of the management. It is also expected of an organization with a lower stock of competency to rely upon line managers and staff at the operating level to handle corporate functions of the members of staff. Such an organization faces equally the risk of reduced links in communication, which is feared to slow the response to change (Wagner 5).

The organization’s senior management directly determines how individuals will work on their own and in respective teams. The management equally can influence the efficiency of the product concept despite that the individual worker and the team have a greater influence on the product concept (Stelios 3). The management in an organization is held with a key role of ensuring and supporting innovation.

The type of support offered by the senior management in an organization is directly related to the implicated level of innovativeness and the organization’s reputation. The employees in an organization working at an individual and group level receive financial and political support from the senior management to enable them achieve the goals and objectives of the firm. The management in an organization equally is held with the responsibility of appointing team leaders and setting goals for the organization.

The role of an organization’s senior management in spearheading innovation and the reputation of the firm is diverse. If the management deviates from the expected role, the organization is feared to experience a reduction in team performance. Extensive involvement of the senior management with formal controls lowers the autonomy and at the same time wastes product development time.

Downsizing has been shown to have various negative consequences on the reputation and innovativeness of an organization. A study that examined the effect of downsizing on corporate social responsibility indicated that there exists a negative relationship between downsizing and an organization’s social performance.

The later aspect is a measure of the existing reputation index of an organization. It is expected for firms that exhibit constant downsizing to exhibit minimal social responsibility. Such firms equally are characterized by a reduced reputation index. Similar studies have indicated that downsizing has a negative impact on the corporate responsibility of an organization.

The Effects of Downsizing at the Group Level At the project level where individuals work as a group or team, downsizing has been shown to have various negative impacts, especially on the team spirit. The existence of a group of individuals in an organization working together as a team has been shown to result into improved efficiency and information diversity. In addition, individuals working in a team or as a group equally increase the opportunities for learning.

This is because most teams will have individuals with different abilities, which provides an opportunity for learning from one another. The later is highly credited for improving the numbers of informal contacts within an organization. With the existence of a large diversity of information, an organization will highly benefit from the implicated diversity in information, which is a guarantee for improved problem-solving skills.

Downsizing is a threat to the benefits of working at a group level because it reduces the capacity of information and equally deprives the group of skills held by the leaving members (Mirabal and De Young 27). The impacts of downsizing on a group are mainly measured by a reduction in the level of creativity and general work performance. Downsizing results equally in a reduction in effective communication in the organization, which is feared to have negative impacts on the process of attaining the goals of an organization.

Downsizing in particular is responsible for breaking informal relationships in an organization. As a result of a break in communication networks following downsizing, most organizations exhibit reduced innovativeness because of an inevitable reduction in effective communication. Because very few individuals are likely to survive the exercise of downsizing, the ability to shift from one point to the other equally may be affected.

Because downsizing reduces the size of the group, few individuals are left to work on the same task, which makes it hard for the organization to attain the same performance efficiency. In addition, the process of downsizing has been shown to result into a drop in the organization’s stock of knowledge.

Analyses of the Effects on Downsizing in an organization In understanding the effects on downsizing on an organization, retrospective analysis of studies done in the past was used. These studies provide literature on the effects of downsizing on an organization with regard to the organizational level, the individual level, and the group. A model was created in which knowledge was a key organizing variable.

This is because knowledge is a vital component of the process of innovation, which has an impact on the reputation of an organization (Mirabal and De Young 31). It is held that innovation is a product of the combination of various forms of knowledge in an organization. In this model, it is presumed that downsizing has impacts on innovation and the reputation of an organization via its direct impacts on the level of knowledge.

The implicated model is illustrated in the figure below. The model is made up of the major components that affect innovation in an organization and subsequently contributes to the emerging reputation. In this model, the effects of downsizing to an organization are examined with regard to the organization’s stock of knowledge (Mirabal and De Young 40).

At the individual level, the effects of downsizing are examined with regard to the individual’s creativity, which determines the individual output in task performance. At the group level, the effects of downsizing are examined with regard to the knowledge creation process, which is determined by the contribution of the existing and new knowledge held by the members of a group in an organization.

In the literature examined, an organization’s stock of knowledge refers to the collection of competencies held by the workforce in an organization. This collection is also made up of the formal and informal relationships that occur among individuals in an organization.

Because of the difficulties associated with observing the flow of knowledge, the uniqueness of an organization is determined by the type of knowledge that exists within its premises. This aspect makes it hard to determine the expected impacts of downsizing on the reputation and innovativeness of an organization. This is because every organization is characterized by a unique stock of knowledge (Richner 1).

According to a majority of the theories and content presented in the studies examined, downsizing in an organization has been shown to result into an obvious risk of the reduction in the level of the stock of knowledge (Pinsonneault and Kraemer 191).

The departure of employees from an organization following a downsizing exercise has negative impacts on customer relationships and operations in an organization. For an organization made of groups of individuals characterized by minimal levels of knowledge, a downsizing exercise is likely to slow down the process of product development.

Because of the breakdown of informal relationship vital for developing innovative experiences, downsizing is feared to affect the intangible resources that promote innovation in an organization (Richner 18).

As the importance of the stock of knowledge in an organization increases, it becomes important for organizations to balance between the transfer of knowledge, the innovation, and reputation of their firm. Downsizing is basically a transfer of knowledge from an organization to the external environment, which implies a decrease in the organization’s stock of knowledge.

An efficient way of handling knowledge transfer within an organization is likely to be the transfer of knowledge within the organization as opposed to an external transfer of knowledge as in the case of downsizing (Pinsonneault and Kraemer 208). To attain a competitive advantage, a proper management of the stock of knowledge in an organization is very important.

Most competitive organizations are out to build on their stock of knowledge to sustain a competitive advantage. This implies that a majority of such organizations are characterized by strategies geared at empowering their stock of knowledge by maintaining the current workforce and outsourcing for more talents. In this meta- analysis, the literature examined proposes that downsizing has negative impacts on an organization’s stock of knowledge.

With regard to the individual creativity, a majority of the theories and literature presented indicate that both innovation and the reputation of an organization are highly determined by the creativity of the employees. According to the studies examined, the creativity of individual employees in an organization is key to the development of ideas in an organization (Stelios 18).

Innovation and the reputation of an organization are the main organizational aspects that are affected by a drop in individual creativity following a downsizing exercise. One particular study indicated that downsizing is responsible for the existence of poor risk takers in an organization.

This is because the surviving employees experience feelings of fear and job insecurity that affects their ability to make fast and effective decisions. Most of the surviving employees will have the fear of being victimized on the basis of their decisions. A majority of these employees will therefore not voice their opinions even in the event of a problem that requires urgent solving skills.

The individuals who survive a downsizing exercise are most likely to exhibit a greater amount of fear, which reduces their ability to communicate and act in a professional manner in the event of a problem (Pinsonneault and Kraemer 202). Downsizing equally is responsible for decreasing the motivation to work among the individuals who survive the exercise.

Among the organizational aspects greatly affected by downsizing is creativity. At the individual level, creativity is directly related to the level of innovation. Most of the literature examined for this purpose indicates that the innovativeness of an organization is highly threatened by a decrease in individual creativity.

This literature proposes that downsizing has a negative impact of individual creativity, which in turn affects the innovativeness of an organization and further threatens the organization’s reputation (Richner 19).

With regard to the process of knowledge creation at the group level, the literature examined indicates that knowledge creation is central to the process of innovation (Spreitzer and Mishra 777). According to this literature, the goods, and services offered by an organization are highly determined by the organization’s knowledge creation process. The process of knowledge creation is vital for connecting the other components of the model illustrated in this study.

The studies examined indicate that employees in an organization make use of their creativity to enhance the organization’s stock of knowledge. At the same, individuals make use of their creativity to develop the goods and services in a firm. The later is of impact on the reputation of an organization because the nature of goods and services common to an organization determine its market share and competitive advantage.

The process of knowledge creation is described as the ability to transfer knowledge within an organization and this process has been shown to occur in a continuous process. Effective transfer of knowledge highly depends of socialization. Because the process of downsizing limits the socialization of individuals in an organization, this process affects equally the transfer of knowledge.

The effective sharing of vital experiences is affected by the process of downsizing and the literature examined in this regard clearly proposes that downsizing has a negative impact on the process of knowledge creation (Caruana, Cohen, and Krenter 429).

Conclusion Despite that many organizations adopt downsizing as a strategy of improving efficiency and reducing costs, the model used in this study indicates that downsizing has more negative effects than the positive gains. The impacts of this strategy are more severe on the innovativeness of an organization and the reputation. Previous studies indicate the existence of a negative relationship between downsizing and the innovativeness of an organization.

However, only a few of such studies have examined the negative effects of this strategy on both innovation and the reputation of an organization. This explains why it was important to establish the relationship between downsizing and the reputation and innovativeness of an organization in this study while focusing at the three levels. The model used in this study was drawn from the existing theory on the management of innovation, the organization’s reputation, and knowledge management.

Previous research had indicated that these three components suffer the bulk of consequences following a downsizing exercise. The model used here is conceptual and may require further research for validation. The innovativeness and reputation of an organization are important tangible assets of an organization.

These two aspects are an organization’s source of a long-term competitive advantage. Downsizing has been shown to threaten these two intangible assets and is feared to have a negative impact on employees and other stakeholders in the organization. In this paper, the literature depicted and the model used in the analysis provide an indication of the various ways in which downsizing affects an organization at the individual, group, and organizational level.

Works Cited Caruana, Albert, Charlene Cohen and Kathleen Krenter. “Corporate reputation and shareholders intention: An Attitudinal perspective.” Brand Management 13.6 (2006): 429-440. Print.

Mirabal, Neil and Robert De Young. “Downsizing as a Strategic Intervention.” The Journal of American Academy of Business 1.1 (2005): 23-47. Print.

Pinsonneault, Alain, and Kenneth Kraemer. “Exploring the Role of Information Technology in Organizational Downsizing: A Tale of Two American Cities.” Organization Science 3.2 (2002): 191-208. Print.

Richner, Anders. “Organizational Downsizing and Innovation.” Journal of Business Administration 1.1 (2006):1-22. Print.

Spreitzer, Gretchen and Aneil Mishra. “To Stay or to Go: Voluntary Survivor Turnover Following an Organizational Downsizing.” Journal of Organizational Behaviour 23.8 (2002): 767-779. Print.

Stelios, Zyglidopoulos: “The Impact of Downsizing on Corporate Reputation.” British Journal of Management 16.1 (2005):1-30. Print.

Wagner, Jerry. “Downsizing Effects on Organizational Development Capabilities at an Electric Utility.” Journal of Industrial Technology 6.3 (2008):1-7. Print.

West, Gladys. The Effects of Downsizing on Survivors: a Meta-Analysis. Blacksburg, VA: Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University, 2000. Print.


Characters Analysis: “What You Pawn I Will Redeem” Essay (Critical Writing) a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Abstract

One character that is flat

One character that is round

One character that is Dynamic


Abstract “What you pawn I will redeem” is a short story about an Indian who shows extra ordinary strength in a tough time. Jackson the main character in the story is a homeless Indian who is on a quest to get back his grandmother’s regalia. This story has many interesting characters that collectively make the story an intriguing one. (Porter, 2006)

Been a homeless Indian in Seattle is enough problems but when you are faced with the task of raising nearly one thousand dollars in 24 hours it compounds a person’s problems. Jackson the central character was determined to get back his grandmother’s stolen regalia at the pawn shop but his care free friends always led him astray.

In the course of the story, the narrator tell how he spent any money he got on alcohol with his friends. Though he got the regalia at the end of the story but that was due to the sympathy of the pawnbroker who felt he had been through enough trouble. In this essay, we would be identifying and analyzing the various characters in the story.

One character that is flat Jackson’s friends in the story can be described as the flat and rigid characters throughout the entire story. Jackson was on the quest to save his grandmother’s regalia at the pawn shop and he indulged in different ventures to get the money the pawnbroker had requested.

But rather than be encouraged and motivated by his friends, they instead led him astray. (Porter, 2006) The friends are described as been rigid because all the wanted throughout the course of the story was to have fun at the expense Jackson’s happiness.

Perhaps if Jackson’s friends were not included in the story there would have been no humor in the story. He would have simply saved and paid the pawnbroker. Jackson’s friends as characters added humor to the entire story. There carefree attitude made the story hilarious. (Porter, 2006)

One character that is round The pawnbroker can be described as a round character in this story due to his complex attitude. The pawnbroker had initially insisted that Jackson had to come up with the sum of $999 before lunch time. This had prompted Jackson to plot different ways of coming up with the money. (Porter, 2006) However, Jackson spent whatever he was able to raise on food and drinks for his friends.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More At the end, the same pawnbroker who had insisted that Jackson came up with the money within a stipulated time frame changed his mind. This character enhances this story in a very positive way.

If the pawnbroker had not given Jackson a time frame, he would have possibly been relaxed. The entire story is about showing strength in the face of adversaries and the pawnbroker made Jackson realize his potential. (Porter, 2006)

One character that is Dynamic Jackson can be defined as the dynamic character in the story due to various reasons. His youthful exuberance and carefree attitude even in tough situations go a long way to show his type of person. At the beginning of the story, Jackson went to the pawn shop with his two friends where he saw the regalia he believed belonged to his grandmother.

He wanted the regalia back in the family but the pawnbroker asked him to get $999 within a short time frame. (Porter, 2006) This prompted him to devise ways to get the money rather than work for it. But after going through all that, he ends up spending the money on food and drinks. This change in character makes Jackson a very dynamic character.

Jackson’s attitude was meaningful and believable. His character is meaningful because he went extra miles trying to get his grandmother’s regalia back. It is also believable for a person to squander money he/she saved for something. Jackson squandered the money due to the influence of his friends. (Porter, 2006)

Reference Porter, S. (2006) 30/30: Thirty American stories from the Last Thirty years. Purdue University: Longman


Fear Appeals in Advertising Term Paper custom essay help

Advertisers use fear appeals in their commercials to emphasize negative results that can happen unless the consumer changes an attitude or behavior. The use of fear appeals is widespread.

Advertisers use fear appeals to encourage social policy issues such change to healthier habits, stopping smoking, engaging in regular exercise, using contraception, eating a balanced diet and drinking without driving (Pope 2). Commercials also use fear appeals to influence social risks associated with one’s success and opposite sex, career and others (Solomon 334).

Fear appeals work when advertisers present a moderate amount of fear and a solution to the problem is present in the advertisement. Too much amount of fear does not result into change since the audience tends to deny the existence of such threats as a way to rationalize the danger.

A thorough elaboration of fear may interfere with the communication of the intended change behavior to the audience. The audience may think that the advertisement is not for him or her and pays less attention to it. Use of fear works better when the sources are highly credible.

A weak threat is equally ineffective. This can occur has a result of insufficient demonstration of the risky consequences of involving in the behavior.

For instance, the use of scary methods in getting teens to stop their consumptions of alcohol or drugs is not that effective. Teenagers simply tune out the message or deny the relevancy of the message. The use of social threat is a more effective strategy in adolescent than use of scary strategy (Baron 21).

Fear appeals should not be confusing to the audience. The message and emotional response should be consistent. Greater fear may not necessarily results into greater persuasion.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Different people react distinctively to the same amount of fear. Advertisers know that strongest threats have less effect on their perceived audience than moderated fear. Therefore, a more concrete approach to fear appeals is necessary before advertisers make a definite conclusion concerning the effects of fear appeals on consumer behavior.

In the YouTube video advertisement, Do not Drink and Drive, uploaded by Torn Sue in October 17th 2009, the advertisement is shocking but gets the point home. The advertisement is using fear appeal to highlight effects of drinking and driving, and subsequently to make drunk drivers change their habit.

Drinking and driving is a social issue. The advertiser uses kids playing to show the negative effects of drinking and driving. Even the kids are not so secure from drunk-drivers. People commended the commercial for its effective delivery of the message to the target audience.

However, not everyone appreciated the commercial advertisement. Some critics argued that the message is vague since the advertisement failed to show the driver drunk. The fact that the driver looked sideways and was humming along the radio failed to convince the audience.

They argued that many people do this and get accidents even if they are sober. Therefore, drinking was not a factor to a resulting accident. They also criticized the exaggeration the commercial used to show a car flipping over a fence simply by hitting another car. To them, it is simply being reckless.

The magazine Women


Occupational Health and Safety Procedures at Swinburne University of Technology Report (Assessment) college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Introduction The welfare and safety of employees should be taken seriously as they are key contributors towards an organization’s achievement of its goals. Occupational health and safety is a discipline concerned with ensuring the health, safety, and wellbeing of employees (International Labour Organization 2011).

It not only protects the safety of employees but also that of employers, family members, co-workers, suppliers, customers, and the members of the public likely to be affected by the organization’s work environment (Barnett-Schuster 2008).

Background Information Swinburne University of Technology is an educational institution founded in 1908 by Honourable George Swinburne. It is one of the dual sector institutions.

The university offers higher education and Training and Further Education qualifications. It is located in Melbourne, Australia and has over 14.000 students enrolled in Training and Further Education and over 16,000 in higher education. The university has five campuses in Australia and one in Malaysia.

Interview Questions The following questions were posed during the workplace observation in order to determine the institutions compliance with occupational health and safety procedures.

Does Swinburne University of Technology have any policies and procedures to safeguard the employees’ health and safety?

Are the policies and procedures readily accessible by all the employees?

What hazards are the Swinburne University of Technology employees and students exposed to in the daily conduct of their duties?

What preventive measures has the institution put in place to eliminate or reduce the risks that the employees and students are exposed to?

Are there occupational health and safety training programs at Swinburne University of Technology?

Are there occupational health and safety representatives at Swinburne University of Technology? If there are, do they effectively perform their functions?

What practices do the employees follow in order to ensure their safety while working at the institution?

What laws should the University’s employers, supervisors and employees adhere to in the daily conduct of their business?

Potential Hazards Swinburne University of Technology hires several contractors to do tasks like maintenance and repair on both long term and short term basis. These contractors and students are exposed to various heath hazards while performing their duties.

Firstly, the contractors face the risk of back injury while lifting heavy loads. They lift construction and repair materials. Workers can also get injuries from machines used in performing various tasks.

These machines can injure a person by cutting off body parts because they move very fast. The students can also get accidents if they walk near construction sites in the institution, for instance, building blocks can fall on them.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Employees and students also face the risk of slipping and falling because of wet floors. Some falls can cause very serious injuries to the employees. Others can even be fatal.

During repair and maintenance, a lot of noise is produced. Therefore the employees are exposed to high levels of noise everyday as they work. This is not healthy as it can negatively affect their hearing ability.

Fork lifts that are mainly used in lifting loads can cause health hazards to employees if not properly driven. They can injure the employees working nearby or students walking around the compound if the people using them are not cautious.

Students face the risk of getting injuries or inhaling poisonous substances when performing various experiments in the laboratory.

Recommended solutions to the hazards The contractors should undergo proper training before performing any tasks to ensure both their safety and that of the students. (Swinburne University of Technology 2011).

The equipment used should be properly licensed and in good working condition to avoid causing accidents. Construction sites should be out of bounds for students and other people who are not involved in the construction process. This is to prevent hazards like objects falling on them and injuring them.

The problem of back injuries can be minimized through training the employees on safe working procedures, for instance having the correct posture when lifting heavy loads.

We will write a custom Assessment on Occupational Health and Safety Procedures at Swinburne University of Technology specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Enhancements can also be applied. This involves using equipment like cranes to lift heavy loads. Job rotation can also help to reduce the length of time that the employees are exposed to the risk of back injuries. (Gilles 2003).

Employee contact with the machines can be prevented through machine guarding. This means that the machines must have covers to prevent them from injuring the workers. (Hughes and Ferret 2010).

To mitigate the hazard of falling because of wet floors, the working sites should have proper drainage to avoid having any liquid on the floor. The contractors should also wear shoes with slip-resistant soles to prevent them from slipping and falling. In addition, moist areas should be dried before any work begins to reduce the risks of falling and getting injured in the process. (Dalton 1998).

The students should not carry out any experiments in the absence of a trained lecturer to guide them. This will prevent unnecessary accidents from occurring in the laboratories. They should also be trained on the action to take in case of a leakage of poisonous gases.

Respirators should be made available for use in case of a leakage. Laboratories should be properly ventilated to avoid cases of accumulation of poisonous gases which can endanger the lives of students. (Parlar and Greim 2009).

The company should make hearing protection devices available to the employees and strict rules should be put in place to ensure that those devices are worn by all the employees working in areas with high noise levels. In addition, the employees should undergo medical checkups regularly to test their hearing.

The institution should also come up with ways to reduce the noise levels in working areas. Furthermore, employees should be educated on the effects of exposure to high levels of noise and how to protect themselves. (Erickson 1996).

Forklift operators should have proper driving skills and knowledge about the principles of safety while driving them. Unqualified fork lift drivers can injure students and other employees walking in the compound by running them down.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Occupational Health and Safety Procedures at Swinburne University of Technology by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Besides, the forklifts should be checked before use to ensure that they are in a good working condition and that the safety equipment is operational. Faulty forklifts should be reported so that the condition can be corrected before use.

On the other hand, forklifts that produce carbon monoxide should have their engines toned according to the instructions of the manufacturer to reduce production of the gas (United States Bureau of Labour Statistics and United States Veterans Administration 1982).

Occupational Health and Safety Policies and Procedures At Swinburne university employees are a valuable resource in contributing to the success of the institution. Therefore the institution is committed to providing a safe working environment for them.

Both the students and the employees need to be protected from any occupational risks. The university has a comprehensive and formalized occupational health and safety policy and procedures to ensure the safety of the employees and students.

The institution conforms to occupational health and safety principles.Swinburne University has an occupational health and safety policy that ensures the fulfilment of legislative requirements of the institution.

The policy also ensures the protection of employees and students from environmental pollution caused by noise, air pollution and improper storage and disposal of dangerous substances.

The policy also defines the responsibilities of every member of the institution in ensuring the adoption of proper occupational health and safety procedures.

Swinburne University has put in place several procedures to ensure the safety and health of employees and students. The institution promotes safe work practices and closely monitors the health and safety performance to ensure positive progress.

Furthermore, the institution undertakes procedures of detecting hazards and takes steps to eradicate them. The students, staff and management are expected to conduct their respective health and safety responsibilities. The institution assesses the safety and risks of each job opportunity and this directs the institution in mitigating the risks that come with each role. Therefore the safety and health of all the members of the institution is safeguarded.

All newly hired contractors receive rigorous safety training relevant to their roles so that they can carry out their duties safely. They are also informed about the safety and health policies of the institution.

Students are also trained in order to go about their studies in a safe environment. The occupational health and safety policy and procedures are accessible to every employee at the Policy and Procedures Directory of the institution.

Health and safety performance is reviewed and monitored regularly to ensure conformity with the heath and safety regulations by all the employees and students. The effectiveness of the Occupational Health and Safety system is also monitored.

Occupational Health and Safety Representative Swinburne University has six campuses and each of them has a health and safety employee representative. These represent all employees in formal committee meetings.

They meet every week to discuss various health and safety concerns and then notify the management of any arising matters. They assist in the process of monitoring and advising on occupational health and safety procedures to the employees.

Employee Specialized Practices The employees are supposed to avoid causing any hazards by seeking advice before undertaking any unfamiliar task or experiments. In addition, all accidents must be promptly reported to the seniors.

They should also make sure that they use the available safety and protective equipment when carrying out tasks that require this. They should also ensure that they know the proper procedures to follow in case of an accident in order to ensure their safety.

Legal Responsibilities of Employers, Supervisors and Employees The legal responsibilities of employers at Swinburne University include, ensuring a safe working environment for the employees, ensuring that employees are not exposed to any risks during the work processes, providing training and the information necessary to do the job and providing enough facilities for the welfare of employees.

Employers should also meet minimum requirements of employees’ leave. On top of that, they should conduct proper hiring practices by avoiding malpractices like racial and gender discrimination. (The Institution of Engineering and Technology 2010).

The legal responsibilities of supervisors include training employees, encouraging positive behaviour, investigating accidents, and avoiding employee harassment and discrimination of any kind at the work place. Employees should feel safe and healthy to ensure that they are productive and meet their targets.

The legal responsibilities of employees include taking care of their safety and health, avoiding putting other employees or members of the public at risk during work operations, cooperation with the employer and following safety and health policies.

The Company’s Occupational Health and Safety System Features Swinburne University‘s occupational health and safety system has unique features as it integrates quality, environment, loss prevention and occupational health and safety. It ensures the management of risks in the institution’s activities by setting operational controls which are in line with international standards.

In addition the system outlines the occupational health and safety responsibilities of the management, staff and students. Each member of the institution is expected to take a personal initiative to ensure the safety of every member of the university in conducting their duties.

Conclusion Swinburne University is committed to ensuring the safety and good working conditions for their employees and students. From the workplace observation, it is evident that there are comprehensive occupational health and safety policies and procedures to safeguard the health of the employees and students in the institution.

The institution therefore adheres to the legal, ethical and moral obligations by ensuring the employees work in a safe and healthy environment. The employees and students therefore enjoy a safe and healthy environment that is convenient and conducive for productive learning to take place.

Reference List Barnett-Schuster, P., 2008. Fundamentals of International Occupational Health and Safety Law. New York, Aberdeen University Press.

Dalton, A. J. P., 1998. Safety, Health and Environmental Hazards At The Workplace. Great Britain, Cengage Learning EMEA.

Erickson, P.A., 1996. Practical Guide to Occupational Health and Safety. USA, Elsevier.

Gilles, T. 2003. Automotive service: Inspection, Maintenance, Repair. Great Britain, Cengage Learning.

Hughes, P., and Ferrett, E. 2010. Introduction to International Health and Safety at Work: The Handbook for the NEBOSH International General Certificate. Great Britain: Routledge.

International Labour Organization. 2011. Your health and safety at work. Introduction to occupational health and safety Web.

Parlar, H. and Greim, H., 2009. The MAK-Collection for Occupational Health and Safety: Part III: Air Monitoring Methods. Germany, Wiley-VCH.

Swinburne University of Technology. 2011. Information for Contractors. Web.

The Institution of Engineering and Technology. 2010. Legal Responsibilities and Penalties Web.

United States Bureau of Labour Statistics and United States Veterans Administration. 1982. Occupational Outlook Handbook. USA, The Bureau.

Appendix: Interview questions Does Swinburne University of Technology have any policies and procedures to safeguard the employees’ health and safety?

Yes. The company has comprehensive and formalized occupational health and safety policy, procedures and emergency response procedures to ensure the safety of the employees.

Are the policies and procedures readily accessible by all the employees?

The occupational health and safety policy and procedures are accessible to every employee at the Policy and Procedures Directory of the institution.

What hazards are the Swinburne University of Technology employees and students exposed to in the daily conduct of their duties?

The employees are exposed to the risks of back injuries due to lifting, injuries from machines like conveyors and beverage fillers, the risk of slipping and falling in filling rooms because of wet floors, exposure to gases like carbon dioxide, and high levels of noise during the bottling process.

What preventive measures has the institution put in place to eliminate or reduce the risks that the employees are exposed to?

Health and safety performance is reviewed regularly. The institution offers safety and protective devices to protect the employees and students from risks while performing some tasks. The institution also promotes safe work practices and closely monitors the health and safety performance of the employees to ensure positive progress.

Are there occupational health and safety training programs at Swinburne University of Technology?

All newly hired employees receive rigorous safety training relevant to their roles. They are also briefed about the safety and health policies of the institution.

Are there occupational health and safety representatives at Swinburne University of Technology? If there are, do they effectively perform their functions?

There are Occupational health and safety representatives who meet regularly to discuss various health and safety concerns and notify the management of any arising matters. They monitor and advise employees on occupational health and safety procedures.

What practices do the employees and students follow in order to ensure their safety while working at the institution?

Employees should seeking advice before undertaking any unfamiliar task or experiments. In addition, all accidents must be promptly reported to the seniors. They should also make sure that they use the available safety and protective equipment when carrying out tasks that require this.

What laws should the University’s employers, supervisors and employees adhere to in the daily conduct of their business?

The institution should ensure a safe working environment for the employees. The employees should take care of their safety and that of other employees and members of the public during work.

The supervisors should train employees, encourage positive behaviour, and prevent harassment and discrimination of the employees. The employees should avoid putting themselves or their colleagues in danger.


Pantera Company’s Strategic Management Case Study custom essay help: custom essay help

Overview This essay examines the strategies adopted by Panera in growing its market share from a small firm to the current status it enjoys. Several strategies were implemented at Panera as outlined below:

The best strategy implemented by Panera was through its product offering. The company offers high quality meals that are produced on order. Its product differentiation separates it from other fast food restaurants which offer low grade burgers and fries. Its restaurants offer fresh bread, soups and salads which resonate easily with the customers’ dietary needs (York 25).

Panera owns several restaurants that are located in different strategic locations. Its restaurants’ location is an important strategy that ensures customers have easy access to these restaurants.

Franchising was vital in the growth of Panera in the USA; this is because the franchised stores helped in selling the Panera brand. Moreover, the company focused on increasing transactions per store/restaurant. The company’s main focus was getting more money per customer instead of getting more customers.

Panera invested a lot in offering in quality products and thus it changing itself as a high-end brand. The company’s products are pricey since the company believes in offering quality products at premium cost (Horovitz 1).

Panera core strategy lies with its customers in relation to serving the customers’ needs. Panera offers fast service and high quality food which contributed to its high customer growth numbers.



Global forces and Western European brewing Industry Essay essay help online free

PESTEL analysis of Western European Brewing Industry Political factors

Unfavorable attitude of European governments toward beer and alcoholic beverages, in general. These products are regarded as demerit goods which means that their consumption has to be restricted. This results in numerous legal regulations on the advertisement, marketing, and production of such products1.

Economic factors

The decrease in consumption of beer. In many European countries such as Belgium, Denmark, Norway, France, and the United Kingdom bear consumption level dropped significantly within the period between 2000 and 2007.

Merges in the industry due to global pressure of consolidation.

Economic recession in Europe and the United States2.

Social factors

Growing concern about the dangers of alcohol consumption.

The changes in the buying behaviors of consumers, especially the growing popularity of wines3.

Increasing demand for alcohol-free beer.

Low birth rates in European countries4 and increase of population In Asian countries and India.

Technological factors

The development of new technologies which can facilitate the production and storage of beer. For instance, one can mention those technologies that improve beer recovery process or filtration5.

Environmental factors

The demands to make brewing process more eco-friendly, for example, we can speak about the necessity to reduce the discharge of chemicals6.

The necessity to develop an alternative to conventional bottles or aluminum. cans. The main purpose is to make beer containers more recyclable. At the given moment, the influence of these environmental factors is not very strong but this issue can become much more urgent within the next two decades.

Legal factors

Stronger enforcement of laws prohibiting underage consumption of alcohol. For instance, one can mention such plan “Think 21” which is aimed at reducing the availability of alcoholic beverages to adolescents7. Similar laws and restrictions are imposed throughout Europe and the United States.

Tight governmental control over the production of beer.

Porter’s Five Forces The threat of new entrants

Currently entry barriers are very high because brewing industry becomes more consolidated, and the majority of the companies operating in this market are economies of scale.

According to the data, presented in the case study there are ten international brewing companies which control more than 30 percent of global market share8.

These corporations can pursue cost-leader policies, and new-comers will find it difficult to compete with them. Therefore, the threat of new entrants is not significant.

The threat of substitute products

Wine and some non-alcoholic beverages can be viewed as substitute products; however, drinking beer is rooted in the traditions of many countries and it is important from social point of view. This is why it is rather unlikely that this beverage will lose its popularity. Hence, the threat is more or less moderate.

The power of suppliers

The main suppliers of brewing companies are the packaging manufacturers and agricultural sector. Each of these industries is highly concentrated, for instance, there are only three can producers in the UK9, and breweries dictate their terms to them. The same thing can be said about the suppliers of barley or grains. Thus, the power of suppliers is relative strong.

The bargaining power of customers

The main buyers are supermarket chains such as Tesco or Carrefour. Brewing companies sell them approximately 67 percent of their products10. Thus, these customers are very important to breweries and they can make concessions to them, especially if we are speaking about the price. Thus, the power of customers is very strong and it can become even stronger.

The Intensity of competition

The industry is very concentrated and the competition between companies is very intense. In 2009, ten brewing companies produced more than 60 percent of global beer volume11. Under such circumstanced competitive advantages can be gained by introducing new products such as fruit-flavored beer.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Discussion PESTEL analysis and the study of Porter’s Five Forces indicate that brewing companies must be aware of the following challenges. Legal and social factors will produce the most adverse effects on this industry.

These companies should remember about changing lifestyles and increasing awareness about the dangers of alcohol consumption. The same thing can be said about legal restriction on the marketing of beer. This is why they need to emphasize the healthfulness of their products.

They must prove that beer should not be viewed by the governments as alcoholic beverage and a demerit good. In the future, they may have to increase the production of alcohol-free beer. Secondly, they should explore new markets for their products, especially in such countries as China or India.

The thing is that the consumption of beer in Europe can decline even more due to the decrease of population in this region. Finally, these companies should develop their own distribution networks in order to diminish their dependence on super or hypermarkets. At this point, they are the main customers of brewing companies.

The impacts of global forces on specific companies Anheuser- Busch InBev

The products of Anheuser- Busch InBev are well-positioned in the markets of different counties. This company possesses such famous brands as Stella Artois, Beck’s or Budweiser. Its main strengths are well-developed supply chain and close cooperation between various divisions 12.

This company ensures that the best practices are quickly shared across different breweries. However, it has some weaknesses as well. They have to manage more than 300 brands and this is quite a challenging task. Secondly, the legal status of this corporation is not secure since in many countries is viewed as monopoly.

Greene King

The main strength of Greene King is that it has its distribution network. This company runs more than 200013 pubs across the UK. Hence, they are less dependent on hypermarkets. Moreover, many British customers feel strong affiliation to this brand. However, there are several significant weaknesses.

We will write a custom Essay on Global forces and Western European brewing Industry specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More First, this company has not fully explored international markets and in the future they can suffer losses due to the decline of beer consumption in the UK. Additionally, in the recent year public image of this company suffered significantly, because it is accused of monopolizing the UK market and closing many local breweries.


The key strength of this company is that it is very well-posited in China, one of the largest markets in the world. Furthermore, this company has successfully entered European and American markets.

The main weaknesses of this organization are more related to its external environment. Tsingtao operates in a very regulated market and it can be controlled by the Chinese government. Finally, some of its brands are not familiar to European customers.

Reference List Blee M


Evolution of Childhood Essay (Critical Writing) essay help online: essay help online

True, conventional historians and official biographers have been writing about children over the years. Yet, the content of most of their work is practically fictional, devoid of any useful information and only contains distorted facts of childhood in the periods that they recount.

In Evolution of Childhood, Lloyd DeMause accuses most social historians, whose core work is to expose reality of social conditions in the past, of being apologists for brutal child abuse. He observes correctly and vindicates the fact that what constitutes infanticide, abandonment, swaddling and all other forms child abuse is a matter of objective fact.

Evolution of Childhood reviews the subject from a psycho-historical perspective by studying the psychological motivations surrounding the history of childhood. It introduces psychological principles and integrates insights of psychotherapy to understand the emotional origin of adult-child social behavior in the past. By so doing, DeMause attempts to provide an answer to the principal questions of comparative childhood history, which have been ignored for so long by conventional historians.

In his historical analysis of childhood, DeMause draws attention on those moments which often affect the psyche of the next generation. He explains the three possible adult reactions to a child’s needs: projective, reversal and empathic reactions, which ultimately go a long way to determine the way parents treat their children. The psycho-historian explains how historical change in human psyche has resulted in today’s more empathic parental care.

He brings out the concept of psycho-class or psychogenic modes, which provides an insightful periodic explanation of the influence of the society’s development on parent-child relation and style of childrearing.

DeMause describes six major psychogenic child-rearing modes in the most advanced countries. The psychogenic modes range from the time of antiquity to the mid twentieth century, and explain how parents began to develop the increasing capacity to empathize with their children.

Infanticide mode occurred between antiquity to the forth century A.D. Lloyd provides objective, factual information which shows that childrearing during this period was characterized by high infanticide rates, incest, rape, body mutilations, torture and rituals in which children were offered as sacrificial lambs.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This period was closely followed by the Abandoning mode (forth to thirteenth century A.D) which was characterized by “swaddling, fosterage, apprenticeship”, and out side wet nursing (Dunlop 45). Ambivalent mode which occurred from the end of the Abandoning mode to seventeenth century saw the introduction of the very first child protection laws. Childrearing during this period, however, was still marked by shorter swaddling, enemas and child beating.

During the succeeding Intrusive mode in the eighteenth century, both parents were actively involved in childrearing. Most parents wanted the best for their children and gave them more attention. Yet, a handful of parents during this period were still keen on controlling the children’s behavior and minds. Though there were no more terror threats against the child, repression of a child’s sexuality and early toilet training was common place.

Parents during Socializing mode, in the twentieth century, enjoyed playing there role in child care. Though harsh physical discipline had stopped by this time, parents “still spanked there children and insisted on instilling parental goals” through psychological manipulation (Miller 38).

Childrearing in Helping Mode of modern day is characterized by more unconditional love and less psychological manipulation. In fact, children raised during this psychogenic mode are unarguably open-minded, physically fit, responsible and more sympathetic to others in the society. Compared to children in any other earlier generation, evidence shows that today’s child is gentler, strong-willed, never or less depressed and generally well bred.

Works Cited Dunlop, Jocelyn. English Apprenticeship and Child Labor, London: Allan Lane, 1912. Print.

Miller, Daniel. The changing American Parent: A study in Detroit Area, New York: Little Publishers, 1958. Print.


Small Medium Enterprise Report essay help online free

The definition of ‘Small Medium Enterprise’ is a complex issue and in most cases, it would vary from country to country, depending on certain variables. In most cases, it would depend on who is giving the definition and what they regard to be SME in their economical background. Generally, SME or Small Medium Enterprise refers to companies or businesses whose overall turnover is below certain levels or limits.

Some of the variables used in defining SMEs in most regions include things such as whether the enterprise is a service-based or goods-producing business, its size, and probably the number of workers they employ (Acs and Morck, 1997).

In Canada, for instance, Small business refers to businesses whose employees’ rate is below 100 in a goods-producing business or less than 50 employees for a business which is based on services. Anything beyond these cut-offs, but one that doesn’t exceed an employee rate of 500 would be classified under middle-sized enterprises.

Small-medium enterprises are observed to be more than large enterprises or businesses in most developed and developing economies world-wide (Fink, 1998). The most typical characteristics of Small Medium Enterprises in the whole world is determined by factors such as the size of business or its independent ownership; whether it’s a family enterprise or a group investment.

As it would be observed, there are many potential benefits that can be associated with SMEs and this explains the need for a vibrant small and medium-sized enterprise sector in any developing nation. One of the common key benefits of this type of enterprising is that they are important sources of employment in a country, especially for low-skilled labor.

Another outstanding benefit of SMEs is in their more flexibility capacity compared to large corporations and this makes them more sustainable. SMEs are also observed to have the significant advantage of being less mobile compared to large corporations; a feature which makes them more sustainable for development and advancements in emerging economies.

In countries such as the United States, various types of business administration would set different levels of businesses, based on ownership structure, industry type, revenue produced, and the number of employees (Asheim, 2007). As observed previously in this paper, there is hardly any universally accepted definition for SMEs and in that case, classifications of SMEs in the U.S. apply differently in various types of businesses.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Basically, the United States International Trade Commission has defined SMEs as corporations that employ fewer than 500 employees, regardless of the context of the business (Chiao, 2007). In USA, SMEs are classified into two main classes known as the product SMEs and the service SMEs. Generally, both categories plays a crucial role to the development of the country’s economy and for that reason, the role of SMEs can never be underestimated at any value.

According to the U.S. International Trade Commission, SMEs contribute about one third of the total exports in merchandise products every year, with Canada being the largest destination for most of these exports (Man, 2007). SMEs have indeed proved to be a major source of employment in USA, by constituting for more than half of the private sector employment, thus leading to a constant growth of employment in the country.

More importantly, SMEs have always been significant contributors in matters of product, services, and processes innovations in the country. For these reasons, SMEs are highly regarded as promising initiatives that can effectively support the country towards a complete recovery from the longstanding effects of the 2007 financial crises, among other economical turbulences such as the current high rates of unemployment.

According to Qian (2002), the business environment in USA offers very slight challenges to the SMEs compared to large multinationals, and this provides the SMEs with a strong platform for sustainance.

A good example of an SME company in USA is Integrity Applications, Inc (IAI) established in the year 1998. This is a private engineering and software services company with a nationwide recognition across the states.

The business is categorized under ‘Consultant of Systems Engineering’ and is located in Chantilly, VA. Some of the company’s products and services include Space Systems engineering, Software Systems Engineering, Corporate Systems Engineering, Control Systems Engineering, and Enterprise Systems Engineering, among other services. Currently, it is estimated that the mid-sized company generates revenue of around $20 to 50 million in an annual basis.

The company has a workforce of approximately 100 to 250 staff, working on various segments of the organization. Integrity Applications Incorporated is arguably one of the fastest advancing consultant companies in the country in matters involving system engineering (Forth and Bewley, 2006).

We will write a custom Report on Small Medium Enterprise specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The company was recently recognized as the second best medium-sized workplace in the ratings of the Best Small and Medium Workplaces in the U.S. More importantly, the company was also recognized as a key employer in the regions around San Diego and Washington, by the San Diego Business Journal and Washingtonian magazine, respectively. IAI has been in the forefront in steering the country ahead in innovative matters, through its qualified and highly-skilled professionals in software engineering.

References Acs, Z.J. and Morck, R. (1997). The internationalization of small and medium-sized enterprises: A policy perspective. Small Business Economics, 9 (1), 7-20.

Asheim, B. (2003). Regional innovation policy for small-medium enterprises. United Kingdom: Edward Elgar Publishing.

Chiao, Y. (2006). Performance, internationalization, and firm-specific advantages of SMEs in a newly-industrialized economy. Small Business Economics, 26 (5),475-492.

Fink, D. (1998). Guidelines for the successful adoption of information technology in small and medium enterprises. International journal of information management, 18 (4), 243-253.

Forth, J. and Bewley, H. (2006). Small and medium-sized enterprises: findings from the 2004 Workplace Employee Relations Survey. New York: Department of Trade and Industry.

Man, T. (2007). The competitiveness of small and medium enterprises* 1: A conceptualization with focus on entrepreneurial competencies. Journal of Business Venturing, 17 (2), 123-142.

Qian, G. (2002). Multinationality, product diversification, and profitability of emerging US small-and medium-sized enterprises. Journal of Business Venturing, 17 (6), 611-633.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Small Medium Enterprise by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


The Consumer Behavior in Hospitality Industry Report (Assessment) best college essay help

Introduction The business industry has recorded considerable growth in the recent past. Businesses in the local and global scene have expanded, with several investors being attracted to some common line of operations.

The increased number of players in the market for a particular product or service has led to the current high level of competition in the markets. In addition, consumers have a wide range of products and services from which to choose in order to satisfy their needs.

This has become a major challenge to business organizations. A business organization that is to survive in the contemporary market must be able to identify, understand, and respond to the needs of clients.

The firms should then develop products and services that are of high quality to meet the demands of customers. Nevertheless, the traditional business strategy of focusing on the maximization of the returns of the business organization no longer applies in the current market.

Despite a firm’s understanding of the needs of the clients, there is still a challenge in the final behavior of clients in buying and using the products and services. A firm may develop products and services that actually satisfy the needs of clients; however, other forces may influence the client who may end up buying and using alternative products in the market.

The customers often do not behave as predicted or as expected by the business organizations. For instance, a market research may show that customers are in need of a particular product and would be willing to buy the product if it is availed in the market.

An organization would then go ahead to avail much of the product into the market. Now, in certain instances, the customers may have other influences like extensive advertisement by a competitor after the market research. Such customers may end up buying the newly advertised product as opposed to the former product.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The first organization will then incur some losses due to this shift in attention. As such, apart from understanding the changing needs of clients and responding promptly to these needs, firms should have a thorough understanding of the buying behavior of the consumers.

Consumer behavior is the study of how customers (individuals or organizations) decide to buy a product, select and buy the product, use the product to satisfy their needs, and eventually dispose the product, and how this behavior affects the society (Perner, N.d).

A business organization will often succeed in its operation through effective customer satisfaction if it has a good understanding of buying behaviors of customers. This will enable organizations to channel their production towards products and services that meet these changing needs.

Moreover, this would involve developing completely new products, performing sales promotion and advertisements, offering competitive prices, or increasing the retail locations of a firm to serve several clients conveniently.

In general, sales and marketing managers in business organizations should carry out extensive researches to understand how information about a product is conveyed and processed by clients and eventually, how the clients make decisions to buy the products.

Several factors have been identified that affect the buying behavior of consumers. In relation to the factors, models have been developed that attempt to explain the likely behavior of consumers in respect to buying and using a given product or service.

However, these models have certain weaknesses. This paper focuses on some of the models used to explain the buying behavior of consumers with an insight on some of the weaknesses of each of the model. These models are considered in the context of hospitality industry.

We will write a custom Assessment on The Consumer Behavior in Hospitality Industry specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The theoretical concept of Consumer Behavior It has been observed that it is very important for business organizations to consider why a section of the market consumers can have particular interests in their products. The firms need to understand how the clients make decisions on which products in the market to buy and where to obtain the products.

Several factors determine consumers’ final decision to buy a given product, and the firms have to identify and evaluate these factors.

This is the concern of consumer behavior, which involves a study of “how individuals, groups and organizations, select, buy, use, and dispose of goods, services, ideas, or experiences to satisfy their needs and the impacts that these processes have on the consumer and the society” (Perner, N.d). It is more than mere buying of products and services.

It is then evident that the concept of consumer behavior has certain aspects that should be of interest to the business organization. Firstly, the consumers here are considered as individuals, groups of individuals, or as organizations (Perner, N.d).

The buying behavior towards a given products can be influenced at these distinct levels. Several factors that are specific to an individual may determine his or her decision to buy a given product. Taste and preference, the financial status of an individual, the level of education, information about a particular product or service, or previous experience are some factors influencing buyer behavior at an individual level.

An individual may decide to buy a given product because he has knowledge and experience of the quality of the product. The buying behavior can also be influenced at a group level. The group with which an individual is associated will affect the individual’s use of a given product or service.

Peer group influence generally affects the social life of an individual and the subsequent products and services used by the individual. This is common in the hospitality industry. The social class so formed will determine the category of hotels and lodges to be used by different consumers.

The buying behavior of individuals can also be influenced in the organizational context. The management of an organization may decide in a particular product to be used by its employees, who are in turn influenced to buy the product.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Consumer Behavior in Hospitality Industry by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It is also important to note that consumer behavior not only includes the products and services but ideas and information about these products as well. The way individuals receive and perceive information about a product or service, develop ideas about the products, and eventually how they make decisions are of key interest in studying the consumer behavior.

The environmental impact of a given product is of important consideration to a business organization. The effects of these products on the environment will contribute towards the position of the product in the market. The medium of disposal of a product after its use will determine the environmental impacts of the product.

Thus, the other significant aspect of consumer behavior is that it is not only concerned with the decision to buy a product but is also concerned with how the consumers use and dispose of the products (Perner, N.d). Most of the environmental problems are caused by poor disposal of waste products.

This provides a negative image to the product and the company dealing in the product. Knowledge of how a product is used by the consumers and the final method of disposal will enable the business organizations to position their products well in the market and attract more customers.

Another important aspect to consider is that the consumer behavior has significant impact on the society (Perner, N.d). The operations of an organization may have serious impacts on the economic, political, or social development in the society.

These effects are in turn influenced by the behavior of the consumers of the products of such an organization. A product may have harmful effects on the health of the individuals. However, the manufacturer of the product may engage in extensive advertisement and sales promotion for the product to win the interest of several consumers.

These individuals will end up using the products despite their negative consequences on the consumers’ health. Here, the poor consumer behavior has negative impacts on the society.

The ancient Decision-making models Various developments have been seen in the study of consumer behavior over the years. Different theories were developed to explain the decision-making processes by the consumer. One such theory is the Utility Theory that date backs to three centuries ago that was initially developed by Nicholas Bernoulli and extended by other economist.

The theory suggests that the decisions made by the consumers concerning a particular product or service are determined by the consumers’ expectations of the outcomes of the decision (Richarme, 2004). In other words, consumers will decide to buy a product or service when they expect the product to be of high quality and capable of meeting their needs.

This perspective portrayed the consumers as rational decision makers who able to foresee and quantify the possible outcomes of each of the alternatives that are available. The consumers would then settle on the alternative with a likely outcome that would best suit their needs.

This model had a weakness since the consumers are not that rational in decision-making and neither can they determine precisely the probabilities of these outcomes (Richarme, 2004). The consumers are often not aware of the forces that may affect the decision-making process (Bray, 2008, p.3).

As an alternative, another theory was developed that suggest that a consumer needs not to consider all the possible alternatives before making a decision as in the Utility theory (Richarme, 2004). Instead, he should go through the alternatives that are in close range and make a choice out of these alternatives.

This theory also had some shortcomings and other approaches were developed on these previous concepts. The issues of quality and value were later incorporated in the theories that explain the buyer’s behavior. Developments have continued in the approaches to the consumer decision-making models.

Decision-making models applied in the hospitality industry Unlike the other business organizations that deal in tangible products, the hospitality industry is mainly concerned with services. The consumers will be satisfied by the quality of the service provided as compared to the quality of the products in other business environment.

The quality of the service is in turn influenced by the interpersonal interaction as well as the human-environment interactions (Hui


Financial and Human Resource Management in Organizations Report essay help free: essay help free

Executive Summary This is a comprehensive paper which carries out a discussion on financial and human resource management as it applies to Rainbow Lighting Incorporated. The paper briefly highlights the company and the management problems that the company is facing. It further pinpoints the importance of applying the components or principles of the balanced scorecard in the management of the organization. This is contained in the introductory part of the paper.

The paper further carries a discussion on how different companies have applied the balanced scorecard to enhance efficiency in management of finances and employees. This is contained in the literature review section of the paper.

The paper develops a balanced scorecard for Rainbow Lighting Incorporated. The scorecard shows how the company should align its goals to the activities and operations in order to maximise on output. The paper explains the benefits that will come with the scorecard, and the change of operational behaviour as a result of applying the scorecard. However, this is after the scorecard for the company has been developed.

Lastly, the paper gives a conclusion on the working of the scorecard and the benefits of the scorecard. The paper gives a number of recommendations to Rainbow Lighting Company concerning the adoption of the scorecard in its management.

Introduction The Rainbow Lighting Incorporated is a wholesaler company that sales residential, light fixtures. These products are primarily sold to contractors, builders, home centres, lighting showrooms and hardware and electronic supply businesses. The management of the functions of the company seems not to be an easy exercise more so that the Rainbow Lighting performs more of sales activities.

The management of its employees who mostly engage in sales function has proven to be of big challenge that has led to a crush in the output of the company. The company has been facing stiff competition from other firms that deal in similar products.

It is very hard for many firms to achieve good performance when employees are not working in unison; or rather when the when employees are not working in response to a single source of coordination.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore, many companies are opting to apply the principles of the balanced scorecard in the management of the employees and other functions of the companies (LaChance, 2006). The functions and activities of the company can be greatly improved if it adopts and utilizes the balanced scorecard in aligning its goals to the activities (Searcy, 2004).

Literature Review Spreitzer and Porath, 2012, observe that performance appraisal is an important tool that can be utilized in the management of employees of an organization. Organizations that have good performance appraisal systems in place have enjoyed good employee relations. Therefore, they have been able to maximize the input of workers and the resultant output of the firms.

Performance management combines many small elements of management that collectively ensure the successful management of employees of an organization. This is done to step up the performance of both groups and individuals within the organization. When it is being applied in organizations, performance management is seen in terms of a series of human resource management functions that focus on measuring the performance of employees.

These functions assess workers and give feedback response on the quality of work and assignments completed by the employees. It allows for open exchange of ideas and views that will help in streamlining programs that will ensure better performance in the future (Chari and David, 2012).

The recognition of the future potential of employees is a useful indicator of employee mobility and probable success in the career. Workers in organizations usually do have a big concern about evaluation of their work, which is carried out by their supervisors. Of the greatest concern is the outcome of the evaluations and their importance to the employees. Performance appraisal has no substantive meaning when it is not accompanied by reward.

Financial rewards are very much valued by the employees, thence, after carrying out a performance appraisal in the organization; best performers have to be given financial rewards as an appreciation for their remarkable performance. Most firms do carry out appraisals after the fiscal year has ended (Henderson, Raynor and Ahmed, 2012).

In performance management, the equal opportunities approach can be adopted. This approach centres on equality in pay and treatment of employees. Equality is based on legislation that comes from the human rights and human resource policies. Diversity management has been adopted due to the ineffectiveness of the equal opportunity approach.

We will write a custom Report on Financial and Human Resource Management in Organizations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Diversity management covers all the variations in characters and qualification of employees and codes these factors in the performance and reward system of firms. Diversity management does not pay much attention to the legal and ethical theses of equality in organizations. It argues for a more objective look to diversity as it applies to the organizational business (McDougall, 1996).

The Balanced Scorecard Approach in Management Improving the performance of employees cannot be achieved in a day or a few days. It is a process that is conducted on a continuous basis. Management researchers have put forward a thesis, which implies that effective goal setting is critical in performance improvement within organizations. Effective goal setting cannot be used or based on as the major tool of achieving good performance. Many organizations do set very good goals.

However, the hardest task comes in the implementation process. Organizations fail to articulate the set goals and strategies leading to poor actions. When this happens, it becomes quite challenging to achieve the targets as laid down in the set goals. Therefore, performance can hardly be improved.

The problem of aligning organizational goals and focusing these goals towards the organizational programs has haunted organizations for a long time. The balance scorecard approach was developed in order to help mitigate this problem. This approach was developed in both the United States and Europe (Letza, 1996).

The balanced scorecard approach bases on measurable statistics. Metrics is utilized in the approach for the grouping of different though related organizational elements which are of importance to the success of the organization. The different categories of metrics do form a set of measures that assess performance.

This approach has been borrowed and applied in many organizations globally from the time it was developed. Organizations apply the approach differently though the basis of the concept still holds in all applications.

The concept has had good results in organizations where it has been utilized in management. By the year 2007, approximately one thousand top companies in the world had made use of the balanced scorecard approach in management (Chavan, M., 2009).

A balanced scorecard is composed of four major perspectives of management. These are customer, financial perspective of management, internal processes and learning and development in the organization. These four perspectives act as a basis in the formulation of the policies and targets of the organization.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Financial and Human Resource Management in Organizations by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The most important thing to consider in the application of the balanced scorecard is the understanding of the interaction the four perspectives in the firm. Lack of clear understanding of the working of the four management components work leads to serious challenges in the application of the scorecard. The four perspectives interact as in the diagram below which was presented by Kaplan and Norton (Thompson and Mathys, 2008).

Figure 1.0: The interaction of elements in a balanced scorecard.

To further simplify the scoreboard, Kaplan and Norton later presented the scorecard in an aligned manner as it appears in the figure below.

Figure 1.1: The aligned balanced scorecard.

This eases the understanding and applicability of the scorecard for performance improvement.

Financial indicators were the main focus of the ancient methods of measuring performance of organizations. However, modern methods focus on both financial and many other indicators which include high quality services, skilled employees, intellectual capital, reliable and prompt services, and other intangible business processes and actions. The balanced scorecard captures both financial and non-financial attributes in management which touches on the betterment of employees.

In short, the balanced scorecard process entails clarity and translation of organizational vision into strategic and effective communication in linking the strategic objectives of the firm to the measures of attaining the objectives. The third stage involves planning, target setting and alignment of strategic initiatives. Lastly we have the enhancement of strategic feedback response and learning (Veltri, 2011).

The scorecard guides, controls, and channels the whole firm towards the realization of organizational goals. Also, it makes organizations establish a clear conception of its probable future. Standard Australia can be cited as a firm that has effectively borrowed into the principles of the balanced scorecard in its management. This is a non-profit organization and currently leads in the technical information and standards sector.

It serves as a representative of Australia on the International Standards Organization and the International Electro-technical Commission. The company has made use of integrated technology in the management of its workforce. Performance management technology allowed the management of the firm to carry out goal setting for individual employees, teams in the organization and goals for the whole organization.

Also, the management developed performance criteria, assesses the competencies of employees which helps it in the identification of weakness and strengths of the workforce and gives feedback. The challenges that face individual employees and groups are identified (Chavan, 2009). The approach links the output of individuals to the competencies on the platform of integrated human resource management. This helps in the streamlining of working patterns in the organization (Hoque and Adams, 2011).

The balanced scorecard can be utilized to increase competitiveness and enhance accountability in the academic departments or institutions. Two major problems do prevail in the academic accounting. The first one concerns the management of academic institutions. This is because the main source of academic leaders has for a long time remained to be individuals who failed to seek leadership roles.

These individuals enter the academia, or they lack the management experience outside the academic field. The second problem is presented by the rising pressure to foster implementation of change in managing the academic field. The pressures do come from the government as it puts a lot of funds into the academic programs. This is not replicated in the quality of graduates who come out of these institutions (Barndt, McGee and Cataldo, 2011).

The academic institutions need to govern by establishing goals and objectives of the institutions. This should be part of the components of the strategic plan. After this, the performance measures can then be developed on which the results will be evaluated. The collegiate form of management, which is an old form of management, is changing.

Basing on the scorecard the academic institutions have to set long-term goals and objectives. Resource management principles can guide academic departments in the academic institutions as it covers both assets and people in these departments. The collective efforts of the department are significantly valuable compared to individual efforts (Barndt, McGee and Cataldo, 2011).

Big companies apply performance measurement in the analysis of their programs, processes and their staffs. However, as a result of the weakness of this mode of management, the organizations are changing and adopting comprehensive performance evaluation which comprehensively covers almost all the components of management. This is well highlighted in the balance scorecard Ding and Beaulieu, 2011).

The learning and growth component of the balanced scorecard is inclusive of employee training and the corporate culture attitudes that relate to individuals and the improvement of the organization. The commonly cited measures of the balanced scorecard put more emphasis on the capabilities of workers, the availability of information systems in the organization, and motivation and empowerment of employees of the organization (Garengo and Biazzo, 2012).

Learning is not only based on training of employees but also includes the mentoring, easing of communication between and among workers and the utilization of technological tools. Metrics that base on internal business process enables managers of organizations to evaluate the running of the business.

They also assist in the evaluation of the level of conformity of the products and services to the needs or requirements of the customers. Such scorecards include coverage on processes of innovation, operational procedures, and services that accompany sales (Wu and Chang, 2012).

Method The application of the balanced scorecard has aided many organizations whether public or private in improving management thus making them improve their performance. Just like it has been applied in other firms, the Rainbow Lighting Incorporated can borrow into the four main tenets of the balanced scorecard and develop its balanced scorecard to boost the general performance of the firm.

Rainbow Lighting Company is a lean organization. It deals in large sales of products which do not have a lot of variations. Therefore, the four major areas that the company needs to improve in order to uplift the performance are the financial sector of the company, the customer relations of the company as it entirely depends on its customers for its operations.

If the company fails to make sales, it will loose grounds for operation resulting in a shutdown. The other two aspects that the company will focus on are employees of the company who conduct the most important functions of the company. Finally, the quality of products of the company will be addressed. All the four aspects must work in coordination and integration so that the organization can reach its objectives.

The general strategy of the organization will be at the centre of the four perspectives of management will be. The strategy of the organization includes the goals, aims and objectives of the firm. The major goal of the company is to improve finance and human resource management in the company.

Therefore, the four aspects will need to work in line with the strategy of the organization. Alignment of the four functions to the strategies of the firm will ensure that all plans of the firm are channelled towards organizational goals. In this case, it will be easy to achieve goals by way of eliminating malfunctions.

Considering the management challenges that are facing Rainbow Lighting, the company the strategy of the company will be revised to capture areas that will aid in the mitigating these drawbacks. These strategies include streamlining the management of the finances and assets of the company; improvement of the performance and delivery of employees of the organization; ensuring that the products of the company are of the quality that meets the needs of customers; and increasing the customer base of the organization.

Customer Focus The customers are attracted through the quality of products and services that a company deals in. the customer services will be bettered through adjustment of prices, quality check of the products, employee training on interaction with customers and the offering of customer services like discounts, gifts and after-sales service.

Employee Perspective The company will carry out performance management so as to attain a highly performing and productive workforce. The employees will be properly trained on various aspects of organizational functions and be rewarded for good performance after appraisal programmes have been run. Training will help the employees transferring their skills and abilities on the organizational duties.

Product perspective The company will ensure that the products that are sold to customers are of good quality. The procurement procedures of the company will be reset to ensure that the products form industries are properly assessed. In addition, the procedures will ensure that these products come from industries that are known to produce quality products.

Financial Perspective For the company to make profits, it has to ensure that it gets valuable output from the every financial resource that is used. This will be achieved through the improvement of accounting procedures.

Conclusion The challenge of management in this modern era of management of organizations has necessitated a change in the modes of management. Modern management focuses more on good management of organizational finances and the employees.

Performance appraisal is one of the management approaches that have been widely employed in human resource management. Also, the balance scorecard approach has been absorbed in management as it covers a wider scope of management of firms. Different organizations utilize the scorecard differently though the basis of the approach remains the same.

References List Barndt, RJ, McGee, CH and Cataldo, AJ 2011, Failure to Benchmark: An Out-of-Balance Scorecard at an Academic Institution. Management Accounting Quarterly, 12(2), 49-56.

Chari, MR, and David, P 2012, Sustaining superior performance in an emerging economy: an empirical test in the Indian context. Strategic Management Journal, 33(2), 217-229.

Chavan, M 2009, The balanced scorecard: a new challenge. Journal of Management Development, 28(5), 393-406.

Ding, S and Beaulieu, P 2011, The Role of Financial Incentives in Balanced Scorecard-Based Performance Evaluations: Correcting Mood Congruency Biases. Journal of Accounting Research, 49(5), 1223-1247.

Garengo, P and Biazzo, S 2012, Unveiling strategy in SMEs through balanced scorecard implementation: A circular methodology. Total Quality Management


Creation and Management of a New Venture Essay college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The entrepreneur

Getting into business

Success factors for new ventures

Survival and growth of small business



Introduction For many years, entrepreneurs have played an important role in the global economy. They develop new business enterprises which create job opportunities, increase economic activities and steer innovation forward. Unfortunately, entrepreneurs remain an often ignored segment of the business context despite their positive influence on economic prosperity. In spite of decades of research into the segment, researchers have not come into consensus about the universal definition of entrepreneur.

Moreover, there is no common agreement about the exact characteristics and behaviors that describe entrepreneurs. Even though they operate across different sectors and environments, they still share important traits and behaviors. This paper investigates the wider context of the entrepreneur as the founder of business ventures.

There is a discussion of the founder including the traits and motivation to entrepreneurship. The factors that determine the success of a start-up business are investigated. The research is not complete without analyzing the transition from start-up to growing business and the two different situations.

The entrepreneur An entrepreneur can be defined as an innovator who establishes a new business enterprise offering new or existing goods and services in order to gain profit. A different definition is given by Mohanty (2005) as an individual who brings resources, materials, labor and other assets into an arrangement that increases their value and also introduces innovations, changes and new order (pp.1-2). Other definitions consider an entrepreneur as the person typically driven by some forces, the desires to achieve something, experiment, accomplish or escape the authority of others.

On a business perspective, he may either appear as an aggressive competitor or an ally who creates wealth for others and finds better ways of employing resource and generates jobs others are delighted to get (Wong et al., 2005). In almost all definitions, there is a general agreement that the behavior of an entrepreneur includes; initiative taking, resource planning and risk taking (Hisrich, Peters


Toyota Supply Chain Management Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Introduction Supply Chain Management is the management of activities (both up-stream and down-stream) involved in the production of goods and services for the ultimate consumption of the end-user. The management of these activities plays a very important role in the profitability and survival of an organization, to such an extent that its failure may mean the failure of the organization.

This is especially true in the present competitive business environment. Toyota motor industry has realized the importance of efficiently managing its supply chain in order to keep its costs and prices low and ultimately remain competitive in the overall motor vehicle industry from experience.

Toyota has achieved this so successfully that other organizations, even those outside the industry, have taken its measures and implemented them in their own production systems (Toyota, 2011).

History and Background of Toyota Japanese known as Kiichiro Toyoda started Toyota in 1937. The company first landed in America in 1957. Seven years later, it was already competing with the domestic manufactures quite fairly. Toyota has since grown to become the leading carmaker in the world, ahead of other giants in the industry, for instance, General Motors.

It has since started manufacturing plants in North American states such as Alabama, Indiana, Texas, Mississippi, Kentucky, California and West Virginia. Its growth has also seen the increase in the models of vehicles it produces for instance Prius, Corolla, Innova, landcruiser, Lexus, Camry, Fortuner and many more (Toyota, 2011).

To say the least, Toyota has redefined the motor vehicle manufacturing industry through low cost production, numerous models and the spread of its activities around the globe.

The Toyota Way/Toyota Production System has not only transformed the motor vehicle manufacturing industry but has been providing guidance on management issues for the past 5 decades or so. Other firms across all industries are increasingly adopting the principles provided in the Toyota Production System in their quest for managerial effectiveness and efficiency (Toyota, 2011).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Supply Chain in Toyota Toyota has a reputation world over for its unique Supply Chain Management system known as the Just-In-Time system or the Toyota Production System. Theirs is a method of obtaining raw materials at exact time of need and in exactly the amount required and producing finished products in exactly the right quantity.

This helps to avoid overproduction. Selling them at the right time to the right customer minimizes waste. This method identified wastes that otherwise go unnoticed as waste. However, its impact to the cost of production is tremendous.

They include; transportation, motion, wait, inventory, over production, over processing and defects. Its main goal involves avoiding these wastes. Kiichiro Toyoda first introduced this method and besides starting the Toyota Company, it is perhaps his greatest contribution.

In addition to the JIT system, Toyota applies the V4L principles in managing its supply chain. The V4L principles include the following (Toyota, 2011).

1. Variety in the products developed in order to meet a wide range of market demand therefore ensuring that Toyota has a large market share. Variety also ensures that all the stakeholders (suppliers included) are involved to ensure that the information provided clearly depicts the needs of the market.

As a result, Toyota is able to produce/manufacture vehicles that are suitable for use by different members of the population across the globe. This involvement of different stakeholders in the development of new products creates balance in the production system by helping to avoid waste and consequently reduces the cost of production (Halldorsson et al. 2007).

2. Velocity of the production flow is another key principle. Toyota uses a rate-based approach in enhancing the speed of production. Along with high levels of automation, this approach enables Toyota to mass produce vehicles and is therefore able to deliver its products, according to demand.

We will write a custom Essay on Toyota Supply Chain Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Toyota also has established distribution channels structured around its numerous manufacturing plants all around the globe and therefore ensuring efficiency and effectiveness in the distribution of its automobiles (Burt, Petcavage and Pinkerton, 2010).

3. Toyota is also very keen when it comes to the variability of deliveries and orders. It seeks to reduce variability and consequently reduce supply cost.

For instance, most of its vehicles spare parts. With this concept, the number of suppliers greatly reduces and the cost involved too. Visibility- this means that Toyota scientifically controls all processes to ensure that they are right and to enhance the process of learning from the processes (Burt, Petcavage and Pinkerton, 2010).

Development of New Products Toyota is among the leading investors in research and development with their research and development budget being billions of dollars in North America alone per year. However, this is not the only avenue that Toyota relies on when it comes to developing new products.

It relies heavily on the information that the various stakeholders collect from the market. With this information, Toyota is able to produce products that suit the diverse needs of its customers.

Supply Chain Management ensures quality in new products development through supplying quality raw materials, employing superior material handling methods to avoid damage, acquiring the services of reliable suppliers and providing feedback to enhance production (Toyota, 2011).

Purchase of Capital Equipment Toyota applies its lean system of Supply Chain Management in all its production area. Purchasing of capital equipment is amongst those areas. Toyota buys machines, plant and hires employees on a need-to basis.

This involves replacing the machines and hiring employees in a controlled manner to continue with optimum production immediately and at the same time avoid idle machines and labor. Toyota procures capital equipment mainly through tendering or using previous suppliers who have had a relationship with the company in the past.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Toyota Supply Chain Management by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Outsourcing Outsourcing has become a trend in today’s business environment and Toyota is no exception of the firms that are increasingly outsourcing goods and services.

It is not possible for the firm to produce every component that it requires in the production of its vehicles and even if it was possible to produce all this components it would be more expensive as it may mean having other all different plans and work set-ups (Halldorsson et al. 2007).

Outsourcing also allows the firm to concentrate on the core business of the firm and hence giving the firm room to be more efficient and effective in doing its core business.

It also allows the firm to gain access to higher-level expertise and experience. This may be unavailable within its staff or which is expensive to employ. Other benefits include legality of the process done on contractual basis, risk avoidance, tax benefit, commoditization and many more.

An example of components that the firm outsources includes wheels and oil. Toyota, a multi-national company, gets its suppliers all over the word as long as they provide what the company requires and for a reasonable price in accordance with the firm’s intentions (Liker, 2004).

Legal and Contract Issues Since Toyota is a multinational company, it has to be very carefully in the implications of the different legal climates on its activities. It also has to take caution so that its activities do not adversely affect any third party and the environment in which it operates.

Therefore, Toyota exercises careful measure such as signing of contracts between the firm and its customers before effecting transactions and bearing losses that may arise from the sale of erroneous vehicles.

To this effect, Toyota has severally recalled defective vehicles for repair consequently incurring the costs involved in order to avoid lawsuits (Halldorsson et al. 2007).

Toyota is also a heavy investor in the campaign on preserving the environment. It is in fact among the first automobile manufacturer to direct its efforts at manufacturing eco-friendly vehicles especially with the introduction of its Prius model.

Moreover, it has a very strong legal department, which irons out any legal issues that the firm may face. In addition, all of its transactions with outside parties are on contractual basis. This helps to seal any legal loopholes that may arise.

Production and Inventory Control Measures Toyota Production System requires great measure in controlling the inventory. This is because the firm operates at the least inventory level possible. If not well managed Toyota Production System could end achieving the exact opposite of what it was initially intended to achieve. This could be in form of very low inventory levels such that it leads to production paralysis.

This could lead to delayed delivery of finished goods to customers and therefore loss of market share and goodwill and ultimately the risk of having to stop operating altogether. Therefore, Toyota employs Toyota Production System carefully so that the firm does not risk falling out of business.

Moreover, the firm has to have trusted suppliers for it to implement the Toyota Production System successfully. This is because suppliers are an integral part of this type of supply chain in that they tend to interact with the firm on a more frequent basis unlike in other Supply Chain Management Systems (Toyota, 2011).


Scheduling involves deciding when to make a certain program and which staff and machines to use in the process of making the product. It is a very important function of a production process because it helps to reduce the costs of production and the time used in the production of a certain product.

This process perfectly fits into the Toyota Production System as it seeks to eliminate waste of both time and costs same as the Toyota Production System.

Toyota use both forward and backward scheduling, whereby it produce some vehicles based on the orders placed (backward scheduling) and others it produces based on resources availability (forward scheduling).

This ensures that it delivers the vehicle ordered on time and at the most efficient cost possible and at the same time produce other vehicles such as new unknown models to cater for those customers who have not placed orders.

However, with the increased demand for customization of vehicles and other goods for that matter, backward scheduling is better preferred to forward scheduling to achieve customer satisfaction (Halldorsson et al. 2007).

Product scheduling helps to increase efficiency in the production process by saving both time and resources. It also helps achieve customer satisfaction and hence loyalty by helping to fulfill the firm’s delivery dates immediately, this helps the firm to maintain its market share.

Proper scheduling also helps to keep inventory very low and as a result saves costs (Halldorsson et al. 2007).

Demand Systems

The Toyota Production System operates on the principles of pull demand systems. This is where the firm seeks to find out what the consumer wants and then goes ahead to produce based on that information.

This is possible because of the fact that customers can place their orders and then wait for the manufacture of their vehicles. With the help of the internet and the efforts towards market research, Toyota has been able to operate in this type demand system to achieve its high sales.

However, Toyota also employs the push system of demand especially when selling new models and selling to those customers who have not placed their orders. The pull system’s intention is to avoid overproduction, which in itself is a waste.

Inventory Functions and Analysis

The Toyota Production System highly discourages keeping or holding any kind of inventory unless it is necessary to do so.

Along with transportation, motion, overproduction, over processing, defect and wait, inventory is seen as capital outlays that has not borne any profit or return to the firm and for this reason its highly discourage.

This system of production encourages the firm to keep minimal levels of inventory in order to avoid incurring inventory costs, which include keeping capital idle (Halldorsson et al. 2007).

However, it is almost impossible for a firm to operate with zero levels of inventory. At one particular time the firm will require more resources than it can deplete in a day and it will therefore hold the extra even if it’s just overnight.

Another time the firm will not complete it work on a product in one day and will therefore keep holding it until it has finished working on it. Normally when the firm has finished working on a product, the product does not go on sale immediately and as a result, the firm has to hold the product until it can sell it or send it to the distributors.

The above examples show that holding inventory is sometimes necessary and important. In addition, the firm holds inventory to cushion itself against any unforeseen demand change and avoid missing new markets.

Relationship between Supply, Demand, and Logistics in Toyota Part of the major roles of the Supply Chain Management Department is to be able to harmonize demand and supply of the products affecting the firm. In Toyota, it is not any different. The demand for vehicles has been rising exponentially over the past decades this has prompted Toyota to respond by increasing its supply of vehicles to the market.

Toyota opened plants in countries all over the world. In some countries, the company opens multiple plants. This development has seen Toyota rise to become the leading automobile producer in the world. This is mainly because of its efforts to manufacture vehicles even for low-income earners in economies across the globe (Hanson et al. 2011).

Logistics is the process of managing the flow of activities, goods and services that are involved in the production process. It involves transportation of the resources and people from one point to the other, holding and managing inventory, packaging and security.

The Toyota Production System discourages any unnecessary transportation either within or outside the plants. Therefore, it seeks to design work lay outs that minimize the amount of movement while a product is being worked on.

It has also built plants all over the globe nearer to the resources in order to avoid transporting the raw materials over long distances. This effort enables Toyota to keep its production costs at a very low level and with this in place; it is able to sell its vehicles at a reasonable lower price than most of its competitors (Hanson et al. 2011).

Conclusion Toyota Production System has really revolutionized the Supply Chain Management of the whole world.

It has led to companies avoiding waste, reducing the lead-time, improvements in quality assurance and greatly strengthened the relationships between firms, its suppliers and customers by providing an avenue for interactions. It has also helped reduce uncertainty as firms can now produce their products according to orders (Toyota, 2011).


Toyota Production System has many benefits to the organization in which it is applied. Firstly, it strengthens the relationship between the organization and its suppliers as the suppliers are busily involved in the development of the vehicles.

Secondly, it reduces waste (muda) involved in the production process, which may be in terms of inventory, motion, transportation et cetera.

Thirdly, it ensures maximum utilization of the available resources such as maximum employment of machines to ensure optimum production and having employees with multiple skills working at different sections of the production process allowing workers to work where they are required when they are required.

Lastly, Toyota Production System allows regular supply over the production process, this allows for modification of the supplies to suit the demand. It is therefore easier to customize the vehicles to meet customer demands (Toyota, 2011).


Toyota Production System advocates keeping very low or no inventory. This means that replenishing inventory should be continuous. However, uncertainty affects this process, which may lead to the interruption of the production process.

In addition to the interruptions, the constant buying of inventory may see varying prices of the inventory due to variations of demand, which occur almost daily. It is also not possible to clearly ascertain what to order, in what quantity and when in all the processes of supply chain.

This is because some products are not in Toyota’s control entirely. For instance, a farmer who deals with wheat cannot exactly determine the amount of wheat he is going to harvest in the next season because he depends on the rain to which he has no control.

Moreover, demand is highly uncertain and companies have to keep some level of inventory in order to cushion themselves from unforeseen changes in demand. Even with the Toyota Production System, Toyota has to hold inventory to some level. For instance, Toyota’s iron or steel mining is not possible for any particular order specification. However, mining and storage for future use is possible (Liker, 2004).

References Burt, D. N. Petcavage, S. D.


Effects of the Second World Essay (Book Review) online essay help: online essay help

Thesis statement: Canada participated fully in the Second World War until 1945. Although it emerged triumphant, many problems were witnessed later on. The main problem was cultural integration between immigrants and Canadian natives. This paper analyzes the effects of the Second World.

After participating in the in the Second World War, soldiers came back victorious in 1945 with a lot of optimism and apprehension. Canadian contribution in the war earned it respect from major world powers.

The great depression that came after the events of the Second World War left many people depressed and deprived economically. It took the country several years to adjust to the postwar state of affairs. The years between 1945 and 1950 were very important because they are the foundation of modern Canada.

The war affected Canadians in a number of ways especially in the economic front. The state changed its foreign policy mainly to strengthen diplomatic relations with one of the superpowers- the United States. This meant that previous ties with Britain had deteriorated.

Canadian population had increased mainly because of immigration. Other communities sought refuge to Canada because of its peaceful environment. During the Cold War, Canada was forced to participate fully since it was a supporter of capitalism. The Gouzenko Affair was a real test for Canadian authorities.

Canada was persuaded to arrest the agent after suspicion that he was involved in spying the government over nuclear technology. Between 1948 and 1957, Canada emerged as one of the influential states in the world politics. The period is popularly referred to as Golden Age.

Lester Pearson and Louis St. Laurent are the leaders associated with Canadian fame during the Golden Age. Pearson understood the importance of hegemonic powers in the world affairs since he was a distinguished historian. He later on became the country’s Prime Minister in 1963.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More His rule strengthened Canada’s position in the international system (Chapnick 107). Pearson could influence the world powers such as the US and Britain to appreciate Canada’s contribution to the global affairs. For instance, he contributed in the establishment of North Atlantic Organization Treaty (NATO), which is a major political and military organization in the modern world. Canada has never been the same again since 1963.

The inconsistencies and conflicts in war torn British controlled regions influenced Canadian population. This is because many people migrated to Canada, which brought about changes in socio-cultural and economic development. Cho argues in her book that Chinese preferred a shift to Canada because they had relatives there.

The Second World War caused many social and economic problems in Canada. Soldiers came back with many children implying that the state was unable to provide quality life to all individuals. Cho examines that Chinese and other immigrants were forced to survive at the mercy of the bourgeoisie.

Wealthy Canadians mistreated immigrants and other low wage laborers because they had no alternative. Lily Cho elucidates that formation of classes and accumulation of resources worsened the conditions of foreigners in the state. Cultural values were not respected at all. Material accumulation was the priority of each individual meaning that capitalism had taken root in the country.

However, the Chinese advanced their culture through meals implying that they prepared rare banquets that distinguished them from other groups in society. Cho shows that Chinese efforts to bolster their culture through food did not prevent them from being oppressed by the powerful in society (Cho 86).

The Second World War caused more harm than good to Canadians. Population increased and subsequent struggle for scarce resources contributed to social evils such as crime and prostitution.

Cho’s findings are valuable and applicable to the understanding of Canadian history. The only problem with her postulations is that she presents Canadian society as having only a single conflict. Canadian history can be explained in a number of ways. Cho does not discuss the issue of women such as their struggle to freedom. She only focuses on the conflict between Chinese and colonialists.

We will write a custom Book Review on Effects of the Second World specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Chapnick, Adam. The Middle Power Project: Canada and the Founding of the United Nations. McGill: University of British Columbia Press, 2005.

Cho, Lily. Eating Chinese: Culture on the Menu in Small Town Canada, cultural spaces. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2010.


Louise Bourgeois’ Art Essay college admissions essay help

Bourgeois, a French woman, was a famous artist who died from a heart attack on at 98 years old. She had a painful childhood experience which became “the grist to her mill of artistic”. Her mother died when she was eight and this affected her psychologically.

Bourgeois started her career in art in the late 1940’s after moving to New York. Her art express the theme of loneliness, anxiety and betrayal. Most of her work was constructed from scrap metal and wood which she used to curve sculptures, in he fifties, she made transitions from metal and wood sculptures to marble, plaster and bronze (McCrae 1).

Her sculpture, Maman, is one of the largest and the most impressive sculptures in the world. It was first displayed outside the Tate museum in 2000. The idea of the sculpture comes from the strength of her mother which means “spinning, nurture, weaving and protection”. Maman is 30 feet tall and 9 meters female spider made from stainless steel.

Under its belly it carries 26 eggs, arguably for protection, which are pure white marble. The spider itself is black in color, and Louise made sure that the placements of the legs of the spider were strong so as to support it.

She gave it a mystical character because the eggs the spider holds give it a sense of vulnerability and it also brings out the sense of her protective nature. To some the sculpture is fantastic while to others it is scary and that its presence brings back painful memory to her (McCrae 1).

Source: McCrae, Trisha. Louise Bourgeois. Maman: From the Outside In. 15 April 2000. Web.

Bourgeois artwork is related closely to Wojick’s work. The ideas relating to overcoming personal struggle that I found present in Wojick’s pieces were even more apparent in Bourgeois’s work. The majority of Bourgeois’s work relates to her early childhood experiences and shows a sexual and dark side of art.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More She believes that a key part of art is a about “expressing struggling, loneliness and pain.” Her sculptures of massive spiders take a phobia held by many and amplify it, by making a normally small creature in to a large and powerful creation.

Visual response Source: Wojick, Amanda. Amanda Wojick: Scuptures. 2009.Web.

A large part of her work takes sculptures of body parts intertwined that suggests a very sexual nature. This suggests Bourgeois was sexual abused at a young age and now deals with this pain by expressing it within her artwork. I found Bourgeois’s use of pain and struggling in her artwork interesting and decided to pursue it more.

Art sometimes amazes me, this spider looks like a real life giant spider dominating its surrounding with power and dignity. This was Bourgeois’s of showing her personal appreciation for her mother, and showing an intimate relationship she shared with her mother.

I agree with analysts that this spider is both metaphorical and symbolical that it “a gigantic spider acting as Bourgeois’s transitional space”. In a complicated way, Bourgeois had to choose a spider, a small but threatening creature.

This spider reminds me of a movie, “The Eight Legged Freaks” directed by Ellory Elkayem in 2002. Giant spiders developed to become “gigantic spiders” as a result of exposure to toxic waste. They become perfect killing machines.

I sense a lot of similarity because the movie was dedicated to the producer’s mother who died of cancer. Spiders are very protective and can become very poisonous and harmful. Coming closer to the spider’s legs, you can feel the safety and maternal presence felt by the huge white marble eggs. This is the same feeling you get when you read Bourgeois’ ode to her mother:

We will write a custom Essay on Louise Bourgeois’ Art specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The Spider is an ode to my mother. She was my best friend. Like a spider, my mother was a weaver. My family was in the business of tapestry restoration, and my mother was in charge of the workshop. Like spiders, my mother was very clever.

Spiders are friendly presences that eat mosquitoes. We know that mosquitoes spread diseases and are therefore unwanted. So, spiders are helpful and protective, just like my mother (Findlay and Mallabar 2)

In her art, it’s evident that Bourgeois’s dependency on her past life is a significant source of her inspiration. Like a small child, she continuously relies on her mother to offer her “a shoulder to cry on”.

Works Cited Findlay, Ruth and Daisy Mallabar. Tate acquires Louise Bourgeois’s giant spider, Maman. 11 January 2008. Web.

McCrae, Trisha. Louise Bourgeois. Maman: From the Outside In. 15 April 2000. Web.

Wojick, Amanda. Amanda Wojick: Scuptures. 2009.Web.


Diagnosis and Treatment of Cystic Fibrosis Term Paper essay help free: essay help free

Cystic Fibrosis is a hereditary disease that is passed from the parents to their children via the genes though it is not necessarily a must that the parents must be suffering from the disease for their kids to inherit it.

It is a disease that affects the breathing process in the respiratory mechanism and the breakdown and absorption of food in the digestive system of a human being (Ratjen, 2008). This occurs when the glands produce excessive mucus within the human body.

This mucus accumulates in the lungs and other passages responsible for the transport of air, thus limiting the amount of air inhaled. In some other cases, mucus may be deposited in the pancreas and this reduces the rate at which food is broken down and absorbed into the bloodstream. This mucus is generally bluish in color and very thick.

Mucus plays an important role in the human body because it covers specific body organs which are prone to infections especially when exposed. Such organs include the lungs and pancreas which are vital organs in the human body.

For instance, this mucus is found lining the nose tract which traps dust, smoke particles and the excess moisture in the air as it passes into the lungs. However, so much build-up of mucus causes Cystic fibrosis which is a life- long threatening disease to the human life.

Pancreas is responsible for the production of digestive enzymes. When this mucus accumulates more than it is useful, it blocks tubes in the pancreas which transport these enzymes down to the small intestines where digestion takes place.

As a result, food passes down undigested, a condition which leads to constipation and thus a swollen belly (Hyde and Gill, 2008). A lot of nutrients are taken out as waste and therefore the body does not benefit from the food.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Due to the reduction in the amount of food absorbed in the body, malnutrition and weight loss occurs and as a result, it becomes easy for other diseases to develop in the body of person who is undergoing through these problems.

If the parents of the affected kids were well-informed on how to provide a balanced diet for these kids, their bodies would develop immunity which would ease the effect of this disease and also get out of the danger of contracting other diseases.

Good health of the body of a person plays a major role in fighting diseases. An infant with ill-health experiences retarded growth both mentally and physically, but a healthy one develops fast and therefore no late maturity.

Cystic fibrosis also affects the reproductive system in men where this mucus clogs the sperm tubes and thus, the sperms stop flowing from the testes. This condition makes men infertile and at times, this blockage leads to death of the affected. To women, the condition alters ovulation cycles mostly the alteration of the ovulation cycle is very common to the underweight women. This condition results to infertility of the woman.

Cystic fibrosis has in the past claimed many lives mainly in the poor families who lack money to pay for its treatment. It is a disease that goes on getting complex as the infant ages and therefore, there is a need for early treatment.

Pregnant women should seek an assistance in maternity during labor. After birth, the weight of the child should be checked among other things where in case any abnormality is found, tests should be made and the necessary treatment done (Verkerk, Jeukens, Kok and Nollet, 2009).

If the treatment is delayed, lung and intestinal infections result where surgery and at other times organ transplant is the only way to save the victim. Before a person is claimed to be suffering from this disease, symptoms must be looked at after which tests and diagnosis are done. In the past, cystic fibrosis was not clearly understood and therefore, even the treatment was a challenge.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Diagnosis and Treatment of Cystic Fibrosis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More With the current advancement in knowledge and technology in the previous years, it has been known that although cystic fibrosis has no cure, it can be managed. To manage this disease, people are encouraged to ensure that they take a good nutrition daily and be physically active.

Physical exercises are encouraged as they improve the energy formation and muscle buildup. Exercises such as walking, running and swimming make a person to cough and therefore, for the case of a cystic fibrosis’ victims, he/she will cough and thus remove sputum from the gastric tract making it easy to breathe.

Doing such exercises enables all the body organs remain functional thereby reducing the rate at which these organs decline on their function and therefore, an individual who is suffering from cystic fibrosis has higher chances to live a more healthy and longer life. If such methods of fighting this disease were known earlier, many lives that were lost would probably have been saved.

As a way to help the affected people, there is a need to offer education to the public about cystic fibrosis. It is clear to many people that most diseases are transmitted from one individual to another through different ways, one of which is through contact.

People may fear interacting with such victims but there is a need to understand that cystic fibrosis is a hereditary disease. It can only be passed through genes from the parent to the child and for this to happen both parents must contribute a gene that is faulty.

Through such education, the cystic fibrosis’ victims will benefit through appreciation and acceptance in their families and the society at large. In this way, children will get an equal opportunity to learn as the others and to those who survive to adulthood; they will achieve their goals and will live a stress-free life.

These people with cystic fibrosis can cope up with the situation by talking openly to their loved ones and parents about how they feel and especially for the case of teenagers. In this way, victims will feel relieved and enjoy socializing with others.

Further, the parents of such children with the disorder need to take them to others with the same disorder to meet and talk since this will ease the feeling of emptiness and loneliness. For a child to develop effectively both physically and mentally regardless of his/her deformity, he/she requires understanding and assistance. Traditionally, children were treated harshly and at times were given duties that were hard for them to tackle (Richard, 2008).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Diagnosis and Treatment of Cystic Fibrosis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This kind of life stresses a kid and alters his/her development. If ways of supporting these victims were known during the past years and put into practice, they would have an easy time and probably live a longer life, despite their condition. This is a clear indication that possessing of prior knowledge about the disease can help to improve the ability of the patient to cope (Hyde, Stephen, Gill and Deborah, 2008).

Symptoms of cystic fibrosis differ from one kid to another and also depend on the state of the disease; some may be clearly evident while others may be not. For instance, so much salty sweat may be an indication of this disease.

This salty sweat makes the kid lose a lot of water and this causes mineral imbalances in the body and may lead to health problems such as dehydration among others. Other signs of cystic fibrosis include wheezing and persistent coughs.

This shows that the gastric tract is blocked by mucus. Advanced researches on the possible cure for the disease have come up with such medications as antibiotics and steroids which help to loosen mucus produced (Bourdelais, Abraham and Baden, 2009). This helps reduce the effect of sticky mucus mostly in the lungs which causes breathing difficulties.

There is a great importance for the mothers and fathers to look back on their relatives to see whether there were some people who suffered from cystic fibrosis because they may be carrying these faulty genes. If both the wife and the husband have relatives who once suffered from this disease, there are high chances that they will bring up an infant with cystic fibrosis and therefore, they should take their kids for a medical checkup at an early age to avoid complications later on (Huang, Gottschalk, Pian and Dillon, 2007).

This will play a major part in reducing the number of infants who are aging into young adults with the disease having not been identified.

There is an extensive need to provide more education regarding cystic fibrosis to the public. Health extension officers have the duty to offer this education and matters regarding nutrition. Turning on to the parents, they should ensure that they seek for medical care in times of labor and also make sure that their infants are given all the vaccines in order to fight diseases.

Doctors should undertake all tests possible that would help to tell a kid suffering from cystic fibrosis in order to start proper medication to the kid to ensure proper growth. Co-curricular activities need to be emphasized in all institutions. The heart and lungs, which are the most organs subjected to the infection, are exercised and research has found that these exercises improve and prolong the working efficiency and lifetime of the organs.

In conclusion, it is worth noting that a possession of knowledge about the disease is of great relevance to the patient. Such patients can have better abilities in order to ensure that all precautionary measures are taken. Patients with adequate knowledge about their condition can use it in case of a crisis such that the effects of the disease are mitigated.

It is worth noting that understanding of this disease by the patients also helps them have better cognitive predisposition of their ability to cope. Knowledge leads to less resentments and any other form of misinformation that may characterize the behavior of the patients. Thus, a person with the required knowledge on the disease and its effects may manage it more effectively than a person who lacks the knowledge of the disease and its effects.

References Bourdelais, A. J., Abraham, W. M., and Baden, D. G. (2009). Polyether Brevetoxin Derivatives as a Treatment for Cystic Fibrosis, Mucociliary Dysfunction, and Pulmonary Diseases. Freepatentsonline. Retrieved from

Huang, S. J., Gottschalk M., Pian M., and Dillon, L. (2007). Transition to Adult Care: Systematic Assessment of Adolescents with Chronic Illnesses and their Medical Teams. Journal of Pediatrics 151 (1), 994-998.

Hyde, C. S., and Gill, R. D. (2008). Ignoring the nonsense: a phase II trial in cystic fibrosis. The Lancet 372(9640), 691-692.

Ratjen, F. (2008). Paediatric Respiratory Reviews. Human Gene Therapy 9 (2), 144- 148.

Richard, K. J. (2008). Crisis intervention strategies. Belmont, CA: Thomson Brooks/Cole.

Verkerk, G., Jeukens, M., Kok, J., and Nollet., F. (2009). Infant Behavioral Assessment and Intervention Program in Very Low Birth Weight Infants Improves Independency in Mobility at Preschool Age. Journal of Pediatrics 154(1), 933- 938.


Iphone Demand and Supply Theories Essay scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Rise of Iphone

Factors Affecting Supply And Demand of The Iphone

Elasticity or Inelasticity of Demand of a Product


Works Cited


Introduction While bringing various commodities into the market, suppliers have to find a way to bring in a commodity of good quality in order to attract a good market but the most important knowledge to have is how to avoid losses at the same time satisfy the consumers of the product.

All this knowledge will have to be an application of the economics demand and supply theory. This means that the producer will have to satisfy the consumers’ demand for the product and at the same time producce the commodity at a price that he will be satisfied.

This period makes analysis of how it has been behaving in the market clear. An analysis of Iphones in the market for the past few years explains better how the theory of supply and demand works. This paper therefore, discusses the economics theory of demand and supply while applying the theory in how the production, demand and sale of Iphones have been in the last few years.

The Rise of Iphone Since the launch, of the Iphone, it is evident that the demand of the product has been increasing, and there is fear that the latter may be overlapping the supply of the product. According to the laws of demand and supply, this behavior can be seen as a positive demand shift.

In definition, it is a point where the demand of a product increases. Cases of increase in demand may occur during holiday seasons, or when a product becomes more popular in a market. The law of demand states that when the value of either a good or service is low, then the demand is high.

However, when the price of a commodity is high, then the demand of that product decreases. On the other hand, when the price of a commodity is high, then the supply of that commodity is high, and when the price is low, the supply is also low. This falls under the supply law.

When there is a shift in demand, either negatively or positively, there will be a definite need for change in price and quantity of thee product to have a balanced equilibrium point. In other words, when if the consumers for a particular product increase, there should be an increase in supply of that product.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the same case, according to the demand and supply law, when there is a demand shift, there should be an increase in the equilibrium price as well as the equilibrium quantity of that product. In the case of the production of the Apple Iphone, it seems that the supply of the product has been having trouble meeting the increased demand for the product. According to reports last year, it has been a fear that due to increased demand that outruns the supply; Apple may lose its consumers to alternative phones1 (Deffree 45).

Factors Affecting Supply And Demand of The Iphone In economics, the increase or decrease of a commodity pricing can be caused by several factors. In the supply law, if the production of a commodity is low, then the pricing is low. Other causes of a commodity pricing decrease include the ability to produce the commodity with cheaper means.

In the case of the Apple firm, the pricing of the iphone has gone incredibly low. For instance, the Iphone 3G today coasts over $200 less than when it was launched. In addition, the phone is said to have better applications in terms of speed among others.

This slash of pricing has been caused by the improvement in technology in that there has the firm has found easier means to produce and even better quality product. Therefore, in the question of pricing of the Apple Iphone, the Firm might have followed the law of demand and supply.

With the popularity of the product, it has been evident that the demand for the product continues to increase, and therefore in a demand supply curve, there should be a demand shift on the right side of the graph. According to the demand supply law, with a shift in demand, the price as well as quantity of a product should increase.

If it fails to increase, the graph may suffer an in-equilibrium. This might be happening in the sale of the Iphone because there is a hiked demand for the product; yet, the supply has not met the former. In the case of the prices, Apple might be using a unique strategy in that the older version of Iphones continue to reduce in prices, but other better versions of the same phone are brought to the market, at a higher price.

For instance, the Iphone 3 has continued to be supplied only at a cheaper price. Better yet, Apple has recently launched its newest Iphone 4 at a higher price. Somehow, the firm seems to try balance the price equilibrium by introducing the newest make of the Iphone in a hiked price. However, the firm might still have a problem in governing the quantity equilibrium, and there might be an evident shortage in supply of the popular product.

We will write a custom Essay on Iphone Demand and Supply Theories specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Elasticity or Inelasticity of Demand of a Product In the question of elasticity or inelasticity of demand of a product, Apple’s Iphone should be easy to analyze. In the first place, elasticity in demand of product relies on several factors which include, accessibility or availability of products that can substitute the basic commodity, income of the consumer which enables him to consume the good and time that a consumer may use to stop using a particular commodity.

In the case of Apple’s products, the Iphone is an elastic product on demand. This is because the product is in a competitive market whereby consumers may opt to use other smart phones with similar applications. So, if the price of the Iphone goes high beyond the consumer’s meet, then, it is very easy for them to look for substitute products. At the same time, if the supply of the product is low, then the sale of the product would not be successful because consumers may opt to look for alternative products.

According to the economics theory of pricing and revenue, it is only logical that if the prises of a product increase, then the revenue should increase. With the improvement in technology, Apple has been able to produce high quality product which have quite a show of demand.

Even though, the prices of the new products including the Iphone4 and the new Mac handbook are high, consumers seem to be quite interested in the product. The hiked prices of the new products should therefore, bring an impact in revenue during a particular period. According to the company’s reports, the revenue has risen from $99.9 billion to $108 billion as at the year20112 (Zielenzier 3).

Conclusion In my opinion, Apple may have success in increasing prices of some of its products ,which is an, eventual gain in the company. In the law of demand and supply, the company seeks to reach different markets with different products and at varied prices, which in my opinion, seem to stabilize the supply and demand equilibrium.

Works Cited Deffree, Suzanne. IPhone 4 supply and demand issues could hurt Apple brand. New York: Cengage Learning, 2011. Print.

Zielenziger, David. “Apple’s Report: Annual Revenue Tops $108 Billion.” International Business Times., 18 Oct. 2011. Web.

Footnotes 1 Deffree, Suzanne. iPhone 4 supply and demand issues could hurt Apple brand. New York: Cengage Learning, 2011.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Iphone Demand and Supply Theories by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More 2 Zielenziger, David. Apple’s Report: Annual Revenue Tops $108 Billion. 18th october 2011. Washington : International business times. 11th november 2011.


Strategic Management science or art Report scholarship essay help

Summary In the management domain, strategic management encompasses identification coupled with definition of strategies for everyday use. Usually, managers employ these strategies to strive for high performance as well as admirable competitive advantage for business establishments.

In addition to that, it includes decisions as well as acts managers establish, and which determine the outcome of the organizations’ performance. Incisively, a science is whatever skill that manifests detailed use of facts for a particular purpose.

Subsequently, an art is clearly characterized as skill critical for any human tasks. Not only a strategic management is a behavioral science, but also an art since its application in relative situations involves these two perspectives (Bingham and Eisenhardt 1437-1467).

Introduction Ordinarily, (Bingham and Eisenhardt 1437-1467) argues that the main function of strategic management is to integrate diverse functional components of an organization wholly, as well as to make sure these functional aspects are in agreement.

Basically, this involves application of scientific principles established in management, and execution of activities to meet desired goals. In brief, the base of strategic management as an art as well as a science are clear in today’s global business environment. In this respect, strategic management draws higher profitability if well planned and executed.

Literature review Strategic management as a science

Generally, a science is a taxonomic collection of knowledge about a particular field of study, with universal features which define remarkable development. It simply sets up a cause with accompanying effects links among two or more factors, and emphasizes the rationale of the relationship.

These principles spring up from scientific methods such as observation along with the verification by means of testing. Specifically, a number of features describe a science. One is cause with corresponding effect relationship. Indeed, principles of science institute reason and aftermath relationship amidst a number of variables.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More With reference to strategic management, same principles exist. For instance, in cause and effect relationship, where there is little stability in authority besides responsibility ineffectiveness emerges. Second is examination of validity as well as predictability of the subject under consideration.

In essence, legality of scientific standards is proved at any convenience. It is important to note that each test will give similar result regardless of when it is done. Furthermore, scientific management principles are examined for validity by use of standards like unity of command through comparison of two persons (Gao 125-136).

Thirdly according to Gao (125-136), generally accepted principles involve scientific standards, which in one way or another signify basic truth of a specific area of enquiry. Chiefly, these principles are relevant in everyday operations. In brief, strategic management encompasses some cardinal principles, for instance, the principle of unity which are used worldwide.

Finally, experimentation together with observation is involved, this basically makes up thorough scientific look into a field under consideration. Similarly in strategic management, principles founded on scientific research accompanied with observations like in the principles are highlighted by Henry Fayol. A number of these principles are established by the way of experiments as well as practical encounters of managers (Pugh and Bourgeois, 173).

From above arguments, it is undeniable that strategic management like other sciences has a well arranged body of knowledge. Even though this vast body of knowledge is not like that of other physical sciences such as biology among others, ostensibly because strategic management deals with behavior of human beings, whose behavior is toilsome to foretell accurately. Given that strategic management is a social process, it is deemed as a social science, which is flexible by nature. The reason for flexibility is that theories as well as principles result in a range of results at different times, and hence it is a behavioral science (Gao 125-136).

Strategic management as an art

Conversely, an art connotes manipulation of knowledge together with a skill in tasks to attain desired results. In this perspective, an art is outlined as individualized application of theoretical formulas for attaining coveted results. For the most part, an art has to a large extent practical knowledge.

In this case, a manager needs to be well-rounded in academic qualifications and the practical part of management. In addition to that, a manager must have a personal skill. For one thing, each manager has a unique style of addressing strategic management, depending on knowledge level coupled with personality (Hodgkinson and Healey, 1510).

We will write a custom Report on Strategic Management science or art specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Moreover, a great sense of creativity is critical in an art. In the case of strategic management, creativity is displayed in targeting to bring forth unique results via combination of cognition and imagination. Above all, it harmonizes human as well as non human endowments to accomplish the desired objectives (Leaptrott and McDonald, 35).

Again, continued practice leads to mastery of a given art. As an example, managers gain skills by way of trial and error in the earlier stages, yet daily application of strategic management principles over a long period makes them more competent in strategic management.

To sum up, an art is goal oriented, whereby in strategic management efforts are directed towards attainment of preset goals by utilizing available resources. Therefore, in a way strategic management is an art, which demands exercise of particular principles as it deals with shaping the attitudes as well as behaviors of people (Maranville 782-807).

All things considered, management is not only an art but a science as well. From above analysis, strategic management integrates scientific characteristics and artistic features. It is carefully weighed as a science since it is a coherent to a vast body of knowledge, which consists of acceptable universal truth.

It is termed as an art because strategic management necessitates accredited skills, which are particular to a given manager. Accordingly, science gives knowledge, while art handles application of acquired knowledge along with skills. It is recommended that for a manager to succeed, one needs to adopt scientific knowledge likewise the art of using it. Consequently, strategic management is a wise fuse of science as well as art, since it evidences the principles as well as the way these principles are applied (Maranville 782-807).

Conclusion Management as a science was earlier on determined by authors of scientific management especially Frederick Taylor, and remains today in a number of empirical researches on strategic management. On the other hand, Henry Mintzberg molded strategic management as an art, and is clear in heterogeneous theories of management.

Singularly, most scholars besides management practitioners blend art as well as science to more effectively cultivate managerial talent. Distinctly, this is the case in recent theories of management (Zhang and Rajagopalan, 28).

Works Cited Bingham, Christopher and Kathleen Eisenhardt. Rational heuristics: The simple rules that strategists learn from process experience. Strategic Management Journal. 32.13 (2011): 1437-1464. Print.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Strategic Management science or art by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Gao, Fei. Is management science or art? Systems Research and Behavioural Science. 25.1 (2008): p125-136. Print.

Hodgkinson, Gerrard and Mark, Healey. Psychological foundations of dynamic capabilities: reflexion and reflection in strategic management. Strategic Management Journal. John Wiley


The comparison between National Rifle Association and the American Association of Retired People in regard to power Research Paper best college essay help: best college essay help

The NRA, National Rifle Association, was formed in 1871 by Col. William C. Church and Gen. George Wingate. This followed a poor show of marksmanship by their troops. The main aim of forming the group was to encourage people to practice shooting as a sport or a form of entertainment.

AARP, American Association of Retired Persons, is a membership organization that is comprised of senior citizens who are 50 years and above.

It was founded by Dr. Ethel Percy Andrus to protect the social life interest of senior citizens ranging from job placement, money management, tax preparation and prescribed drug cost especially so negotiating for an affordable health insurance. Both NRA and AARP are prominent, but I find NRA being more powerful than AARP.

Between the two organizations AARP, has the larger membership of about 35.7 million as of February 2010 (NRA, 2011) which is almost ten times that of NRA which was estimated at 4.3 million(Opensecrets.Org, 2011). Over the years, changes occur in most interest groups that see their membership rise or fall.

Some of these reasons are as a result of members’ frustration due to lack of expected results or while membership surge occurs when the interest groups attains certain goals in such an incredible way.

In the year 2005, for example AARP was said to have a membership of about 39 million (Kaiser, 2005), this number has however dwindled over the years to the current 35.7 million. On the other hand, NRA membership has been growing through the years even though not at a very high rate. In many cases, growing numbers indicate growing faith if not trust and power.

With such a high number of members comes power, but that is not always automatic. Power is the ability to influence policy making in both the political arena and legal framework. Having a high number of members therefore puts an interest group in a better position for negotiation than its counterpart; however, power is sought rather than given on a silver platter.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While AARP may have the numbers to be able to put so many candidates through to congress their influence on policymaking is minimal as compared to the influence made by the NRA.

With its 4 million members, NRA is able to reach out to the congressmen and influence the policies that they make in a way that favors and protects the interest of her members (AARP, 2011). In 1934 for instance, NRA formed legislative affairs division to counter attacks on the second amendment rights.

In 1975, NRA realized the importance of having a political defense to the second amendment and formed the Institute for Legislative Action, (Opensecrets.Org, 2011). In fact sometime this year NRA carried out a survey to establish the problems her members were facing in getting initial firearm certificates and even those renewing (Alger, 2011).

Basically, NRA opposes any attempt to restrict gun ownership including background check on those wishing to acquire firearms and worse still firearm registration. Unlike NRA members who exude confidence and gratitude, many members of AARP have ended up frustrated by this interest group due to what they consider poor lobbying of their rights.

In an article, Frank Kaiser claims that more than 14 million seniors under Medicare plan without drug coverage still struggle to buy medicine among other expenses (Kaiser, 2005). If healthcare was the main objective and idea behind the organization then the organization has failed its members. AARP then lacks the power to have the interest of her members catered for.

Over the years, AARP has severally been accused of furthering other interests other than those of its members. Frenk (2010) observed that more than 40 million people are still uninsured due to lack of affordable quality services.

While AARP is supposed to be a non-profit making organization some of her revenue has been attributed to proceeds that are made from selling insurance and other financial services to the members. In 2005, AARP was involved in a tag of war with the then administration of President Bush who wanted to introduce a scheme where social security would be privatized.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The comparison between National Rifle Association and the American Association of Retired People in regard to power specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This opposition made some people to question the credibility and integrity of the organization. Indeed James K. Glassman an enterprise scholar is reported to have said that the idea suggested by Bush had fewer risks as compared to AARP’s selling of mutual funds (Gleckman et al, 2005).

This was a real show of distrust. AARP’s reputation suffered a major setback in the sense that it was clear to all that the organization put commercial interests before that of the members.

Controversy seems to have dogged AARP for a long time. In the year 1979, one of its founders Leonardo Davis was forced out of office in a most embarrassing way on claims of illegal business practices and representing the organization in fraudulent way (Jeanty, 2011).

In the year 2007 AARP made 497.6 million dollars from royalties and fees that the organization receives from the companies she endorses (Kaiser, 2007).

Reputation is a vital component of power or the route to get there. Once the reputation is dented power is lost. Since both NRA and AARP are interest groups and nonprofit making at that the one sure way of comparing the money they have is looking at the way they spend the money to get their way or to influence policy makers through lobby groups.

AARP have an upper hand in that their members are exclusively senior citizens who comprise nearly half of the voting citizens and therefore they can claim to have put most politicians to office.

NRA on the other hand is not as lucky. The only way for her to get access to power is through lobby groups. The NRA lobby machinery or group is so powerful that it has grip on both houses of congress. Actually in the year 2001 NRA replaced AARP as Washington’s most powerful lobbying group.

When it comes to organization, NRA has got it all right. In order to make their lobbying as effective as possible, NRA established Institute of Legislative Action (ILA). This arm of NRA serves also to mobilize and inform the public about various undertakings of the organization.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The comparison between National Rifle Association and the American Association of Retired People in regard to power by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This makes members feel involved and part of the whole process. Apart from visiting universities and giving talks NRA has accounts on the social network such as twitter and facebook. Keeping in touch with her members makes them feel closer and important which is a vital factor in maintaining a good reputation and power.

AARP on the other hand seem to have slept on their job. Most of the lobbying and public relations are marketing related and most people feel that their needs are not being addressed or worse still the organization has lost focus of its mandate. Though AARP has attained some heights in the past, there is need to re-focus.

According to New York Times, “AARP has adopted a pragmatic, bipartisan approach over the last decade. Using its well-financed lobbying machine, the group was instrumental in obtaining Medicare prescription drug coverage in 2003, blocking George W. Bush’s efforts to privatize Social Security in 2005 and getting President Obama’s health care plan passed in 2010.” (Lynch, 2011).

The damage done to AARPs reputation is immense and their power to influence decision is little. If world ratings are anything to go by then good reputation is power according to my personal perspective. In his article Daniel Drezner shows how the perception of the US has changed across the globe.

He has done this by comparing the perception of the US by other countries when President Bush was in power and when President Obama took over. When several people, especially those that you wish to manipulate, think you are a good person, they also tend to believe that your policies are equally good.

That may not always be true but even then, you have more supporters and friends in your camp who are at your disposal. They can trust you they can work with you. When President Obama took over in 2008 the only thing that changed immediately is the reputation of the country. America won more friends and without a word gained back its former position in the world (Drezner, 2009).

References AARP. (2011). AARP history. Web.

Alger, L. (2011). Notes from the secretary general. National Rifle Association Journal, XC (2), 2.

Drezner, D. W. (2009). A hard measure of Obama’s soft power. Foreign Policy. Web.

Frenk, J. (2010).Globalization of health and health services. The Journal AARP International. Web.

Gleckman, H. et al. (2005). By raising its voice AARP raises questions. Bloomberg Businessweek. Web.

Jeanty, J. (2011). About the AARP Lobby. Web.

Kaiser, F. (2005). When will AARP grow some balls. Suddenly Senior. Web.

Lynch, F. R. (2011). How AARP Can Get Its Groove Back. New York Times. Web.

NRA. (2011). A brief history of the NRA. Web.

Opensecrets. (2011). National rifle Assn: Responsive politics. Web.


Baby Gap Company’s Expansion Strategy Case Study college admission essay help

Analysis of Baby Gap Baby Gap is the company which used to be rather popular among youth in 1990’s. Still, the wrong expansion strategy of the company turned it to suffer greatly. The company debt increased and to save the situation, Baby Gap spent less on the quality of the product. People noticed it immediately and the company sales were declined as well.

Since 1990’s up to 200’s the situation in the company was rather unstable, still, having expanded internationally and having invited a new designer, the company is planning to return its positions at the market.

The main competitors of the Baby Gap are the following family clothing industry performers, TJX Companies Inc., Ross Stores Inc., and Abercrombie


Effects of Animal Testing and Alternatives Research Paper college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Validity of Animal Tests

Alternative Methods

Effects of Animal Testing

Animal Rights Movements



Introduction Before human beings utilize a substance as either a cosmetic or a drug, its effectiveness and efficiency is first tested. Such tests are usually performed in animals mainly because of their inferiority in society. Animals end up with permanent damages or prolonged sufferings due to effects of chemicals.

Proponents of animal testing argue that it is better to use animals because human life is more valuable than anything in the world could be. Opponents have stood firm to challenge the position by claiming that human beings should come up with other alternatives instead of using living creatures.

Hartung is one of the staunch opponents of animal testing who has overseen reduction of animal testing in Europe. Hartung argues that abolition of animal testing will probably lead to better science since the method was developed out of a crisis (Abbott, 2005).

This means that it is not accurate and can lead to more complications in human beings. Indeed, several tragedies have been reported in various parts of the world including the 1930s incident where a woman lost sight after using Lash-Lure to color her eyes.

Animal tests should be evaluated carefully because of a number of reasons. One reason is that chemicals can have diverse effects that cannot be determined by animal testing alone. For instance, animal skin is different from that of human beings hence the difference in effects.

Again, the policy should be reviewed to conform to environmental demands since some chemicals have been proved to have acute consequences to the environment. This paper analyzes the effects of animal testing and gives some alternatives that can be employed in testing chemicals. It further looks at the activities of animal rights groups and their achievements.

Validity of Animal Tests In many tests, only rats are used in studies implying that the sample size for researches is usually limited. Researchers cannot apprehend the full effects of a chemical since more advanced or higher animals are not used.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Scholars attempt to research on primates using young animals, which make interpretation of data very hard. Chemicals manufactured after undergoing tests using juvenile primates are usually dangerous to human beings since their effects have no enough literature.

Furthermore, there is usually incongruity as regards to the age of species. Researchers approximate the age of animals and equate them to those of human beings.

This normally results to serious problems when not carefully considered because days are equated to years of human beings, for instance; a drug that is effective in rats at day two is believed to be functional to human beings at the age of two years (Baldrick, 2010). Chemicals and drugs do not apply uniformly in animals and human beings because environments are different.

Before a genuine study is ascertained, many animals are to be used. In the study involving rodents, various species are easily obtained and utilized in research but the case is different for higher animals.

It would take researchers a very long time to get species of the same offspring hence they use available ones, which result to insufficient evidence causing major problems afterwards. Scholars supporting this idea claim that getting monkeys with suitable gender is near to impossibility.

Another challenge to the proponents of animal testing is related to dosage and the time line for a study. A human being is not exactly equivalent to an animal that is why the quantity of a drug to be utilized is an issue. Researchers have not actually determined the exact dose for human beings in some chemicals, which have led to deaths or harms. Many individuals misuse chemicals since there are no clear guidelines on their usage.

Alternative Methods Creton (2010) gives various methods that scientists need to employ in their studies to avoid calamities. Such methods are necessary since they are ethically based and more effective. In fact, Creton argues that animal testing should be applied as a last resort and need to be highly controlled to produce accurate results.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Effects of Animal Testing and Alternatives specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The scholar further claims that a number of reasons are to be evaluated first before employing a testing method. One of the simplest ways of validating a chemical is calculating its toxicity in a mixture. This method evaluates the effects of mixtures of chemicals basing on the characteristics of each chemical element hence avoiding animal testing.

Environmental hazards of a chemical can determine its effects instead of exposing it to a living organism. This method is mostly recommended in determining the effectiveness or effects of a pesticide. The method employs a formula that calculates the lethal dose in an element.

The EU has already incorporated the method in its administrative system to determine the effects of industrial products, biocides and pesticides. Furthermore, the EU explains clearly to users that no further tests are to be conducted using animals because the substance is efficient.

Moreover, the internationally recognized body charged with the responsibility of classifying and labeling chemicals has integrated the method in its plans and further suggests that only methods that do not use animal tests are allowed. The global body (GHS) promises to avail data for complex elements, which would aid in their classification without using animal tests.

Another technique for identifying an element or testing its superiority is the read-across method. The method permits scholars to come up with structural, chemical and toxicological features of elements that further allow prediction of chemicals without relevant/enough data.

The technique definitely trims down the need for animal testing. The international regime (IRP) incorporated the method in its programs long time ago. Before utilizing the read-across method, the UK authorities have established a number of factors to be considered in order to attain good results.

These include comparison of the purity and impurity summary of substances, their physicochemical features, their expected lethal kinetics and finally the importance of reading across the outcomes acquired from obsolete test techniques.

QSAR is another non-animal testing method that can be employed in establishing the effects of elements, offering data for use in primacy situation, guiding the plan of a testing approach and offering first hand data.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Effects of Animal Testing and Alternatives by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More To fasten the utilization of QSAR, the Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) has formulated the QSAR utility toolbox-software that offers a translucent and reproducible technique for assembling and assessing elements, as well as employing read-across.

The original version of the software has been availed as a free download from the OECD’s Web site. Besides, the OECD has formulated values and regulations on legalization of QSARs to augment the dogmatic recognition of QSAR sculpt for evaluating chemical wellbeing.

Effects of Animal Testing The circumstances under which animals are exposed to human testing have led to cancer in rats, although animal experiment outcomes were acknowledged as of little significance to humans. The only justification being presented for this pronouncement is that there are anatomical and physiological disparities between people and animals.

It is essential to note that even though animals are usually employed in cancer study, they do not contract the human type of cancer, which attacks membranes such as lungs. Approximately 9% of the sedated animals in the experiments pass on.

It is exciting to know that animals and people metabolize 83% of materials separately (Speit, 2008). Majority health specialists concur that information from animal experiments cannot be extrapolated securely to human beings.

In animal experimentation, poisonous chemicals to humans are safe whereas friendly chemicals to humans such as lemon juice are harmful. Genetically modified animals (GMA) will never be replicas for human sickness. In reality, drugs that are approved as harmless in animal experiments cause 88% of stillbirths in human beings.

Animal Rights Movements The idea of animal rights is not new in the world because it can be attributed to the earliest animal activists in the 6th century such as Pythagoras. The coming of scholars such as Aristotle and Plato relegated animals by placing them in a low status in society. Aristotle wrote much about politics while insisting that man was above everything in society and every creature belonged to man.

It was therefore upon man to decide what to do with such creatures. The works of Aristotle inspired the first Greek scientists to use animals for experiments. However, Aristotle’s writings were evaluated in the 19th century when British nationals questioned the rationale behind animal testing.

The opponents of animal testing quickly formed an organization and spread their ideas to other places such as the United States. Within no time, the organization had lobbied governments of various states to come up with legislative laws that would protect animals (Hills, 1993).

In 1890s, animal rights organizations seemed to progress well when Henry Salt published his first book. Even though Salt’s works were influential, it never attracted huge groups than the 1970s publications did. Scholars in 1970s questioned scientists about why they used living organisms in performing deadly experiments.

They claimed that animals are living things, which can feel pain just like human beings. Scholars observed that human beings are accorded fair treatment because of their reasoning capacities (Viren, Funrnham,


20th Century Socialism Research Paper college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Socialism Socialism in USA can be traced to the days of the arrival of German immigrants and during the formation of Marxian Socialist Union. Socialism was considered as the belief and hope that men could be rescued from their helplessness and depression by use of government power. The Socialist Party in the USA was founded by Eugene Debs, and it thrived under his charismatic leadership. The party sought to tackle the American problems in an American manner (Socialism 1).

During his radical speeches, Debs acknowledged that there was only one general labor problem and there was no Negro problem. He expressed optimism that racial prejudice would evaporate. Consequently, in one of his articles, Debs mentioned that the socialist party had nothing special or specific to offer the Negroes, and that it was impossible to appease all the races.

According to Debs, the Socialist Party was to be the party of the working class irrespective of the race and color. The failure of the Socialist Party to deal with the Negro problem was due to its perspective of the racial prejudice problem and Debs acceptance of the racial supremacy notion in his political thoughts. Debs acknowledged that there was no Negro problem but general labor problem.

Philip Randolph was an American activist who served as the leader of both the Negro Civil Rights Movement and the Labor Movement in the USA. Randolph led a match to the Washington, which was aimed at pressurizing President Franklyn Roosevelt to desegregate all production plants dealing with military supplies during the World War II.

Consequently, Randolph inspired the freedom budget that sought to ameliorate the economic problems of the Negro in general and workers and the unemployed, in particular. Randolph was a vocal agitator and an advocate for the civil rights of the Afro-American community. His match to Washington was aimed at ending discrimination in factories.

It is through the efforts of Randolph that the President promulgated the Fair Employment Act as a measure to address the grievances of Randolph. Consequently, Randolph led a demonstration at the Madison Square to advocate for equal opportunities in all spheres of employment from the government, labor union and military to war industries.

This allowed the government to incorporate the Negroes into employment that was earlier preserved for the white employees. The renewed efforts of Randolph aimed at ending racial discrimination in the military led to the formation of a committee which was later dubbed Civil Disobedience.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This forced the president of the USA Harry Truman to end racial segregation in the military by applying an executive order. Consequently, Randolph emerged as an advocate for ending immigration restrictions (Socialism 1).

During the new deal, the communists contributed more on matters job creation than the socialists and democrats. This is because the communists advocated for welfare capitalism which emasculated radicalism so such an extent that they could not be called socialists. Democrats estranged radicalism but they never win any support elsewhere (Laslett 40).

Philip Randolph was a black man and a founder of the magazine the messenger which was provocative and radical. He was described as the most dangerous Negro by President Woodrow Wilson. Besides organizing worker strikes, he joint hands with the progressives and the communists to form the National Negro Congress.

He considered socialism as the only way of uniting the blacks and he worked for the emancipation of the whites through Labor unions. He was instrumental in creating the consciousness which led to the establishment of the Civil Rights Movement (Randolph 7).

In the advent of the Southern Civil Rights Movement, there were various realignments and changes in party position. The Democratic Party embraced radical liberalism. The passage of civil rights acts during the period of 1960s enabled parties to switch positions on civil rights matters.

Democratic Party supported civil rights positions and this position was in consonant with that of the grassroots activists. This was after the New Deal coalition of southern democrats and the northern liberals which was considered to be a successful alignment.

Big Bill Haywood was an American radical who established and led the Industrial Workers of the World. Haywood was also an executive committee member of the Socialist Party of America. It was in his capacities in the above organizations that he organized various strikes and labor battles.

We will write a custom Research Paper on 20th Century Socialism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Haywood was considered as an advocate of Industrial Unionism, which advocated for the organization of all industry workers into one umbrella union. It was because of his radicalism that he was arrested and prosecuted on several occasions.

Haywood was dismissed from the Socialist Party in 1912 due to his advocacy for direct action in contrast to a political tactic that was considered the position of the party. Haywood represented the interests of the working class in the labor struggles. He occupied the second top most position in the Women Federation of Miners.

The Wobblies or the Industrial Workers of the World was an international union that represented the interest of the workers and was formed by socialists. Wobblies promoted industrial unionism as opposed to craft unionism advocated by other unions.

The Wobblies broke out of the Socialist Party due to its policy stand since it argued for political action contrary to arbitration and political affiliation, which were the stand of the Socialist Party. The Wobblies advocated and appealed to the working-class and the Negroes. The government ultimately capitalized on the instabilities of the World War I to crush down on the activities of the Wobblies (Socialism 1).

Lack of socialism in USA implies advanced capitalist practices. U.S. lacks social-democratic presences with a working class that lack class consciousness. According to Lipset, there is no socialism in USA due to the nature of its society.

He argued that America is a new society which lacks class stratification as well as a feudal system. The ideological emphasis which stresses on equality, liberty and egalitarianism make it difficult to persuade the Americans to embrace socialism.

U.S. already believes in the principal of equal opportunity for all. Consequently, internal factors in US radicalism make it hard for socialism to thrive. These factors include diversity in cultures and languages and racial divide and strong economic growth.

The nature of America’s society prohibits the emergence of class based political ideologies, which subscribe to the European model. Class feeling that is typical of European societies is absent in America. The mass American politics and the American culture of consumption developed long before it happened in Europe.

Not sure if you can write a paper on 20th Century Socialism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The prevalence of socialism in Europe is due to the fact that Europe was catching up with the stage that America was several years ago, and it was experiencing an economic and political process which had been already experienced in the USA. The presence of democratic parties in the United States of America has been considered as the best instruments for social-democratic movements (Foner 57).

The riddle of socialism in the USA had puzzled Marx and Engels. To them, capitalism was ripe in the USA, and also it was ripe for social revolutions, but they argued that it was the absence of an entrenched feudal system and tradition that hindered the development of socialism.

It is the varied definition of socialism that made it difficult to comprehend whether there was or no socialism in the USA. The absence of revolutionary or labor movement in the USA is one of the factors that explained the absence of socialism.

The USA does not have a large social-democratic party like the ones that exist in the European countries like the Labor Party in Britain or the Federalist Party in France or the Communist Party of Italy, which have the capacity to capitalize on mass socialism consciousness.

Consequently, it is explained that its nature of advanced capitalism and as a country that lacks strong social-democratic presence with social class that lacks class consciousness also explain the absence of socialism in the USA. It is worth mentioning that the three factors which are recipes for socialism are ideology, politics and class structure.

Consequently, people must be united by a common course in order to keep socialism alive since in ancient Europe it was the militancy in factories that was often reflected in the class politics of socialism. The American form of socialism was the only workplace oriented as opposed to creating their presence in the workplace and the rejuvenation of Labor and Socialist parties in the period of 1820 were short-lived because they ran out of ideologies, and they failed to create a presence between industrial relations and American political practice (Foner 58).

Socialism failed in the USA due to the class conflation and the features of the American society and politics which come with unfortunate consequences. The absence of a powerful social-democratic party can be used to explain why socialism could not thrive in US. The American society is also static.

This implies that their political ideology, limited mobility and limited understanding, and the tradition of American radicalism could not allow socialism to flourish. According to Hart, socialism is an inherited practice which is traced to the feudal past and from society with class stratification. He argued that minus feudal tradition and class oppression in society, socialism becomes dormant. Since socialism advocated for a classless society, America had already reached that kind of society.

Emigrants from Germany and France created the fear that the country was being occupied by a majority Catholic population, and they injected a new dimension into the slavery debate which they constantly opposed. Majority of them joined the Republican Party in 1860 elections due to the fact that the party advocated for an end to slavery and equality for all.

The Germany immigrants were running away after an unsuccessful revolution in 1848. They were pleased with the abolitionist policy of the Republican Party and the party’s policy of free soil. Germany’s support for Union during the American civil war also attracted the German immigrants to the Republican Party (Foner 69).

Red republicanism in the USA was rebranded to democratic republicanism, which was understood to combine democracy, which was the voice of the people and republicanism which was the spirit that unified the Americans as a state. The U.S. socialist party was similar to the ones formed in Europe since it was aimed at helping the peasant and the lower-class population.

Socialist parties emerged as instruments for advocacy and with the main task of destabilizing the status quo that only benefited the minority at the expense of the majority. Socialist parties were instrumental in shaping the modern-day politics. Socialism was instrumental in ameliorating the existent labor conditions all over the world.

Lincoln was a red Republican. He became the first present to be elected on the Republican ticket. Red Republican was the party which was formed to abolish all forms of slavery. Republican is considered a radical democratic party due to its positions on several issues.

This was imminent immediately after it assumed government; the party oversaw various radical changes, which were aimed at saving the union which included the abolition of slavery, and it advocated for equal rights of all men following the American civil war.

The radical picture of the red Republican was manifested in its support for capitalism and commerce where it pressed for an increase in wages and pension for veterans of the union. Red Republicans also supported the annexation of Hawaii. The party’s position against the US joining the League of Nations was by itself radical (Foner 75).

Works Cited Foner, Eric. “Why is there no Socialism in the United States?” History Workshop Journal 1.1 (n.d.): 57-80.

Randolph, Philip. Black Macho and black Feminism. Radical America 14.2 (1980):1-70. Print.

Laslett, John. Failure of a dream?: essays in the history of American socialism. 1984. University of California Press. Print.

Socialism. “Socialism in America.” U.S. History, n.d. Web.


Coles and Innovations Report best essay help

Table of Contents Executive summary


Business elements and how they can be improved through e-tailing

Current business elements with the innovation

Consequences of the innovation not occurring




Executive summary The report is an expansion of an existing business. It entails the introduction of Asian foods in a large supermarket chain – Coles. The innovation will be enhanced through e-tailing of the commodities.

A number of business processes will be modified through the combination of these two strategies and they include: customer service, product receipt, order fulfilment, product selection and product search.

Introduction Coles is a successful Australian retailing company that has approximately 11 million customers. It needs to gain competitive advantage by expanding its market share. This report has identified a gap in its product range and market demographics.

The organisation does not sell Asian food, yet there are plenty of immigrants in Australia. Furthermore, this same group has recorded greater internet use than other minorities in the population. Therefore, this report suggests the introduction of Asian foods in Coles’ retail portfolio, and sale of the commodities through the internet or physical stores.

Business elements and how they can be improved through e-tailing The inputs involved at Coles are physical and conceptual (Jarvis 2005). The physical ones encompass materials, tools, and finance. The materials are the products that are sold in its shelves. This organisation sources its fresh foods from its own farms, and other partner farmers.

It gets manufactured goods directly from the concerned industries in huge quantities. This eliminates the need for intermediaries and other people who may inflate product prices. Currently, there is a challenge in the product choices because it does not cater to a certain group of people.

The company’s competitiveness can be improved if it incorporates this group of people. Asian food is missing from the company’s product offerings, yet this group has some of the most desirable characteristics. It has been shown that among the minorities in Australia, Asians happen to earn the highest amount of disposable income.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Furthermore, the proportion of persons who have completed higher education is greater than it is among other ethnic groups. Therefore, they have the financial resources needed to support a new portfolio of Asian foods at Coles. Their numbers have also been increasing tremendously in the country.

There is a need for product line expansion and customer base expansion targeting a new set of consumers. In terms of Coles’ physical inputs, the company normally uses part of its profits to reinvest back in the business. It would have more profits for its inputs if it changed its business processes slightly.

Most of its equipments centre on service automation, product movement or delivery, and transactions; it needs to change this. Business inputs can also be intangible. These encompass the information, ideas, data, values and beliefs of the stakeholders in this business.

Currently, the business needs to know more about its consumers or its market. Therefore, they require information gathering. They need to expand their business idea to include a new product-category and a new market segment. Employees’ social attitudes, abilities and expectations need to be altered so as to accommodate a new product type (Shaw 1999, p. 100).

The processes at Coles are currently focused on operational ones. Human and technical mechanisms are implemented in order to achieve business objectives. This is done through retail stores and online selling. Inputs are taken and then made available to consumers through these two major avenues.

Transportation of goods from manufacturers and farms is one such example. The company’s processes ought to be made more transformational. This can be achieved by using ideas as an input and transforming them into a new business element. In other words, this company is in need of a fresh innovation. The creative processes ought to be improved to increase market share.

Outputs at Coles are physical and conceptual. The physical ones are monetary (Coles happens to have high cash flows and profits that allow it to invest back into the business in order to keep generating more profits). The conceptual ones include influences and information.

We will write a custom Report on Coles and Innovations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Every sale or transaction made is an opportunity to learn more about the consumer. This acts as feedback that enables the company to provide better services to other consumers or to that same consumer. After-sale services can be improved at Coles, especially because the company sells a portion of its products online.

The purpose for creating this business was to offer convenience to the people living around Coles. The company wanted customers to get whatever they wanted at a cheap price and in one place.

The target consumers in this business are mainstream Australian consumers. In order to increase the company’s profitability, Coles will need to expand its customers’ demographics. Asian consumers can be specifically targeted for the new product.

Current business elements with the innovation This innovation consists of three main concepts; product expansion, market expansion and internet retailing. It will introduce Asian foods to the market through online selling and in-store selling.

The new products that will be on offer include: sals and bean sauce, which all contain beans as the main ingredient, strongly flavoured and authentic Asian noodles, rice crisps, rice crackers, pickles and legumes, Asian meal kits and Asian sauces. This product will cater for the Asian market in Australia.

It will also provide a potential area for growth among mainstream Australian customers. Many individuals are now developing a taste for Asian foods and strong flavours, so these products can be quite promising in the market (Promar International 2000, p. 5).

In order to carry out a systemic analysis of the new and improved business processes involved at Coles, it will be useful to use the consumer mercantile activities as suggested by Kalakota and Whinston (1997, p. 45). It is a model that was designed to evaluate how businesses could be enhanced through the internet.

These activities are eight, and they include: product service search, comparison shopping, product selection, negotiation of terms, order placement, payment, product receipt and customer service support.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Coles and Innovations by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The product service search is one of the mercantile activities that will be altered through this innovation. Consumers who are interested in finding a product will usually look for it physically in stores or through catalogues and phone inquiries.

However, through the use of e-tailing, customers can use search engines in order to find Asian food. Coles will be one of the first organisations that will be found on search engines when customers are looking for Asian foods in Australia. The internet will aid product searches by giving information about the product even before putting it on the shelves.

Customers can prepare to purchase it online, or may choose to go and inspect it in the physical stores. If the latter case is true, they will be given information about the exact in-store locations of the Asian foods, so that they can save time on it.

Therefore, the internet will be useful for driving consumers to the online Coles store as well as the physical retail stores. They may also be told about the availability of the products; i.e., whether they are in stock or out of stock at that particular time. This way, consumers will get information more quickly and will respond to the provision of the services.

It has been shown that Asian consumers account for 37% of all internet use; 27% of all internet users are Europeans while 20% are North Americans (Turban et al. 2008, p. 33). This means that such individuals are likely to do product searches for their cuisines using the internet.

Product comparisons are usually done through an analysis of the attributes available for a particular product. Catalogues and review adverts have been the main method for Coles.

It has not used online avenues for this purpose. In this introduction of Asian foods, Coles will offer its shoppers mix-and-match options, so that they can select complementary dishes. For those who may not be too particular about the kind of Orient dishes they want, the online service will allow them to compare prices for various Oriental foods.

They may also compare attributes such as the use of certain spices or prevalence of particular ingredients like beans in the dishes selected. Customers will have a decision support system that will offer them alternatives if they can’t find the Asian dish they are looking for.

Product selection occurs when the concerned consumers select the product that meets their needs. As the customer selects his or her product online, he or she will be given information about the weight, ingredients and method of preparation of the dishes.

If a customer chooses to buy the commodity physically, he or she will find this information in the product package and additional tags. During this phase, customers will also be given additional information about other related foods that they may consider purchasing in the future (Otto


Campus Life Problem Motivation Report (Assessment) college essay help online: college essay help online

Aerobic is a physical exercise, which helps people to keep their body fit. Some students may fail to attend aerobics class because they are not interested. Lack of interest may hinder students from attending class. Another reason is that the activities involved in aerobics may be difficult for students.

If students, do not expect to learn from aerobic class they will not attend. Students always like to attend classes that they will learn from the lecturer. Aerobic classes are recreational and so student may fail to attend, as it will not help in their course work. Because this course is not examinable, students may under look it.

Students’ attitude towards the lecturer may also determine whether they will attend the class. If students have a negative attitude towards the lecturer, they will not attend classes. The workload of student in course work may make him miss aerobic class in order to concentrate on course work .

Finally, students may fail to attend aerobic classes due to influence from other students. The number of students reduces dramatically as time goes. Those who drop continue influencing others to follow suit.

Motivation is the process that guides and maintains goal oriented behaviors. It involves biological, social and emotional cognitive forces that influence behavior. It causes people to act. Extrinsic motivations are those that arise from outside the individual. They involve money, promotion, accolades, and social praise.

Intrinsic motivations are those that arise from within an individual such as satisfaction with what he or she is doing. As an aerobic lecturer, one should maintain a positive attitude towards the students. Lecturers who are friendly and knowledgeable about students’ interests demonstrate personal qualities that motivate students.

Discipline is another significant factor in motivating students. It involves responding negatively to behaviors to deter future occurrences. Inform the student that they are making mistakes by not attending classes. Describe the behaviors and standards expected from the students and ask them to comply.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Rewarding the students that attend aerobic class may also serve as a motivator. Extrinsic motivators in terms of reward can help students who lack intrinsic motivation . Reward may be in the form of participation certificate, praise or a gift. As a lecturer, allow students to participate in the activities.

Give some students time to guide others. This will help in boosting their self-esteem and consequently motivation increase. Caring about the student may also improve their morale. Show them that you care by sharing problems with them. Ask them the problems they face, their concerns and their goals. In doing this, the student will see the lecturer as an experienced person, and they will appreciate his class.

Most of the students will attend classes if they feel that their needs are satisfied. Making the students, understand the importance of the course is also crucial. Some students may not see the need for aerobic class. It is essential for the lecturer to explain to them the benefits of attending the lecture.

Allowing student to take control in class motivates them. Let the student choose the schedule and the time to have aerobic lectures. Students may be willing to attend lectures in the evening instead of morning. Ask them the appropriate time to hold aerobic class and negotiate with them. In this, they will feel motivated. Teamwork may also help in motivating the students. Working as a group or a team will motivate students, as they will enjoy what they are doing.

Works Cited Whetten, David and Cameron Kim. Developing Management Skills. New York: Prentice Hall, 2010.


Family Trend Changes Essay argumentative essay help

The hastening of our customs and the organization of the family as the leading structure has led to a new family trend. Although the family trend has conventionally paid attention to the protection of spatial borders, the rising transformations have meant that the family trend of temporality is taking its position next to the trend of territory.

As time becomes less and more precious, there develops more divergence between families, within families as well as the wider social order. This is dependent on responsibilities, time control and entitlements to behavior and genetics.

The thought that family trend is restricted within families is based on quite a number of assumptions. To begin with, in dissimilarity with our daily assumptions that family trend is continuous, linear, uniform and quantitative, trends are experienced with dissimilar connotations and vulnerable to diverse interpretation.

For instance, children and parents stand in a diverse association to family trends because of their distinctive history, biography as well as social status. In addition, time is an essential intermediate through which persons articulate their ideals. Therefore, time is prone to unstable levels of control because it is an entity of compromise.

As a result, family trends tend to adhere to changes in time and may also be affected by genetics and behavior of individuals. As illustrated in cases below, Diseases such as cancer, thyroid cancer, stomach cancer and diabetes fall under such family trends.

In the first case of cancer, the fist parent is aged fifty. His health condition was good until he had gastric cancer surgery about five years ago and had to remove of a part of his stomach. This led to a cancerous condition. Cancer is a chronic infection that gradually develops illness. It has non-specific indicators in its premature stages.

Stomach cancer is caused by long-term inflammation of the stomach, helicobacter pylori infection, poor diet, smoking and family history. It starts when stomach cells become anomalous and mature uncontrollably. These cells form a tissue growth known as a tumor.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Stomach cancer can occur in any stomach part, and can extend to close lymph nodes and other body areas such as the lungs, bones, liver and a woman’s ovaries. The first parent did not visit a doctor until he was an adult. This trend is related to behavior.

The second parent, aged forty five, was good until when he had thyroid cancer about the same year as the first parent. He had a surgery about four years ago and a thyroid was removed. Thyroid cancer is a chronic illness and can cause disability and fatality. The surgery was successful.

The risk factors linked to an augmented likelihood of developing thyroid cancer include race, radiation, inadequate iodine in the diet and family history. Women are more likely than men to get thyroid cancer. Parent two had a sporadic cancer checkup for an extensive time.

However, he has to take hormones for life. Aunt three was okay until she had thyroid cancer almost the same year as the second parent. She had a surgery about three years ago and a thyroid gland was removed. She has a similar condition just like the second parent.

Grandparent one, aged eighty one, was in good health until he was diagnosed with malignant neoplasm. He underwent a surgery and it was successful. He experiences similar conditions just like the fist parent. Nevertheless, he had a lot of the symptoms that characterized this cancer but he never sought for medication until it reached the third stage. This trend is kinked to an individual’s behavior and habits.

Grandparent three is fine and going for annual health checkups. However, he has type 2 diabetes. This form frequently occurs in adulthood. Nonetheless, young people are gradually being established to have this disease. In this state, the pancreas does not form sufficient insulin to maintain blood glucose levels normal. This is due to the body not responding well to insulin. It is a serious condition. It is escalating due to the rising obesity and failure to exercise.

Diabetes is a chronic disease similar to cancer. It is an inheritable disease but can be managed. Therefore, if grandparent three adheres to rules and maintain good habits, the disease can be managed. Risk factors for diabetes include heart disease, inactivity, obesity and some inheritable genes. Grandparent three gets sufficient checkups and follows prescriptions. He ought to eat well, exercise, and take medication. This trend is related to behavior.

We will write a custom Essay on Family Trend Changes specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Aunt one’s health control is very poor. She has diabetes type one. This type can occur at any age. Nonetheless, it is mainly diagnosed in adolescents, children, or young adults. Insulin is a hormone that is generated by specific cells known as beta cells, which are found in the pancreas. In type one diabetes, beta cells of the pancreases generate small or no insulin.

Due to insufficient insulin, glucose increases in the bloodstream rather than the cells. The body is not capable of utilizing this glucose for energy. This results to symptoms of type one diabetes. The precise cause of type one diabetes is unfamiliar. The symptoms include feeling hungry, being very thirsty, low blood sugar, stomach pain and flushed face.

This type is chronic and needs to be followed up. It is significant to adhere to rules and good habits to discover improved results. Her behavior is positive as she eats well, manages stress, and goes for annual checkups. Family trends illustrate the extent to which such diseases can be managed. Good trends lead to better results.

Reference Taylor, S. (2011). Health psychology. 8 ed. New York, NY: Mc-Graw Hill. Print